Genex U-net User Guide(v300r008c00_03)(PDF)-En...
GENEX U-Net V300R008C00
User Guide Issue
03
Date
2012-12-25
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2012. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:
Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China
Website:
http://www.huawei.com
Email:
[email protected]
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
GENEX U-Net User Guide
About This Document
About This Document This document provides the guides for installing and using the GENEX U-Net.
Related Versions The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name
Version
GENEX U-Net
V300R008C00
Intended Audience The intended audience of this document is network plan engineers.
Change History 03 (2012-12-25) This is the third release of V300R008C00. Compared with issue 02 (2012-11-09), this issue incorporates the following changes. Content
Description
Parameters for Setting LTE-FDD Base Station Templates
The content descriptions are changed.
Parameters for Setting LTE-TDD Base Station Templates Parameters for Setting the Parameters of LTE-FDD Cells
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ii
GENEX U-Net User Guide
About This Document
02 (2012-11-09) This is the second release of V300R008C00. Compared with issue 01 (2012-08-10), this issue incorporates the following changes. Content
Description
Importing Neighbor Relationships
The content descriptions are changed.
Planning PRACH Managing the Result of Neighboring Cell Planning 5.11.2 Managing the TSC Planning Result 6.9.6 Checking and Optimizing Neighboring Cell Configuration 6.10.3 Checking and Optimizing Scrambling Code Configuration 7.8.2 Planning PN Codes Parameters for Setting PCI Display Properties Parameters for Planning Neighboring LTE-FDD Cells 5.10.2 Parameters for Planning GSM Neighboring Cells 6.13.2 Parameters for Planning Neighboring UMTS Cells 7.9.4 Parameters for Planning CDMA Neighboring Cells 10.15 Importing BCP Data
New.
Whole document
The content of the document is optimized.
01 (2012-08-10) This is the first release of V300R008C00. Compared with issue Draft A (2012-06-30), this issue incorporates the following changes. Content
Description
1.3 Main Window of the U-Net
The content descriptions are changed.
2.3 Installing a License
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iii
GENEX U-Net User Guide
About This Document
Content
Description
Parameters for Importing Satellite Maps Viewing Capacity Simulation Results of a Single-Mode Network Parameters for Viewing Capacity Simulation Results of a Single-Mode Network 3.5.6 Parameters for Creating Antennas Viewing the Capacity Simulation Result in a Single Snapshot Parameters for Filtering and Auditing PCI Planning Results 5.6.3 Setting GSM Receivers 7.8.3 Checking PN Code Planning Results 6.11 UMTS Measurement Reports Analysis
New.
6.11.1 Creating a Measurement Report Analysis Group 6.11.2 Geographically Displaying Measurement Report Analysis Results 6.13.10 Parameters for Creating a Measurement Report Analysis Group 6.13.11 Parameters for Geographically Displaying Measurement Report Analysis Results Parameters for Viewing the Properties of Lines Parameters for Setting the Cost231 Walfish-Ikegami Propagation Model Parameters for Setting the Clutter Related Hata Propagation Model Viewing Capacity Simulation Results of an Entire Network Parameters for Viewing Capacity Simulation Results of a Single User Parameters for Viewing Capacity Simulation Results of the Entire Network
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iv
GENEX U-Net User Guide
About This Document
Content
Description
8.7.3 Setting a Multi-Mode Base Station Template 8.8.5 Analyzing Prediction Results Setting Parameters for TRXs in GSM Cells
Delete.
Parameters for Setting Parameters of TRXs in a GSM Cell Whole document
The content of the document is optimized.
Organization 1 Introduction to the U-Net The GENEX U-Net is a professional tool that fully supports the planning of wireless networks. It supports the planning of single-system network and the planning of multi-system network. For example, the U-Net can be used to plan the network using both the GSM technology and UMTS technology or the network using the GSM technology, UMTS technology, and LTEFDD technology. During the entire network life cycle, the U-Net helps operators to complete the initial network design, network simulation, coverage prediction, and network optimization. 2 Installing the U-Net Software This section describes how to install the U-Net software. To complete the installation of the UNet, you only need to run the installation program and then perform operations as prompted by the installation wizard. After the software is installed, you need to load the license and then you can use relevant functions provided by the U-Net. If you need not use the U-Net, you can uninstall it. 3 LTE-FDD Network Planning The U-Net supports the planning of an LTE-FDD network. You can model the actual network environment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creating base stations based on the imported geographic data. Then, you can plan the parameters such as the neighboring cells, and EARFCNs of the network, predict the network coverage range, and evaluate the network capacity to meet your network planning requirements. 4 LTE-TDD Network Planning The U-Net supports data planning for networks in the LTE-TDD mode. You can model the actual network environment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creating base stations based on the imported geographic data. Moreover, you can plan network parameters and predict the network coverage range. In this way, the system can meet the requirements on network planning in different scenarios. 5 GSM Network Planning The U-Net supports the planning of the GSM network. You can model the actual network environment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creating base stations based on the imported geographic data. Then, you can plan the neighboring cell Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
v
GENEX U-Net User Guide
About This Document
parameters, predict the network coverage range, and evaluate the network capacity to meet your network planning requirements. 6 UMTS Network Planning The U-Net supports the planning of the UMTS network. You can model the actual network environment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creating base stations based on the imported geographic data. Then, you can plan the neighboring cells and scrambling codes, predict the network coverage range, and evaluate the network capacity to meet you network planning requirements. 7 CDMA Network Planning This section describes the CDMA network planning. On the CDMA network, the U-Net supports only the function of planning neighboring cells and PN codes. 8 Multi-Mode Network Planning The U-Net supports the planning of the multi-mode network. You can model the actual network environment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creating base stations based on the imported geographic data. Then you can plan neighboring cells on the hybrid network consisting of the GSM, UMTS, and LTE-FDD, and predict both GSM and UMTS network coverage range to meet your network planning requirements. 9 FAQ This section provides the frequently asked questions (FAQs) related to the U-Net. 10 U-Net Auxiliary Functions The U-Net provides functions in addition to network planning, such as moving a map, zooming in or out a map, measuring distances on a map, and setting NE display. 11 Acronyms and Abbreviations This section describes the acronyms and abbreviations involved in the U-Net.
Conventions Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol
Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vi
GENEX U-Net User Guide
About This Document
Symbol
Description Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.
General Conventions The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention
Description
Times New Roman
Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.
Boldface
Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root.
Italic
Book titles are in italics.
Courier New
Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier New.
Command Conventions The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention
Description
Boldface
The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic
Command arguments are in italics.
[]
Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.
{ x | y | ... }
Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected.
[ x | y | ... ]
Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.
{ x | y | ... }*
Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ]*
Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.
GUI Conventions The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vii
GENEX U-Net User Guide
About This Document
Convention
Description
Boldface
Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK.
>
Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Keyboard Operations The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Format
Description
Key
Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.
Key 1+Key 2
Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt +A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.
Key 1, Key 2
Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means the two keys should be pressed in turn.
Mouse Operations The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Action
Description
Click
Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer.
Double-click
Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer.
Drag
Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain position.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
viii
GENEX U-Net User Guide
Contents
Contents About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii 1 Introduction to the U-Net.............................................................................................................1 1.1 Overview............................................................................................................................................................2 1.2 System Structure.................................................................................................................................................4 1.3 Main Window of the U-Net................................................................................................................................5
2 Installing the U-Net Software...................................................................................................15 2.1 Preparation for the Installation.........................................................................................................................16 2.2 Installing the U-Net Main Program..................................................................................................................17 2.3 Installing a License...........................................................................................................................................20 2.4 Starting the U-Net.............................................................................................................................................22 2.5 Uninstalling the U-Net Main Program.............................................................................................................23
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning....................................................................................................24 3.1 Process of LTE-FDD Network Planning..........................................................................................................26 3.2 Creating a Project.............................................................................................................................................28 3.3 Importing Geographic Data..............................................................................................................................29 3.3.1 Basic Knowledge of Geographic Data....................................................................................................29 3.3.2 Importing Geographic Data in Planet Format Quickly...........................................................................33 3.3.3 Importing Sub-graphic Layer Data Files Manually.................................................................................35 3.3.4 Selecting Geographic Data of a Proper Resolution Level.......................................................................37 3.3.5 Setting Display Parameters of Geographic Data.....................................................................................38 3.3.6 Setting Clutter Layer Parameters.............................................................................................................40 3.3.7 Configuring the Projection Mode and Spheroid Data.............................................................................41 3.3.8 Configuring the Coordinate Display Mode.............................................................................................43 3.3.9 Creating Vector Objects..........................................................................................................................44 3.3.10 Interface Reference for Geographic Data..............................................................................................51 3.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands............................................................................................................63 3.4.1 Basic Knowledge of Propagation Models...............................................................................................63 3.4.2 Configuring Propagation Models............................................................................................................67 3.4.3 Assigning Propagation Models................................................................................................................69 3.4.4 Setting Bands...........................................................................................................................................70 3.4.5 Interface Reference for Propagation Models...........................................................................................71 3.5 Adding a Device...............................................................................................................................................94 Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ix
GENEX U-Net User Guide
Contents
3.5.1 Importing Antenna Data..........................................................................................................................94 3.5.2 Setting Antennas......................................................................................................................................98 3.5.3 Setting a TMA.......................................................................................................................................100 3.5.4 Setting Feeders......................................................................................................................................101 3.5.5 Creating Base Stations...........................................................................................................................101 3.5.6 Parameters for Creating Antennas.........................................................................................................102 3.6 Setting LTE-FDD Traffic Parameters............................................................................................................104 3.6.1 Setting MCS Types................................................................................................................................105 3.6.2 Setting LTE-FDD Service Types..........................................................................................................106 3.6.3 Setting LTE-FDD Receivers.................................................................................................................108 3.6.4 Setting LTE-FDD Terminal Types........................................................................................................110 3.6.5 Setting Environment Types...................................................................................................................111 3.6.6 Setting User Types.................................................................................................................................114 3.6.7 Setting Mobility Types..........................................................................................................................116 3.7 Setting LTE-FDD NE Parameters..................................................................................................................117 3.7.1 Importing Base Station Information......................................................................................................117 3.7.2 Creating a Single Site............................................................................................................................118 3.7.3 Setting an LTE-FDD Base Station Template........................................................................................120 3.7.4 Creating Base Stations in Batches.........................................................................................................122 3.7.5 Creating Repeaters.................................................................................................................................123 3.7.6 Creating a Transceiver...........................................................................................................................123 3.7.7 Setting LTE-FDD Cell Parameters........................................................................................................125 3.7.8 Interface Reference for Setting LTE-FDD NE Parameters...................................................................126 3.8 LTE-FDD Prediction......................................................................................................................................151 3.8.1 Basic Knowledge of Prediction.............................................................................................................151 3.8.2 Calculating Path Loss............................................................................................................................157 3.8.3 Setting Shadow Fading Standard Deviation..........................................................................................159 3.8.4 Creating LTE-FDD Prediction Groups..................................................................................................160 3.8.5 Predicting Performance of a Single Cell...............................................................................................162 3.8.6 Managing the Prediction Result............................................................................................................163 3.8.7 Viewing the Prediction Result...............................................................................................................165 3.8.8 Analyzing the Prediction Result............................................................................................................168 3.8.9 Exporting and Printing Prediction Results............................................................................................172 3.8.10 Verifying the Feature Database Based on DT Data.............................................................................175 3.8.11 Exporting DT Feature Data.................................................................................................................175 3.8.12 Interface Reference for LTE-FDD Prediction.....................................................................................178 3.9 LTE-FDD Capacity Simulation......................................................................................................................182 3.9.1 Basic Knowledge of Capacity Simulation.............................................................................................182 3.9.2 Creating LTE Traffic Maps...................................................................................................................193 3.9.3 Creating a Traffic Simulation Group.....................................................................................................196 3.9.4 Viewing the Capacity Simulation Result...............................................................................................198 3.9.5 Exporting Capacity Simulation Results in Batches...............................................................................206 Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
x
GENEX U-Net User Guide
Contents
3.9.6 Interface Reference for LTE-FDD Capacity Simulation.......................................................................207 3.10 Planning LTE-FDD Network Parameters.....................................................................................................231 3.10.1 LTE PCI Planning...............................................................................................................................231 3.10.2 LTE PRACH Planning........................................................................................................................236 3.10.3 LTE-FDD Neighboring Cell Planning................................................................................................238 3.10.4 LTE Frequency Planning.....................................................................................................................245 3.10.5 Automatically Planning LTE Cells......................................................................................................248 3.10.6 Interface Reference to LTE-FDD Network Parameter Planning.........................................................253
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning..................................................................................................274 4.1 Process of LTE-TDD Network Planning........................................................................................................276 4.2 Creating a Project...........................................................................................................................................278 4.3 Importing Geographic Data............................................................................................................................279 4.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands..........................................................................................................279 4.5 Adding a Device.............................................................................................................................................279 4.6 Setting LTE-TDD Traffic Parameters............................................................................................................280 4.6.1 Setting MCS Types................................................................................................................................280 4.6.2 Setting LTE-TDD Service Types..........................................................................................................281 4.6.3 Setting LTE-TDD Receiver Types........................................................................................................283 4.6.4 Setting the LTE-TDD Terminal Type...................................................................................................285 4.6.5 Setting Environment Types...................................................................................................................286 4.6.6 Setting User Types.................................................................................................................................287 4.6.7 Setting Mobility Types..........................................................................................................................287 4.7 Setting LTE-TDD NE Parameters..................................................................................................................287 4.7.1 Importing Base Station Information......................................................................................................287 4.7.2 Creating a Single Site............................................................................................................................287 4.7.3 Setting an LTE-TDD Base Station Template........................................................................................288 4.7.4 Creating Base Stations in Batches.........................................................................................................289 4.7.5 Creating Repeaters.................................................................................................................................289 4.7.6 Creating a Transceiver...........................................................................................................................290 4.7.7 Setting LTE-TDD Cell Parameters........................................................................................................290 4.7.8 Interface Reference for Setting LTE-TDD NE Parameters...................................................................291 4.8 LTE-TDD Prediction......................................................................................................................................308 4.8.1 Basic Knowledge of LTE-TDD Prediction...........................................................................................308 4.8.2 Calculating Path Loss............................................................................................................................314 4.8.3 Setting Shadow Fading Standard Deviation..........................................................................................316 4.8.4 Creating an LTE-TDD Prediction Group..............................................................................................317 4.8.5 Predicting Performance of a Single Cell...............................................................................................318 4.8.6 Viewing Coverage Prediction Results...................................................................................................319 4.8.7 Analyzing the Prediction Result............................................................................................................319 4.8.8 Exporting and Printing Prediction Results............................................................................................319 4.8.9 Verifying the Feature Database Based on DT Data...............................................................................320 4.8.10 Exporting the Feature Database Data..................................................................................................320 Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xi
GENEX U-Net User Guide
Contents
4.8.11 Parameters for Creating LTE-TDD Prediction Groups.......................................................................320 4.9 LTE-TDD Capacity Simulation......................................................................................................................322 4.10 Planning LTE-TDD Network Parameters....................................................................................................322 4.10.1 LTE PCI Planning...............................................................................................................................323 4.10.2 LTE PRACH Planning........................................................................................................................323 4.10.3 LTE-TDD Neighboring Cell Planning................................................................................................323 4.10.4 LTE Frequency Planning.....................................................................................................................323 4.10.5 LTE Cell Automatic Planning.............................................................................................................323
5 GSM Network Planning..........................................................................................................325 5.1 Process of GSM Network Planning................................................................................................................327 5.2 Creating a Project...........................................................................................................................................328 5.3 Importing Geographic Data............................................................................................................................330 5.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands..........................................................................................................330 5.5 Adding a Device.............................................................................................................................................330 5.6 Setting GSM Traffic Parameters....................................................................................................................331 5.6.1 Setting MOS..........................................................................................................................................331 5.6.2 Setting GSM Service Types..................................................................................................................332 5.6.3 Setting GSM Receivers.........................................................................................................................334 5.6.4 Setting GSM Terminal Types................................................................................................................336 5.6.5 Setting Mobility Types..........................................................................................................................337 5.7 Setting GSM NE Parameters..........................................................................................................................337 5.7.1 Importing Base Station Information......................................................................................................337 5.7.2 Creating a Single Site............................................................................................................................338 5.7.3 Setting a GSM BTS Template...............................................................................................................338 5.7.4 Creating a Base Station Automatically..................................................................................................339 5.7.5 Creating a Repeater...............................................................................................................................339 5.7.6 Creating a Transceiver...........................................................................................................................340 5.7.7 Setting GSM Cell Parameters................................................................................................................340 5.7.8 Interface Reference for Setting GSM NE Parameters...........................................................................341 5.8 GSM Prediction..............................................................................................................................................347 5.8.1 Basic Knowledge of GSM Prediction...................................................................................................347 5.8.2 Calculating Path Loss............................................................................................................................352 5.8.3 Setting Shadow Fading Standard Deviation..........................................................................................354 5.8.4 Creating a GSM Prediction Group........................................................................................................355 5.8.5 Viewing the Prediction Result...............................................................................................................356 5.8.6 Analyzing Prediction Results................................................................................................................357 5.8.7 Exporting GSM Planning Results..........................................................................................................358 5.8.8 Verifying the Feature Database Based on DT Data...............................................................................362 5.8.9 Exporting the Feature Database Data....................................................................................................362 5.9 GSM Neighboring Cell Planning ..................................................................................................................362 5.9.1 Basic Knowledge of Neighboring Cell Planning..................................................................................362 5.9.2 Importing Neighboring Relations..........................................................................................................363 Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xii
GENEX U-Net User Guide
Contents
5.9.3 Planning GSM Neighboring Cells.........................................................................................................364 5.9.4 Managing the Result of Neighboring Cell Planning.............................................................................366 5.10 Interface Reference to GSM Network Planning...........................................................................................370 5.10.1 Parameters for Creating GSM Prediction Groups...............................................................................370 5.10.2 Parameters for Planning GSM Neighboring Cells..............................................................................372 5.10.3 Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of Neighboring Cells..................................................376 5.10.4 Parameters for Setting the Audit and Filter Conditions Based on Neighboring Relations.................377 5.10.5 Parameters for Viewing Neighboring Cell Planning Results..............................................................378 5.11 TSC Planning................................................................................................................................................379 5.11.1 Planning TSC.......................................................................................................................................379 5.11.2 Managing the TSC Planning Result....................................................................................................380 5.11.3 IBCA Interference Neighboring Cell Planning...................................................................................383 5.11.4 Managing the Result of IBCA Interference Neighboring Cell Planning.............................................384 5.12 Interface Reference to TSC Parameter Planning..........................................................................................385 5.12.1 Parameters for TSC Planning..............................................................................................................385 5.12.2 Parameters for Viewing the TSC Planning Result..............................................................................386 5.12.3 Parameters for IBCA Interference Neighboring Cell Planning...........................................................387 5.12.4 Parameters for Viewing the Result of IBCA Interference Neighboring Cell Planning.......................388 5.12.5 Parameters for Setting the TSC Display Effect...................................................................................389
6 UMTS Network Planning........................................................................................................390 6.1 Process of UMTS Network Planning.............................................................................................................392 6.2 Creating a Project...........................................................................................................................................394 6.3 Importing Geographic Data............................................................................................................................395 6.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands..........................................................................................................395 6.5 Adding a Device.............................................................................................................................................395 6.6 Setting UMTS Traffic Parameters..................................................................................................................396 6.6.1 Setting MIMO Types.............................................................................................................................396 6.6.2 Setting UMTS Service Types................................................................................................................397 6.6.3 Setting UMTS Receivers.......................................................................................................................400 6.6.4 Setting UMTS Terminal Types.............................................................................................................401 6.6.5 Setting Mobility Types..........................................................................................................................402 6.6.6 Setting the HSUPA Bearer Table..........................................................................................................403 6.6.7 Setting the HSDPA Bearer Table..........................................................................................................403 6.6.8 Setting the R99 Bearer Table.................................................................................................................404 6.6.9 Setting the HSUPA UE Category Table................................................................................................405 6.6.10 Setting the HSDPA UE Category Table..............................................................................................406 6.7 Setting UMTS NE Parameters........................................................................................................................407 6.7.1 Importing Base Station Information......................................................................................................407 6.7.2 Creating a Single Site............................................................................................................................407 6.7.3 Setting UMTS Base Station Templates.................................................................................................408 6.7.4 Creating Base Stations in Batches.........................................................................................................409 6.7.5 Creating Repeaters.................................................................................................................................409 Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xiii
GENEX U-Net User Guide
Contents
6.7.6 Creating a Transceiver...........................................................................................................................410 6.7.7 Setting UMTS Cell Parameters.............................................................................................................410 6.7.8 Interface Reference for Setting UMTS NE Parameters.........................................................................411 6.8 UMTS Prediction............................................................................................................................................418 6.8.1 Basic Knowledge of UMTS Prediction.................................................................................................418 6.8.2 Calculating Path Loss............................................................................................................................423 6.8.3 Setting Shadow Fading Standard Deviation..........................................................................................425 6.8.4 Creating a UMTS Prediction Group......................................................................................................426 6.8.5 Viewing Coverage Prediction Results...................................................................................................427 6.8.6 Analyzing Prediction Results................................................................................................................428 6.8.7 Exporting UMTS Planning Results.......................................................................................................429 6.8.8 Verifying the Feature Database Based on DT Data...............................................................................434 6.8.9 Exporting the Feature Database Data....................................................................................................434 6.9 Planning UMTS Neighboring Cells...............................................................................................................434 6.9.1 Basic Knowledge of Neighboring Cell Planning..................................................................................434 6.9.2 Importing Neighboring Relations..........................................................................................................435 6.9.3 Initial Neighboring Cell Planning for a New Network..........................................................................436 6.9.4 Neighboring Cell Replanning for a Partially Expanded Network.........................................................438 6.9.5 Replanning of Neighboring Cells from 2G Network to 3G Network...................................................439 6.9.6 Checking and Optimizing Neighboring Cell Configuration..................................................................440 6.10 UMTS Scrambling Code Planning...............................................................................................................446 6.10.1 Basic Knowledge of Scrambling Code Planning................................................................................447 6.10.2 Scrambling Code Planning for a New or Expanded Network.............................................................449 6.10.3 Checking and Optimizing Scrambling Code Configuration................................................................451 6.11 UMTS Measurement Reports Analysis........................................................................................................455 6.11.1 Creating a Measurement Report Analysis Group................................................................................455 6.11.2 Geographically Displaying Measurement Report Analysis Results....................................................456 6.12 UMTS Network Capacity Expansion Analysis............................................................................................458 6.12.1 UMTS Network Capacity Expansion Basics.......................................................................................458 6.12.2 Creating a Capacity Expansion Analysis Group.................................................................................459 6.12.3 Geographically Displaying Capacity Expansion Analysis Results.....................................................460 6.12.4 Checking Network Capacity Expansion Results.................................................................................462 6.13 Interface Reference to UMTS Network Planning........................................................................................463 6.13.1 Parameters for Creating UMTS Prediction Groups.............................................................................464 6.13.2 Parameters for Planning Neighboring UMTS Cells............................................................................465 6.13.3 Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of Neighboring Cells..................................................471 6.13.4 Parameters for Setting the Audit and Filter Conditions Based on Neighboring Relations.................472 6.13.5 Parameters for Viewing Neighboring Cell Planning Results..............................................................473 6.13.6 Parameters for Planning UMTS Scrambling Codes............................................................................474 6.13.7 Parameters for Viewing Planning Results of UMTS Scrambling Codes ...........................................476 6.13.8 Parameters for Filtering and Auditing Scrambling Code Planning Results........................................477 6.13.9 Parameters for Setting Bands..............................................................................................................478 Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xiv
GENEX U-Net User Guide
Contents
6.13.10 Parameters for Creating a Measurement Report Analysis Group.....................................................478 6.13.11 Parameters for Geographically Displaying Measurement Report Analysis Results.........................480 6.13.12 Parameters for Creating a Capacity Expansion Analysis Group.......................................................481 6.13.13 Parameters for Geographically Displaying Capacity Expansion Analysis Results...........................484 6.13.14 Parameters for Viewing Network Capacity Expansion Results........................................................484
7 CDMA Network Planning.......................................................................................................487 7.1 Process of CDMA Network Planning............................................................................................................489 7.2 Creating a Project...........................................................................................................................................490 7.3 Importing Geographic Data............................................................................................................................492 7.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands..........................................................................................................492 7.5 Adding a Device.............................................................................................................................................492 7.6 Setting CDMA NE Parameters.......................................................................................................................492 7.6.1 Importing Base Station Information......................................................................................................492 7.6.2 Creating a Single Site............................................................................................................................493 7.6.3 Setting a CDMA Base Station Template...............................................................................................493 7.6.4 Creating Base Stations in Batches.........................................................................................................494 7.6.5 Creating Repeaters.................................................................................................................................494 7.6.6 Creating a Transceiver...........................................................................................................................494 7.6.7 Setting CDMA Cell Parameters............................................................................................................494 7.6.8 Interface Reference for Setting CDMA NE Parameters........................................................................495 7.7 CDMA Neighboring Cells Planning...............................................................................................................499 7.7.1 Basic Knowledge of Neighboring Cell Planning..................................................................................499 7.7.2 Importing Neighboring Relations..........................................................................................................500 7.7.3 Planning CDMA Neighboring Cells......................................................................................................501 7.7.4 Viewing the Planning Result of Neighbor Cells...................................................................................502 7.8 CDMA PN Code Planning.............................................................................................................................506 7.8.1 Basic Knowledge of PN Codes.............................................................................................................506 7.8.2 Planning PN Codes................................................................................................................................507 7.8.3 Checking PN Code Planning Results....................................................................................................507 7.8.4 Setting the Display Properties of PN Codes..........................................................................................510 7.9 Interface Reference to CDMA Network Planning..........................................................................................511 7.9.1 Parameters for Planning PN Codes.......................................................................................................511 7.9.2 Parameters for Viewing PN Code Planning Results.............................................................................512 7.9.3 Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of PN Codes.................................................................512 7.9.4 Parameters for Planning CDMA Neighboring Cells.............................................................................513 7.9.5 Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of Neighboring Cells....................................................515 7.9.6 Parameters for Setting the Audit and Filter Conditions Based on Neighboring Relations...................516 7.9.7 Parameters for Viewing Neighboring Cell Planning Results................................................................517 7.9.8 Parameters for Viewing 1way-2way Checking Results........................................................................518
8 Multi-Mode Network Planning..............................................................................................520 8.1 Process of Multi-Mode Network Planning.....................................................................................................522 8.2 Creating a Project...........................................................................................................................................523 Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xv
GENEX U-Net User Guide
Contents
8.3 Importing Geographic Data............................................................................................................................525 8.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands..........................................................................................................525 8.5 Adding a Device.............................................................................................................................................525 8.6 Managing Traffic Parameters in a Multi-Mode Network...............................................................................526 8.6.1 Setting Environment Types...................................................................................................................526 8.6.2 Setting User Types.................................................................................................................................526 8.6.3 Setting Mobility Types..........................................................................................................................526 8.6.4 Setting Multi-Mode Service Types........................................................................................................526 8.6.5 Setting Multi-Mode Terminal Types.....................................................................................................528 8.7 Setting Multi-Mode NE Parameters...............................................................................................................529 8.7.1 Importing Base Station Information......................................................................................................529 8.7.2 Creating a Single Site............................................................................................................................529 8.7.3 Setting a Multi-Mode Base Station Template.......................................................................................530 8.7.4 Creating Repeaters.................................................................................................................................531 8.7.5 Creating a Transceiver...........................................................................................................................532 8.7.6 Setting Multi-Mode Cell Parameters.....................................................................................................532 8.8 Prediction of a GSM/UMTS Dual-Mode Network........................................................................................532 8.8.1 Basic Knowledge of Prediction in a GSM/UMTS Dual-Mode Network..............................................532 8.8.2 Calculating Path Loss............................................................................................................................535 8.8.3 Creating a Prediction Group in a GSM/UMTS Dual-Mode Network...................................................537 8.8.4 Viewing Coverage Prediction Results...................................................................................................538 8.8.5 Analyzing Prediction Results................................................................................................................538 8.8.6 Exporting Planning Results...................................................................................................................539 8.8.7 Parameters for Creating a Prediction Group in a GSM/UMTS Dual-Mode Network..........................540 8.9 Neighboring Cell Planning in a Multi-Mode Network...................................................................................542 8.9.1 Basic Knowledge of Neighboring Cell Planning..................................................................................542 8.9.2 Importing Neighboring Relations..........................................................................................................543 8.9.3 Planning Neighboring Cells in a Multi-Mode Network........................................................................544 8.9.4 Viewing the Planning Result of Neighbor Cells...................................................................................545 8.9.5 Parameters for Viewing Neighboring Cell Planning Results................................................................549
9 FAQ..............................................................................................................................................551 9.1 How Do I Select the Required Software Before Installing the U-Net............................................................553 9.2 How Do I Select The GENEX U-Net Software Installation Packages At Huawei Support Website............553 9.3 How Do I Check Field Matching in the Field Mapping Area......................................................................554 9.4 How Do I Use the U-Net to Import Data Into or Export Data From an XLS File in Microsoft Office 2007 ..............................................................................................................................................................................556 9.5 How Do I Import a Map in an English Windows 7 Operating System When the Directory of the Map Contains Chinese Characters...............................................................................................................................................557 9.6 How Do I Use the EarthView Function Properly...........................................................................................559 9.7 How Do I Configure the Default Printer to Enable the Progress Bar for Creating a Project to Display Properly ..............................................................................................................................................................................560 9.8 How Do I Draw a Polygon in the Windows XP 64-bit Operating System....................................................561 9.9 How Do I Rectify the ODBC Drive Fault That Results in Project Creation Failure......................................561 Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xvi
GENEX U-Net User Guide
Contents
10 U-Net Auxiliary Functions.....................................................................................................563 10.1 Moving, Centering, and Zooming In/Out on a Map.....................................................................................566 10.2 Measuring Distance on the Map...................................................................................................................567 10.3 Querying the Terrain Profile Between Two Points......................................................................................567 10.4 Querying the Legend Information................................................................................................................568 10.5 Exporting a Map to the Google Earth...........................................................................................................569 10.6 Setting Layer Display Properties..................................................................................................................570 10.7 Saving Display Effect of Map Layers..........................................................................................................573 10.8 Managing Table Windows............................................................................................................................574 10.9 Managing Docked Windows........................................................................................................................576 10.10 Managing the Explorer Window................................................................................................................577 10.11 Setting the Display Properties of NEs........................................................................................................578 10.12 Searching Sites and Cells...........................................................................................................................578 10.13 Grouping Sites and Cells............................................................................................................................579 10.14 Displaying the Cell Hexagon......................................................................................................................582 10.15 Importing BCP Data...................................................................................................................................583 10.16 Printing Planning Results...........................................................................................................................584 10.16.1 Print Suggestions...............................................................................................................................584 10.16.2 Printing Maps....................................................................................................................................584 10.16.3 Customizing a Print Template...........................................................................................................585 10.17 Calibrating Propagation Models.................................................................................................................586 10.17.1 Importing DT Data............................................................................................................................586 10.17.2 Filtering DT Data...............................................................................................................................587 10.17.3 Filtering DT Data in Batches.............................................................................................................588 10.17.4 Calibrating Propagation Models Based on the CW Measurement Data............................................589 10.17.5 Checking the Parameter Settings of the Propagation Model.............................................................591 10.18 Interface Description: U-Net Auxiliary Functions.....................................................................................592 10.18.1 Parameters for Exporting Maps to the Google Earth.........................................................................592 10.18.2 Parameters for Setting Custom Fields...............................................................................................593 10.18.3 Parameters for Searching for Base Stations......................................................................................593 10.18.4 Parameters for Setting NE Display Properties..................................................................................594 10.18.5 Parameters for Importing and Exporting Data...................................................................................597 10.18.6 Parameters for Setting the Print Properties........................................................................................598 10.18.7 Parameters for Importing Drive Test Data........................................................................................600 10.18.8 Parameters for Importing CW Measurement Data..........................................................................603 10.18.9 Parameters for Viewing DT Point Information.................................................................................605 10.18.10 Interface Description: Calibration Results of Propagation Models.................................................606 10.18.11 Parameters for Filtering the DT Data..............................................................................................607 10.18.12 Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of DT Points...........................................................609
11 Acronyms and Abbreviations...............................................................................................610
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xvii
GENEX U-Net User Guide
1 Introduction to the U-Net
1
Introduction to the U-Net
About This Chapter The GENEX U-Net is a professional tool that fully supports the planning of wireless networks. It supports the planning of single-system network and the planning of multi-system network. For example, the U-Net can be used to plan the network using both the GSM technology and UMTS technology or the network using the GSM technology, UMTS technology, and LTEFDD technology. During the entire network life cycle, the U-Net helps operators to complete the initial network design, network simulation, coverage prediction, and network optimization. 1.1 Overview The U-Net provides comprehensive network planning functions, advanced geographic information system (GIS), and easy-to-use design. These features help you to efficiently plan the network parameters to obtain the optimum planning result regarding network coverage, capacity, and quality. 1.2 System Structure The U-Net provides a series of functions such as the Geographic Information System (GIS), service modeling, NE modeling, propagation modeling, prediction, capacity simulation, parameter planning, and analysis result output. 1.3 Main Window of the U-Net This section describes the main window of the U-Net, including the menu bar, toolbar, explorer window, operation GUIs, and entries to related operations using the U-Net when the LTE-FDD network system is selected.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1
GENEX U-Net User Guide
1 Introduction to the U-Net
1.1 Overview The U-Net provides comprehensive network planning functions, advanced geographic information system (GIS), and easy-to-use design. These features help you to efficiently plan the network parameters to obtain the optimum planning result regarding network coverage, capacity, and quality.
Positioning Figure 1-1 shows the position of the U-Net on the network. Figure 1-1 Position of the U-Net on the network
Entity
Description
Probe
The Probe is a type of DT software developed by Huawei. It is used for collecting air interface parameters on the wireless network. The DT data and CW data collected by the Probe can be imported to the U-Net for calibrating propagation models and comparing the actual network coverage and predicted network coverage during network planning.
CME
The Configuration Management Express (CME) is used to configure and manage the data of NEs.
U-Net
The U-Net is a type of network planning software developed by Huawei. It supports the LTE-FDD, LTE-TDD, GSM, UMTS, and CDMA network systems.
Product Features The U-Net provides comprehensive network planning functions, a flexible software architecture, an advanced geographic information system (GIS), rich data resources, and user-friendly GUIs. These features enable network planning engineers to improve the work efficiency significantly. l Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Advanced LTE planning simulation technology Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2
GENEX U-Net User Guide
1 Introduction to the U-Net
The U-Net supports the planning of neighboring cells, frequency, Physical Cell ID (PCI) codes, and Physical Random Access Channels (PRACHs). In addition, it provides professional LTE network optimization by incorporating the rich experience and advanced technologies of both Huawei and leading operators. l
Advanced planning algorithms The U-Net helps users flexibly perform co-planning of GSM, UMTS, and LTE-FDD networks, thus appropriately making use of existing site resources. This accelerates the product delivery and shortens the network deployment period.
l
Advanced semi-dynamic simulation technology By providing high-accuracy network prediction, the U-Net helps to accurately estimate network investment and provide a low-cost solution, thus effectively reducing the overall costs of network deployment.
l
Powerful and easy-to-use network planning function The U-Net provides mature algorithms for inter-RAT neighboring cell planning and easy settings of planning parameters. This improves work efficiency effectively by reducing the technical requirements on network optimization and ensures the quality of network planning.
Application Scenario The U-Net is applicable in network deployment, network optimization, and network expansion. During the network deployment, the U-Net helps you to properly plan the engineering parameters, neighboring cell data, and frequency data of the network, thus providing guidance for the actual project implementation. During the optimization and expansion of the network, the U-Net helps you to optimize the network parameters and verify the optimization by comparing the network performance before and after the optimization. Table 1-1 describes the functions provided by the U-Net. Table 1-1 Functions provided by the U-Net in different scenarios
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Function
Description
Site deployment
After the area for deploying a site is specified, the site can be quickly deployed on the map by using the base station template. By performing point analysis, the U-Net can analyze the altitude height and clutter height along the profile of the propagation path to adjust the site deployment.
Propagation model calibration
The propagation model can be adjusted manually or automatically on the basis of the CW data. The U-Net displays the model on the GIS to analyze the error in the model-based calculation.
Network parameter planning
The U-Net helps users plan configuration parameters of the network, such as parameters related to the neighboring cells, frequency, PCIs, PRACHs, and TAs.
Prediction
The U-Net starts the prediction after importing the map and configuring network data, service model, and propagation model. By analyzing the prediction result, it evaluates the network performance.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3
GENEX U-Net User Guide
1 Introduction to the U-Net
Function
Description
Capacity simulation
After the traffic parameters are configured and the traffic map is set according to the planning, the U-Net performs the simulation calculation based on the traffic map. In capacity simulation, the U-Net analyzes the throughput of the cell and the user. In addition, it analyzes the coverage of common channels and traffic channels based on the specific network load provided in the simulation calculation results.
Interaction with the CME
You can obtain configuration parameters from the CME and then import them to the U-Net for prediction and analysis. The analysis results provided by the U-Net can be imported to the CME and then be delivered to the network.
1.2 System Structure The U-Net provides a series of functions such as the Geographic Information System (GIS), service modeling, NE modeling, propagation modeling, prediction, capacity simulation, parameter planning, and analysis result output. Figure 1-2 shows the software architecture of the U-Net. Figure 1-2 Software architecture of the U-Net
The U-Net system consists of the following parts: Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4
GENEX U-Net User Guide
1 Introduction to the U-Net
l
Platform This part provides the data management function and the basic common functions, such as project management, GIS, NE modeling, service modeling, and propagation modeling. The U-Net manages all the platform functions by using the project management function. In addition, the project management function provides interfaces to support service functions of different network systems.
l
System application This part provides service functions for the actual network system, including parameter planning, capacity simulation, prediction, and result analysis. The parameter planning mainly involves the planning of neighboring cells, PCIs, frequency and PRACHs.
1.3 Main Window of the U-Net This section describes the main window of the U-Net, including the menu bar, toolbar, explorer window, operation GUIs, and entries to related operations using the U-Net when the LTE-FDD network system is selected. Figure 1-3 shows the main window after you start the U-Net. Table 1-2 lists the items in the main window. Figure 1-3 Main window of the U-Net
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5
GENEX U-Net User Guide
1 Introduction to the U-Net
Table 1-2 Description of the main window No.
Name
Description
1
Menu bar
Provides the main menu of the system. For details, see Menu Bar.
2
Standard toolbar
Provides the shortcut icons for common operations related to projects. For details, see Standard Toolbar.
3
Task toolbar
Provides the shortcut icons for common operations related to tasks. For details, see Task Toolbar.
4
Explorer window
Provides the entries to main operations using a navigation tree. For details, see Explorer Window.
5
Event window
Displays the information about the progress of operation tasks when the U-Net is running.
6
Map window
Displays the map.
7
System status bar
Displays the information about the system status.
Menu Bar The menu bar of the U-Net provides the main menu of the system, which is organized based on the main functions of the U-Net to facilitate your operations. Table 1-3 describes the menu bar of the U-Net and the corresponding functions. Table 1-3 Description of the menu bar Main Menu
Description
File
Provides entries to operations related to project management and print management. For details, see Table 1-4.
Edit
Provides entries for viewing analysis GUIs. For details, see Table 1-5.
Window
Provides entries to common map-related operations. For details, see Table 1-6.
Help
Provides entries to U-Net Help and license management. For details, see Table 1-7.
Table 1-4 Description of the File menu
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Menu Item
Description
New
Create a project.
Open
Open an existing project. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6
GENEX U-Net User Guide
1 Introduction to the U-Net
Menu Item
Description
Close
Close a project.
Save
Save the current project.
Save As
Save the current project as another one.
Print Setting
Set print properties.
Print Preview
Preview a print task.
Print
Start a print task.
Import Excel
l Import Excel > Engineering Parameters: Import engineering parameters. l Import Excel > Configuration Package: Import the BCP data. l Import Excel > Import New Cell Planning: Import the new cell data. The preceding function currently applies only to GSM and UMTS. Export > Engineering Parameters: Export engineering parameters.
Export
The preceding function currently applies only to GSM and UMTS. Generate Template
Create an engineering parameter template. 1. Click Generate Template. In the displayed dialog box, select a network type in the Select Network Type area. 2. Select required engineering parameters for the selected network type in the Select Specific Parameters area and select engineering parameters under the Site and Transceiver nodes in the navigation tree. 3. Specify the export path and click Export. The settings are saved as an engineering parameter template.
Recent File
View the names of the five projects that are opened recently. This menu item provides shortcut operation entries to the five projects.
Exit
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Exit the U-Net.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7
GENEX U-Net User Guide
1 Introduction to the U-Net
Table 1-5 Description of the Edit menu Menu Item
Description
Undo
Undo an operation. You can undo the modifications in the GIS window. Note that you can perform a maximum of three undo operations at a time. You cannot undo the modifications in the property window.
Resource Usage
View the resource usage.
Show Grid Line
Whether to display grid lines.
Find
Search NEs.
Table 1-6 Description of the Window menu Menu Item
Description
Project Information
Display or hide the explorer window.
Standard Toolbar
Display or hide the standard toolbar.
Status Bar
Display or hide the status bar.
Event
Display or hide the event window. When network planning, coverage prediction, or capacity simulation is performed, the Event Viewer window automatically docks at the lower left part of the main window.
Legend
Display or hide the legend window.
Simulation Curve
Display or hide the capacity simulation process window.
Point Analysis Tool
Display or hide the point analysis window.
Table 1-7 Description of the Help menu
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Menu Item
Description
Help Topics
View the U-Net Help.
Apply License for self
Apply for a license for yourself.
Apply License for others
Apply for a license for others.
View ESN
View the electronic serial number (ESN).
About License
View the remaining valid days of a license.
Update License
Update a license locally.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8
GENEX U-Net User Guide
1 Introduction to the U-Net
Menu Item
Description
About U-Net
View the U-Net software information.
Standard Toolbar You can click an icon on the standard toolbar to perform the corresponding project-related operation quickly. Figure 1-4 shows the icons on the standard toolbar. Table 1-8 describes the icons shown in Figure 1-4. Figure 1-4 Standard toolbar
NOTE
You can choose Window > Standard Toolbar and determine whether to display the standard toolbar.
Table 1-8 Description of the standard toolbar Icon
Description Create a project. Open a project. Save a project. Perform a print task. View the U-Net software information.
Task Toolbar You can click an icon on the task toolbar to quickly perform the operations related to the map and point analysis. Figure 1-5 shows the icons on the task toolbar. Table 1-9 describes the icons shown in Figure 1-5. Figure 1-5 Task toolbar
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9
GENEX U-Net User Guide
1 Introduction to the U-Net
Table 1-9 Description of the task toolbar Icon
Description Calculate the path loss. Forcibly calculate the path loss. Stop calculating the path loss. Start the point analysis. Select a base station template. Create base stations in batches. Create a base station. Create a repeater. Whether to display hexagons indicating cell coverage. Select a rectangular area. Center the map. Refresh the map. Select one item at a time. Move a map. Select a scaling. Zoom in or zoom out on the map. Zoom out on an area. Measure the distance. Draw a polygon. Draw a line. Draw a point. Combine polygons.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10
GENEX U-Net User Guide
1 Introduction to the U-Net
Icon
Description Export a map to the Google Earth. View detailed results. For example, after performing the coverage prediction, you can select a coverage prediction counter in the explorer window, click , and move the pointer to the map window to view detailed results of the counter. Draw a clutter analysis line.
Explorer Window The Explorer window is in the left pane the main window. The Explorer window has four tab pages: GEO, Data, Network, and Operation. Figure 1-6 GEO tab page
Table 1-10 Description of the GEO tab page
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Navigation Tree
Description
Special Polygons
Operation tasks related to special polygons.
Polygons
Operation tasks related to polygons.
Points
Operation tasks related to points. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11
GENEX U-Net User Guide
1 Introduction to the U-Net
Navigation Tree
Description
Lines
Operation tasks related to lines.
Map
Operation tasks related to maps.
NOTE
In normal cases, if you select or clear the check box of a node in the navigation tree, the information about the node is displayed or hidden accordingly in the GIS window. For example, if you select the check box of , polygons are displayed in the GIS window.
Polygons as shown in
Figure 1-7 Data tab page
Table 1-11 Description of the Data tab page
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Navigation Tree
Description
Propagation Models
Operation tasks related to propagation models.
CW Measurement
Operation tasks related to the CW measurement data.
Drive Test
Operation tasks related to the drive test data.
Antennas
Operation tasks related to antennas.
Antenna Groups
Operation tasks related to antenna groups.
Traffic Parameters
Operation tasks related to traffic parameters.
Traffic Map
Operation tasks related to traffic maps.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12
GENEX U-Net User Guide
1 Introduction to the U-Net
Figure 1-8 Network tab page
Table 1-12 Description of the Network tab page Navigation Tree
Description
Site
Operation tasks related to sites.
Transceiver
Operation tasks related to transceivers.
Figure 1-9 Operation tab page
Table 1-13 Description of the Operation tab page
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Navigation Tree
Description
Predictions
Operation tasks related to predictions.
Simulations
Operation tasks related to capacity simulation.
Neighbor Planning
Operation tasks related to neighboring cell planning.
LTE PCI Planning
Operation tasks related to PCI planning.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13
GENEX U-Net User Guide
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
1 Introduction to the U-Net
Navigation Tree
Description
LTE PRACH Planning
Operation tasks related to PRACH planning.
LTE Frequency Planning
Operation tasks related to frequency planning.
LTE TAC Planning
Operation tasks related to TAC planning.
LTE Cell Planning
Operation tasks related to LTE cell planning.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14
GENEX U-Net User Guide
2 Installing the U-Net Software
2
Installing the U-Net Software
About This Chapter This section describes how to install the U-Net software. To complete the installation of the UNet, you only need to run the installation program and then perform operations as prompted by the installation wizard. After the software is installed, you need to load the license and then you can use relevant functions provided by the U-Net. If you need not use the U-Net, you can uninstall it. 2.1 Preparation for the Installation Before installing the U-Net software, you need to ensure that the installation conditions are met. For example, you need to ensure that the U-Net software package is prepared, the environment components are installed, and the configuration of the PC meets the requirements. 2.2 Installing the U-Net Main Program This section describes how to install the U-Net main program. You can install the U-Net main program through an automatic installation wizard. The wizard helps you successfully install the U-Net. During the installation, the system automatically displays prompt dialog boxes. 2.3 Installing a License This section describes how to install a license. The operation rights on the U-Net are controlled by a license. You need to load a valid license to ensure that the U-Net runs properly. 2.4 Starting the U-Net You can start the U-Net software through the Start menu or the shortcut icon on the desktop. If the prompted message indicates that no license file is loaded, load the license file as prompted. 2.5 Uninstalling the U-Net Main Program This section describes how to uninstall the U-Net main program.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
15
GENEX U-Net User Guide
2 Installing the U-Net Software
2.1 Preparation for the Installation Before installing the U-Net software, you need to ensure that the installation conditions are met. For example, you need to ensure that the U-Net software package is prepared, the environment components are installed, and the configuration of the PC meets the requirements.
Hardware Requirements Table 2-1 lists the hardware requirements of the PC. Table 2-1 Hardware requirements Config uration Item
Recommended Configuration
Minimum Configuration
CPU
Intel dual-core 2.0 GHz
P3 1GHz
Memor y
2 GB
512 MB
Hard Disk
15 GB at least
1 GB at least
Monitor
1280 x 1024 resolution
1024 x 768 resolution
Miscell aneous
DVD-ROM drive, mouse, and keyboard
DVD-ROM drive, mouse, and keyboard
Software Requirements Table 2-2 lists the software requirements of the PC. Table 2-2 Software requirements Configurati on Item
How to Obtain
Recommended Configuration
Remarks
Operating system (OS)
-
Microsoft Windows XP Professional SP2 or higher
Mandatory
Environment components
-
l Microsoft .NET Framework4.0 or higher
Mandatory
l Microsoft Windows Installer3.1 or higher Operating software
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
-
Microsoft Office 2003 or higher
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Mandatory
16
GENEX U-Net User Guide
2 Installing the U-Net Software
Configurati on Item
How to Obtain
Recommended Configuration
Remarks
GENEX UNet software installation package
l Download the software package from http:// support.huawei.com.
l You have a user account at http:// support.huawei.com and have the permission to download the GENEX UNet software installation package.
Mandatory
l Obtain the GENEX UNet installation DVDROM.
l You have obtained the GENEX U-Net software. License
Contact Huawei technical support engineers to obtain the license.
-
Mandatory
2.2 Installing the U-Net Main Program This section describes how to install the U-Net main program. You can install the U-Net main program through an automatic installation wizard. The wizard helps you successfully install the U-Net. During the installation, the system automatically displays prompt dialog boxes.
Prerequisites NOTE
l The U-Net installation program is ready. The PC meets the installation requirements. For details, see 2.1 Preparation for the Installation. l You have logged in to the operating system by using an administrator account because the U-Net software must be installed by using an administrator account.
Context The support website of Huawei provides the U-Net installation package. The installation package is classified into four types. l
If you use a 32-bit OS and have installed a plug-in whose version is equal to or later than Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0, select Huawei.UNet32 (exclude framework). Otherwise, select Huawei.UNet32.
l
If you use a 64-bit OS and have installed a plug-in whose version is equal to or later than Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0, select Huawei.UNet64 (exclude framework). Otherwise, select Huawei.UNet64.
Before installing the U-Net main program, you are advised to close all the running programs to ensure successful installation of the U-Net main program. This section takes a 32-bit operating system as an example to describe the installation procedure of the U-Net.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
17
GENEX U-Net User Guide
2 Installing the U-Net Software
Procedure Step 1 Download the installation package at the support website of Huawei. Read the background information carefully and download the correct installation package. Step 2 Double-click Huawei.UNet32.exe to display the setup wizard. Step 3 Click Next. Step 4 In the confirmation dialog box, select I accept the terms of the License Agreement. Step 5 Click Next. Step 6 In the user information dialog box, enter the User Name and Company Name. Step 7 Click Next. Step 8 In the displayed dialog box, select the required feature components. Step 9 Click Next. Step 10 In the displayed dialog box, click Browse to set the installation path. Step 11 After confirmation, click Install. If you want to...
Then...
Display the Installer setup wizard Follow the prompts to install the software. After the installation is complete, it is recommended that you restart the PC. Then, perform Step 13 to check whether the U-Net is installed successfully. Display the .NET Framework setup wizard
Follow the prompts to install the software.
Step 12 After the installation is complete, click Finish. Step 13 Check whether the U-Net main program is installed successfully. Choose Start > All Programs > Huawei GENEX > U-Net 3.8 to check whether the information about the U-Net software exists. If...
Then...
The U-Net software information exists
The U-Net main program is successfully installed.
The U-Net software information does not exist
Repeat Step 1 through Step 13 until the U-Net main program is successfully installed.
Table 2-3 describes the structure of the U-Net installation folder generated after the U-Net main program is installed. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
18
GENEX U-Net User Guide
2 Installing the U-Net Software
Table 2-3 U-Net installation folder structure
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Directory
Description
Adjust
Saves rectification parameters for the radio propagation model.
Antenna
Saves antenna data.
config
Saves the configuration file.
CoMP
Saves the configuration parameters of the CoMP gain.
IRC
Saves the configuration parameters of the IRC gain.
iScript
Saves the environment configuration parameters for the Java Virtual Machine (JVM).
Measure Report
Saves the configuration parameters for geographic display of MR data.
Data
Saves the default configuration parameters of the project.
Gis
Saves the default configuration parameters of the GIS.
NbrPlanning
Saves various parameter templates for neighbor cell planning.
License
Saves the license file.
Prediction
Saves the default configuration parameters of the prediction.
Propagation
Saves the default configuration parameters of the propagation model.
RF
Saves the parameter template for LTE Cell planning.
RuleStore
Saves the environment configuration parameters for the Java Virtual Machine (JVM).
Simulation
Saves the default configuration parameters of the capacity simulation.
ToolInfo
Saves the interface configuration information for domain verification.
TSCPlannin g
Saves the parameter template information for TSC planning.
NetEntity
Saves the related network information.
Network Expansion
Saves the parameters for six-sector expansion of UMTS.
Help
Saves the Help files of the U-Net.
Resource
Saves the template files required by the U-Net.
Resources
Saves the resource files required by the U-Net.
Log
Saves operation logs.
Temp
Saves the calculation results of path loss, prediction, and capacity simulation.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
NOTE The two folders are generated only after the U-Net software runs.
19
GENEX U-Net User Guide
2 Installing the U-Net Software
----End
2.3 Installing a License This section describes how to install a license. The operation rights on the U-Net are controlled by a license. You need to load a valid license to ensure that the U-Net runs properly.
Procedure l
Apply for a license for yourself. 1.
In the main window of the U-Net, choose Help > Apply License for self. The Domain Authentication dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-1. Figure 2-1 Domain Authentication
2.
Enter the domain account information.
3.
Click OK. NOTE
If the entered domain account is valid, the U-Net will automatically update the license.
4. l
Apply for a license for others. 1.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
After the license loading is complete, restart the U-Net. In the main window of the U-Net, choose Help > Apply License for others. The Offline License Application dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-2.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
20
GENEX U-Net User Guide
2 Installing the U-Net Software
Figure 2-2 Off-line License Application
2.
In the displayed dialog box, set parameters. Table 2-4 describes the parameters. Table 2-4 Parameters in the Off-line License Application dialog box Parameter
Description
Set the save path of License file
Save path of the license file.
Input the ESNs of authorized computers
ESN of your PC. NOTE You can choose Help > View ESN in the main window of the U-Net to learn the ESN.
Select tools and versions to authorize by License
U-Net version for domain authentication.
3.
Click Next.
4.
Enter the domain account information in the displayed Domain Authentication dialog box.
5.
Click OK.
6.
After domain authentication succeeds, click Submit. NOTE
After the license application succeeds, the U-Net automatically saves the license file to a specified local path.
7.
Update a license locally. a.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
In the main window of the U-Net, choose Help > Update License. The Update License dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-3. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
21
GENEX U-Net User Guide
2 Installing the U-Net Software
Figure 2-3 Update License
8.
b.
Click Browse, and choose the save path of the license file.
c.
Click Update License.
After the license loading is complete, restart the U-Net.
----End
Follow-up Procedure After loading the license, restart the U-Net and choose Help > About License to view the remaining valid days of the license.
2.4 Starting the U-Net You can start the U-Net software through the Start menu or the shortcut icon on the desktop. If the prompted message indicates that no license file is loaded, load the license file as prompted.
Prerequisites When the U-Net is running, the read and write operations are performed on the U-Net installation directory. Therefore, you must have complete read and write rights to the installation directory before starting the U-Net. Select the folder where the installation directory resides, right-click, and then choose Properties from the shortcut menu. In the displayed dialog box, view the permission information on the Security tab page.
Procedure l
Double-click the U-Net 3.8 shortcut icon on the desktop to start the U-Net software. Alternatively, you can start the U-Net software through the Start menu or by doubleclicking U-Net software installation path/Huawei.UNet.exe.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
If ...
Then ...
A correct license file is loaded
The U-Net is started.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
22
GENEX U-Net User Guide
2 Installing the U-Net Software
If ...
Then ...
No license file is loaded
A message is displayed, indicating that no license file is loaded. Obtain the license file and then load the license file. For details, see 2.3 Installing a License. After loading the license file, restart the U-Net.
An incorrect license file is loaded A message is displayed, indicating that the license file is incorrect. Obtain the correct license file and then load the license file. For details, see 2.3 Installing a License. After loading the license file, restart the U-Net. ----End
2.5 Uninstalling the U-Net Main Program This section describes how to uninstall the U-Net main program.
Context The license file, log files, temporary files, and saved U-Net project files are retained when the U-Net is being uninstalled.
Procedure Step 1 In the Control Panel window, double-click Add or Remove Programs. Step 2 Select U-Net 3.8. Step 3 Click Uninstall/Change. The interface for uninstalling the U-Net main program is displayed. Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select Remove, and click Next >. Then, click Uninstall. Step 5 After the U-Net main program is successfully uninstalled, click Finish. You can restart the PC as required. ----End
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
23
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
3
LTE-FDD Network Planning
About This Chapter The U-Net supports the planning of an LTE-FDD network. You can model the actual network environment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creating base stations based on the imported geographic data. Then, you can plan the parameters such as the neighboring cells, and EARFCNs of the network, predict the network coverage range, and evaluate the network capacity to meet your network planning requirements. 3.1 Process of LTE-FDD Network Planning This section describes the process of LTE-FDD network planning. You can refer to this section when planning an LTE-FDD network by using the U-Net. 3.2 Creating a Project This section describes how to create a project. You can select different project templates for different network systems. The U-Net creates the project based on the selected template. Currently, the U-Net provides project templates for the following network systems: GSM, UMTS, CDMA, LTE-FDD, and LTE-TDD. 3.3 Importing Geographic Data You can import geographic data in various vector and grid formats and set coordinate systems. You can also add points, lines, or polygons to create vector objects.The method for importing geographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is the same. 3.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands The U-Net enables you to calculate path loss between a transmitter and a receiver based on a propagation model. Then you can use the calculated path loss matrix to perform prediction.The method for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systems on the U-Net is the same. 3.5 Adding a Device You can import or create antennas, create TMAs, feeders, or site equipment.The method for creating site equipment for different network systems on the U-Net is the same. 3.6 Setting LTE-FDD Traffic Parameters The U-Net obtains the average load of the network based on the simulation calculation of the detailed user distribution and therefore calculates various counters of the radio network. Traffic parameters refer to the parameters related to the user type, mobility, terminal, service, environment, MCS, and receiving devices. They are the basic data related to user distribution. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
24
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Traffic parameters can be used to generate a specific traffic map. You must ensure that the traffic parameters are defined before capacity prediction. 3.7 Setting LTE-FDD NE Parameters You can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station template to automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeaters separately. 3.8 LTE-FDD Prediction By calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage and channel quality. 3.9 LTE-FDD Capacity Simulation Capacity is important for radio network planning. The process of capacity simulation is as follows: The U-Net generates a certain number of subscribers based on the traffic map and allocate network resources to the generated subscribers. Then, the U-Net analyzes the overall network performance and collects the final capacity simulation results. Finally, the U-Net generates a statistical report. 3.10 Planning LTE-FDD Network Parameters You can plan the neighboring cells, EARFCNs, PCIs, and PRACHs of an LTE-FDD network through the U-Net.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
25
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
3.1 Process of LTE-FDD Network Planning This section describes the process of LTE-FDD network planning. You can refer to this section when planning an LTE-FDD network by using the U-Net. Figure 3-1 shows the process of LTE-FDD network planning. Figure 3-1 Process of LTE-FDD network planning
Table 3-1describes the detailed information about Figure 3-1. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
26
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Table 3-1 Description of the LTE-FDD network planning process No.
Procedure
Description
1
Creating a project
For details, see 3.2 Creating a Project.
2
Importing geographic data
You can import geographic data in various vector and grid formats and set coordinate systems. You can also add points, lines, or polygons to create vector objects.The method for importing geographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is the same.For details, see 3.3 Importing Geographic Data.
3
Managing propagation models and bands
The U-Net enables you to calculate path loss between a transmitter and a receiver based on a propagation model. Then you can use the calculated path loss matrix to perform prediction.The method for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systems on the U-Net is the same.For details, see 3.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands.
4
Adding a device
You can import or create antennas, create TMAs, feeders, or site equipment.For details, see 3.5 Adding a Device.
5
Setting traffic parameters
Set traffic parameters related to terminals and services, which are to be used during prediction.For details, see 3.6 Setting LTE-FDD Traffic Parameters.
6
Setting NE parameters
You can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station template to automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeaters separately.For details, see 3.7 Setting LTE-FDD NE Parameters.
7
Calculating the path loss
For details, see 3.8.2 Calculating Path Loss.
8
Predicting network performance
For details, see 3.8 LTE-FDD Prediction.
9
Planning PCI/ frequency/ neighboring cells/ PRACH/TAC
For details, see 3.10 Planning LTE-FDD Network Parameters.
10
Creating a traffic map
For details, see 3.9.2 Creating LTE Traffic Maps.
11
Performing capacity simulation
For details, see 3.9 LTE-FDD Capacity Simulation.
Exporting network planning results
For details, see Prediction and Neighboring Cell Planning.
12
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
The planning results can be applied to NEs.
The capacity simulation results can be applied to prediction.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
27
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
3.2 Creating a Project This section describes how to create a project. You can select different project templates for different network systems. The U-Net creates the project based on the selected template. Currently, the U-Net provides project templates for the following network systems: GSM, UMTS, CDMA, LTE-FDD, and LTE-TDD.
Context l
Only one project can run on the U-Net at a time. In normal cases, one project corresponds to the network planning for an area or a city.
l
One U-Net project may correspond to the network planning of multiple network systems. For example, a U-Net project can be created for the planning of a GSM/UMTS hybrid network.
Procedure Step 1 Choose File > New. The Project Templates dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-2. Figure 3-2 Project Templates
Step 2 Select a project template. l Different network systems correspond to different project templates. You need to select an appropriate project template based on the actual network system. l If multiple network systems are involved, you need to select the required templates. For example, If you need to create a project for a GSM/UMTS hybrid network, you need to select project templates for both the GSM and the UMTS networks. l LTE-TDD and CDMA do not support hybrid networking with other network systems. Step 3 Click OK. ----End
Follow-up Procedure l
Save a project file. Choose File > Save or click file.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
to save all the information about the project in a project
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
28
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
You can save project files in .ipl format: .ipl or .ipl (with all data). In the former format, only NE's parameter planning configuration for the project is saved; in the latter format, all the planning calculation results are saved. The former format is selected by default. The U-Net automatically creates an .ipl project file and a project name.losses folder for saving the information about the path loss matrix and calculation results of capacity simulation, coverage prediction, and neighboring cell planning in the specified save path. NOTE
Based on the save format, the U-Net determines whether to add the calculation result data in the project name.losses path to the project file in .ipl format.
l
Open an existing project file. Choose File > Open to open an existing .ipl project file. NOTE
Alternatively, double-click an .ipl project file to start and open the project.
3.3 Importing Geographic Data You can import geographic data in various vector and grid formats and set coordinate systems. You can also add points, lines, or polygons to create vector objects.The method for importing geographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is the same.
3.3.1 Basic Knowledge of Geographic Data This section describes the basic knowledge of the geographic data, such as data type, data format, and coordinate system.
Geographic Data The U-Net uses two types of geographic data for planning and analysis, that is, Digital Elevation Model (DEM) data and Digital Terrain Model (DTM) data. Currently, the U-Net can import geographic data files in Planet, Shape, MIF, or Vertical Mapper format. The two types of geographic data are described as follows: l
DEM data: It is the data about the ground elevation, including the plane coordinates and the value of the ground elevation.
l
DTM data: It is the data about the altitude, including the plane coordinates and the value of the altitude.
The DTM data is similar to the DEM data. The difference is that the DEM data represents the above-the-sea height, including the terrain height and the clutter height, whereas the DTM data represents only the terrain height.
Geographic Data in Planet Files Planet files save the data about the altitude, clutter class, clutter height, vector, point layer, and geographic projection. Table 3-2 shows the relationship between the Planet file types and the layer types. Each layer corresponds to several Planet file types. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
29
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Table 3-2 Relationship between the Planet file types and the layer types Planet File Type
Layer Type
Description
Point Layer File
Text Layer (Point Layer)
Point layer files save the identification data of each typical land mark (such as a town). Point layer files consist of the following types of files: l Index file: saves the geographic location information about each land mark. l Menu file: saves land mark numbers and names. l Text file: saves the information about a land mark.
Vector File
Vector Layer
Vector files save the information about terrain features such as roads, railways, streets, and streams. Vector files consist of the following types of files: l Index file: saves the geographic location information about each vector. l Menu file: saves vector numbers and names. l Terrain feature file: saves the information about each terrain feature. The information about each terrain feature must be saved in an individual vector file.
Clutter Height File
Buildings Layer (Layer of Clutter and Building Heights)
Clutter height files consist of the following types of files: l Index file: saves the geographic location information about each binary data file. l Binary data file: saves the clutter heights at each geographic location on the map.
Clutter Class File
Clutter Layer (Clutter Class Layer)
Clutter class files consist of the following types of files: l Index file: saves the geographic location information about each clutter. l Menu file: saves clutter class numbers and names. l Binary data file: saves the information about the terrain (such as forests, lakes, flat open areas, urban areas, and high buildings) for calculating the path loss.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
30
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Planet File Type
Layer Type
Description
Altitude File
Heights Layer (Altitude Layer)
Altitude files consist of the following types of files: l Index file (ASCII text file): saves the geographic location information about each binary data file. l Binary data file: saves the data about the height (excluding the height of the building) above the sea level of each geographic location in the map.
Geographic Projection File
Generally, the geographic projection file is stored in the folder of altitude files. The file name is projection.
The geographic projection file is in .txt format. It includes the required projection information, such as the projection mode, information about the ellipsoid, and information about the coordinate offset.
Geographic Data in Shape Files Shape files save the information about the geographic location and relevant geographic features in binary mode. Shape file is a map file format developed by the ESRI company. Shape files save space data and can be opened by using the ArcExplorer. Shape files consist of .shp, .shx and .dbf files. l
The .shp file saves the geographic data.
l
The .shx file saves the index information about the geographic data in the .shp file.
l
The .dbf (dBASE) file saves the feature information about each record.
Geographic Data in Vertical Mapper Files Vertical Mapper file is a type of charting file for satellite remote sensing. Vertical Mapper files save the information about the geographic location and relevant geographic features. The U-Net supports the Vertical Mapper files in the same way as it supports the Planet files. Vertical Mapper files consist of .grc files and .grd files. l
The .grc file corresponds to the raster map with discrete values, such as the raster map of clutter classes.
l
The .grd file corresponds to the raster map with continuous values, such as the raster map of altitudes.
Geographic Data in MIF Files MIF files save the information about the geographic location and relevant geographic features in ASCII format. MIF files can be imported to the U-Net and can be displayed on the U-Net as a type of Shape data. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
31
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
MIF file is a map file format developed by the MapInfo company. MIF files can be used on all the platforms supported by the MapInfo software. MIF files consist of .mif files and .mid files. l
The .mif file consists of the file header and the data. – The file header contains the information about projection and boundary. – The data contains all the space data records and the coloring scheme for each record.
l
The .mid file records the index information about the space data in the .mif file. The .mid file is optional. Not all the MIF files have .mid files.
Geographic Data in .bil Files l
The .bil files save the binary DEM data.
l
The .hdr file is the header file of a .bil file and saves the information about a .bil file such as the number of bytes, storage mode, number of rows, and number of columns.
l
The save path of a .bil file must contain an .hdr file that has the same prefix name as the .bil file.
Geographic Data in .tab Files (Grid Format) l
A .tab file in grid format specifies the table structure of map attribute data, including the number of fields, field names, field types, field widths, index fields, and key space information about corresponding layers.
l
The save path of a .tab file in grid format must contain the .grc or .grd file specified in the .tab file.
l
You can open a .tab file in .txt format and query the name of the .grc or .grd file specified in the .tab file.
Geographic Data in .tab Files (Vector Format) l
The .tab file in vector format is a type of map file developed by the MapInfo company.
l
The save path of a .tab file in vector format must contain the .dat, .id, and .map files that have the same prefix name as the .tab file. For example, the save path of the River.tab file must contain the River.dat, River.id, and River.map files.Otherwise, the U-Net cannot successfully import the geographic data in this format.
Coordinate Systems This section describes the basic concepts about projection, ellipsoid, and coordinate systems.
Projection and Ellipsoid A map or a geographic database is a flat representation of data collected from a curved surface. A projection is a means for presenting all or part of a spheroid on a plane. The projection cannot be done without distortion. Therefore, you must choose the characteristic (distance, direction, scale, area, or shape) to be presented accurately at the expense of the other characteristics or make a compromise between several characteristics. Then, different projection methods are formed. The ellipsoid is the pattern used to model the earth. It is defined by its geometric parameters. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
32
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Classification of Coordinate Systems To determine a geographic location, you need to identify the location by using coordinates. In different coordinate systems, however, the coordinates for the same location are different. Currently, the U-Net uses two types of coordinate systems, that is, the geodetic coordinate system and the longitude/latitude coordinate system. l
Geodetic coordinate system Considering the Earth as a plane, you can create a right-angle coordinate system by taking a point of the Earth as the origin, the east direction as the positive direction of the X-axis, and the north direction as the positive direction of the Y-axis. All the points of the plane are in the first quadrant of the coordinate system. Then, a geographic location can be identified by a pair of coordinates (x, y). This pair of coordinates is called geodetic coordinates. Geodetic coordinates are continuous values. The unit is meter.
l
Longitude/Latitude coordinate system The spherical location can be identified by using the longitude/latitude coordinate system. Values on the longitude and latitude coordinates are continuous. – The longitude of a point refers to the angle between the local meridian and the prime meridian. The east of the prime meridian is the east longitude (180 degrees) and the west of the prime meridian is the west longitude (180 degrees). – The latitude of a point refers to the angle between the normal line of the corresponding geographic point on the ellipsoid and the equator. The north of the equator is called north latitude (90 degrees) and the south of the equator is called south latitude (90 degrees).
3.3.2 Importing Geographic Data in Planet Format Quickly This section describes how to import geographic data in planet format quickly. By using this method, you can import multiple graphic layer files in batches at a time.
Prerequisites l
In the digital e-map folder, there are one or more sub-graphic layer folders including Text, Vector, Building, Clutter, and Heights.
l
After including complete file types, a sub-graphic layer can be automatically recognized by the system and then successfully imported. For example, the Heights graphic layer must include an index file and the corresponding binary file.For the file types included in each graphic layer, see Geographic Data.
l
After a projection file is put in the Heights folder, it can be automatically recognized by the system.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Map. Step 3 Choose Quick Import from the shortcut menu. See Figure 3-3.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
33
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Figure 3-3 Quick Import
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select a digital e-map folder. Step 5 Click OK. The Import Map dialog box is displayed. The system automatically recognizes and matches the data files in the digital e-map folder, as shown in Figure 3-4.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
34
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Figure 3-4 Import Map Dialog Box
to modify the file path or reStep 6 Optional: You can select a parameter in Figure 3-4 and click set the parameter.For parameter description, see Parameters for Importing Geographic Data in Planet Format. Step 7 Click OK. The import of the geographic data is complete. The imported map files are displayed in the map window. On the GEO tab page, you can also choose Map > Sub-graphic Layer on the navigation tree to view the imported graphic layer data. ----End
3.3.3 Importing Sub-graphic Layer Data Files Manually This section describes how to manually import each sub-graphic layer data file. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
35
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Map > sub map layer. Step 3 Choose Import from the shortcut menu. Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select the file type and the file to be imported.
CAUTION Before selecting a file type, read the description in Table 3-3 carefully. Otherwise, you may fail to import the file.
Table 3-3 Description of Sub-Graphic Layer File Types Graphic Layer Type
Available File Type
Description
Satellitic (navigation map)
l .png
l When you select a .shp file, there must be a .dbf file with the same prefix name under the file path. Otherwise, you cannot view geographic feature information. l If an Index file is selected, the folder where the selected file is located must contain other related files.For the files included in each layer, see Geographic Data in Planet Files. l When you select a .bil file, there must be a .hdr file with the same prefix name under the file path. If you import a .bil file in the Clutter layer, you need to import a .mnu file with the same prefix name. l When you select a .tab file and meanwhile import it in the Vector layer, there must be .dat, .id, and .map files with the same prefix name under the file path. For details, see Geographic Data in .tab Files (Vector Format). l If a TAB file is selected and the data is imported to the clutter layer, the folder where the selected file is located must contain a GRC file. For details, see Geographic Data in .tab Files (Grid Format).
l .bmp l .jpg
Geometry
l .shp l .mif
Text
Index File
Vector
l Index File l .tab
Buildings
l Index File l .bil
Clutter
l Index File l .bil l .grc l .tab
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
36
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Graphic Layer Type
Available File Type
Description
Heights
l Index File
l When you select a .tab file and meanwhile import it in the Heights layer, there must be a .grd file under the file path. For details, see Geographic Data in .tab Files (Grid Format).
l .bil l .grd l .tab
You can import .grc, .grd, .bil, .shp, and .mif files in batches. Step 5 Click Open. Step 6 If you import a data file of Satellitic layer, do as follows to set the geographic parameters. 1.
For parameter description, see Parameters for Importing Satellite Maps.
2.
Click Import.
----End
3.3.4 Selecting Geographic Data of a Proper Resolution Level When geographic data in the calculation area has multiple resolution levels, you must select the geographic data of a proper resolution level to ensure the accuracy of service planning.
Prerequisites Multiple geographic data files are imported to the U-Net.
Context On the U-Net, the geographic area for calculation is defined as follows: l
If only one geographic data file is imported, the U-Net performs calculation based on only the geographic area corresponding to this file.
l
If multiple geographic data files are imported, geographic data of multiple resolution levels is available for the overlapped geographic area.
l
When geographic data of multiple resolution levels is available for a geographic area, UNet selects the appropriate resolution level according to the display sequence of the geographic data in the Clutter/Heights/Buildings layers.
l
This section describes how to select the appropriate resolution level in the Heights layer.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
37
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
In this case, the overlapped geographic data has multiple levels of resolution. In this case, select the geographic data of a proper resolution level for service calculation.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, click before Map > Heights to expand the node. The imported geographic data is displayed under Heights. Step 3 Drag the layer of a resolution level to be used as the data source to top. ----End
Example For example, the geographic data of multiple resolution levels (from 5 m to 40 m) have been imported to the Heights layer. If the geographic data of three resolution levels (5 m, 10 m, and 20 m) are available for a calculation area and you want to use the top resolution level (5 m), drag the layer of 5 m to the top, as shown in Figure 3-5. Figure 3-5 Heights layer
3.3.5 Setting Display Parameters of Geographic Data This section describes how to set the display parameters of various geographic data. The U-Net enables you to set the color, the transparency, and the shading effect of clutters of different heights to clearly and vividly display the geographic data. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
38
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Prerequisites The geographic data is imported.
Procedure l
Set the display parameters of each layer. This section takes the clutter layer as an example to describe how to set the display parameters. The settings of the display parameters for other layers are similar to the settings for the clutter layer. For details about the parameters, see Parameters for Setting Display Parameters of Geographic Data. 1.
In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Map > Clutter > map name.
3.
Right-click and choose Properties from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 3-6. The Clutter dialog box is displayed. Figure 3-6 Properties
4.
Click the Display tab, and set the display parameters for each clutter. NOTE
For the heights layer, you can set three-dimensional effect by moving the Contrast slider in the lower left corner.
5.
Click OK. After the setting is complete, the map window is refreshed automatically. Then, you can view the refreshed window.
l
Display the heights layer in plastic mode. 1.
In the navigation tree, choose Map > Heights.
2.
Choose Relievo Style from the shortcut menu.
----End Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
39
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
3.3.6 Setting Clutter Layer Parameters This section describes how to set radio propagation parameters for the clutter layer, such as penetration loss, spatial multiplexing factor, and standard deviation of shadow fading. These parameters can be used for coverage prediction and capacity simulation calculation.
Prerequisites The geographic data has been imported.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab. Step 2 Choose Map > Clutter in the navigation tree. Then, right-click Clutter and choose Parameter Management from the shortcut menu. The Clutter Parameters Display dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-7. Figure 3-7 Clutter Parameters Display
Step 3 Set radio propagation parameters for each clutter. l Actual Value tab page: displays the parameters related to the imported map. l Default Value tab page: displays the default parameters when no map is imported. For details about the parameters, see Parameters for Setting the Clutter Class Layer. Step 4 Click OK. ----End Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
40
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
3.3.7 Configuring the Projection Mode and Spheroid Data On the U-Net, each project corresponds to only one projection mode and one type of spheroid data. The projection mode and spheroid data have impacts on service analysis. This section describes two methods for setting the projection mode and spheroid data.
Procedure l
Use the projection mode and spheroid data in the Planet geographic data file. Planet geographic data folder generally contains the geographic projection file. After Planet geographic data is imported, the U-Net automatically identifies the projection mode and spheroid data in the projection file. For details, see 3.3.2 Importing Geographic Data in Planet Format Quickly. NOTE
If the Planet geographic data folder does not contain the projection file or if the U-Net fails to identify and import the projection file, set the projection mode and spheroid data by referring to the following operations.
l
Use an existing projection mode and spheroid data in the coordinate system group. 1.
In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Map.
3.
Choose Coordinate from the shortcut menu.
4.
In the dialog box displayed, select the projection parameters and spheroid data file. For details about the parameters, see Parameters for Setting Coordinate Systems. If...
Then...
The required projection mode and spheroid data are available
1. Select a coordinate system group from the Find in drop-down list. 2. Select a required file from multiple projection configuration files in this group. 3. Click Apply. The names of the current projection system and spheroid data are displayed in the Current Coordinate Setting window, as shown in Figure 3-8.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
41
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
If...
Then...
The required projection mode and spheroid data are unavailable
1. Select the favorite coordinate system group from the Find in drop-down list. If the existing coordinate system groups cannot meet your requirement, click New Group to create a required coordinate system group. 2. Click New. The Create dialog box is displayed. 3. Set parameters related to the projection mode and spheroid data. 4. Click Create. After the projection mode and spheroid data are created, the Coordinate Systems dialog box is displayed. 5. Select the new projection configuration file in the dialog box. 6. Click Apply.
Figure 3-8 Coordinate Systems dialog box
----End
Follow-up Procedure You must manually modify related parameters after setting the projection mode and spheroid data. 1.
In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Map.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
42
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
3.
Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
4.
Set parameters related to the projection mode and spheroid data in the displayed dialog box.
5.
Click OK.
3.3.8 Configuring the Coordinate Display Mode The U-Net supports four modes for displaying coordinates. You can select the proper display mode of coordinates as required.
Prerequisites The geographic data is imported.
Context On the U-Net, information about the coordinates is displayed in the status bar and the ruler. Table 3-4 describes the four display modes of coordinates. Table 3-4 Display modes of coordinates Display Mode
Meaning
Example
xy reference frame
Indicates the display mode of geodetic coordinates.
442472.51
xxdxxmxx.xxsS
Indicates the display mode of longitude/latitude coordinates in the format of xx degree.xx minute.xx second.
116°19′45″E
xx.xxxxxS
Indicates the ESWN display mode of longitude/latitude coordinates.
116.32E
-xx.xxxxx
Indicates the negative/ positive display mode of longitude/latitude coordinates.
116.32
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Map. Step 3 Choose Map Setting from the shortcut menu. If the geographic data is not properly imported, the right-click menu is not available. Step 4 Select a proper coordinate display mode in Coordinate Style in the displayed dialog box. BL Style Precision indicates the display precision of coordinates. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
43
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
l When the coordinate display mode is xy reference frame and xxdxxmxx.xxsS, the value of this parameter is 2 by default and cannot be changed. l In other coordinate display modes, the value of this parameter is 6 by default and can be changed as required. Step 5 Click OK. ----End
3.3.9 Creating Vector Objects You can either import or create vector objects, such as points, lines, and polygons. Vectors are mainly used for display and service calculation. As a type of vector, polygons can be used as filters, computation zones, and print zones.
Basic Knowledge of Calculation Areas This section describes the relations between a created calculation area and the base stations that are actually involved in the prediction.
Common Polygonal Areas This section takes Figure 3-9 as an example. Figure 3-9 Example of a calculation area
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
44
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
In Figure 3-9, the polygon drawn by users are in blue; the propagation area of each activated base station is in green. Propagation areas are square, and the side length of the square is twice the cell radius. The green areas that intersect with the blue rectangle are considered in the prediction. For example, though sites 11 and 9 are not included in the polygon, they are considered in the prediction because their propagation areas intersect with the blue rectangle; sites 10 and 8 are not considered in the prediction because their propagation areas do not intersect with the blue rectangle.
Linear Polygonal Areas This section takes Figure 3-10 as an example. Figure 3-10 Example of a calculation area
In Figure 3-10, the lines drawn by users are in purple; the external polygon of the lines is in blue and the width of the polygon is set by users; the propagation area of each activated base station is in green. The propagation areas are square, and the side length of the square is twice the cell radius. The green areas that intersect with the blue polygon are considered in the prediction. For example, though sites 4 and 2 are not included in the external polygon of the lines, they are considered in the prediction because their propagation areas intersect with the blue rectangle; sites 0 and 3 are not considered in the prediction because their propagation areas do not intersect with the blue rectangle.
Importing and Exporting a Polygon You can import polygon files in different formats, such as .xml, .mif, .tab, .kml, and .kmz. You can also export an existing polygon from the system. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
45
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Prerequisites To import a polygon represented by longitude/latitude, you must set the longitude/latitude coordinate. For details, see 3.3.7 Configuring the Projection Mode and Spheroid Data.
Context You can import an existing polygon or draw a new polygon.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Polygons. Step 3 Choose Import from the shortcut menu. See Figure 3-11. Figure 3-11 Import
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select the file type, saving path, and the file to the imported. Step 5 Click Open and then import a polygon. ----End
Follow-up Procedure l
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Export a polygon. 1.
In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Polygons > a polygon.
3.
Choose Export from the shortcut menu.
4.
In the displayed dialog box as shown in Figure 3-12, select a coordinate type and then click OK.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
46
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Figure 3-12 Exporting Polygon dialog box
NOTE
If you have not set the coordinate system, Longitude / Latitude grays out.
5.
l
In the displayed dialog box, select the file type, saving path, and file name., and then export a polygon. If...
Then...
Select the .mif format.
Two files are displayed under the saving path with the suffix names of .mif and .mid. The exported file contains projection information.
Select the .tab format.
Four files are displayed under the file path with the suffixes of .id, .dat, .map, and .tab. The exported file contains projection information.
Select the .xml format.
An .xml file is displayed under the saving path.
Select the .kmz or .kml format.
An .xml or .kml file is displayed under the saving path. When you perform the operation in 4, select Longitude/ Latitude as the coordinate type. After that, the system can export the polygon in such format.
Export polygons in batches. 1.
In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Polygons.
3.
Choose Export from the shortcut menu.
4.
In the displayed dialog box, select the coordinate system and export type.
5.
Click OK.
6.
In the displayed dialog box, select a path to save the exported polygon files.
Drawing Polygons Directly This section describes how to draw polygons. You can draw new polygons, or export and edit the existing polygons.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
47
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Procedure Step 1 Click on the toolbar. Alternatively, right-click in the map window and choose Add Polygon from the shortcut menu. Step 2 Click the workspace to add points to the polygon one by one. l If only one point of a line in the polygon is determined, the line is displayed as a dotted line, indicating that you are drawing this line. l If two points of a line are determined, the line is displayed as a continuous line, indicating that you have finished drawing this line. l You can right-click to exit. Step 3 Double-click the last point to finish the creation of the polygon. In the displayed U-Net dialog box, the geographic area covered by the polygon is displayed. ----End
Follow-up Procedure View the clutter statistics of a polygon. After importing geographic data, you can choose Polygons > A polygon in the navigation tree. Then, right-click A polygon and choose Statistic from the shortcut menu to view the clutter statistics of this polygon.
Creating Polygons Based on Lines This section describes how to create polygons based on lines. You can draw a line and create a polygon based on the line.
Procedure Step 1 Draw a line. 1.
on the toolbar. Alternatively, right-click in the map window and choose Add Click Line from the shortcut menu.
2.
Click in the workspace to draw a straight line or a polygonal line. l If only one point of a line in the polygon is determined, the line is displayed as a dotted line, indicating that you are drawing this line. l If two points of a line are determined, the line is displayed as a continuous line, indicating that you have finished drawing this line. l You can right-click to exit.
3.
Double-click the point where you want to finish the drawing. NOTE
You can also click on the toolbar to create an independent point. Alternatively, right-click in the map window and choose Add Point from the shortcut menu.
4.
Optional: Move or delete a line. Select a line in the map window and drag it to a new position.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
48
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Select a line in the map window and press Del to delete the line. 5.
Optional: Add, delete, or edit a point of a line. Right-click a point of a line and choose Add Point, Delete Point, or Edit Point from the shortcut menu to add, delete, or edit the point.
Step 2 Set the extended polygon of a line. 1.
In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab.
2.
Choose Lines > A line in the navigation tree.
3.
Right-click the line and choose Create Strip Polygon from the shortcut menu.
4.
In the displayed dialog box, set the width of the extended polygon in the Strip Width area. The width ranges from 0 to 1000 meters.
5.
Click OK. Two lines are automatically extended to Strip Width/2 away from the drawn line on the two sides of the drawn line, and these lines form an extended polygon.
Alternatively, you can right-click a line and choose Create Strip Polygon from the shortcut menu to set the extended polygon of the line. ----End
Follow-up Procedure View the clutter statistics of a polygon. After importing geographic data, you can choose Polygons > A polygon in the navigation tree. Then, right-click A polygon and choose Statistic from the shortcut menu to view the clutter statistics of this polygon.
Editing Polygons You can edit and combine polygons and modify their properties.
Procedure l
Edit a polygon. on the toolbar. The map window is selected.
1.
Click
2.
Edit a polygon. If you need to...
Then...
Move a point
1. Select a point of a polygon. 2. Drag this point to a new position. Alternatively, rightclick the point and choose Edit Point from the shortcut menu to change the coordinates as required.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
49
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
If you need to...
Then...
Add a point to a side
1. Select a side. 2. Right-click a position on the side where a point needs to be added. 3. Choose Add Point. A point is added to the side.
Delete a point
1. Right-click a point in a polygon. 2. Choose Delete Point.
Move a polygon
1. Select a polygon. 2. Drag the polygon to a new position.
Delete a polygon
1. Select a polygon. 2. Press Del. Alternatively, right-click a polygon and choose Delete Polygon from the shortcut menu. If the polygon is referenced, for example it is referenced by a vector-based traffic map, the system prompts that the polygon cannot be deleted.
NOTE
l You can press Ctrl+Z, or choose Edit > Undo in the U-Net main interface to undo the preceding operation. l The modifications in the map window can be undone at most for three steps. The modifications on the property page, however, cannot be undone.
l
Query and modify the properties of a polygon. 1.
Select a polygon in the map window.
2.
Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
3.
Query and modify the polygon properties on various tab pages in the Polygon Properties dialog box. – Query and modify the names of polygons on the Region Properties tab page. – Query and modify the point coordinates of polygons on the Points List tab page. – Query and modify the font color and character size on the Font tab page. – Query and modify the fill color and line color of polygons on the Color&Line tab page.
4. l
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Click OK.
Combine polygons. 1.
on the toolbar. Alternatively, click the Geo tab in the Explorer window, Click right-click Polygons and choose Polygon Operator from the shortcut menu.
2.
Select the polygons to be combined and the combination mode in the Polygon Operator dialog box.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
50
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
3.
If you need to...
Then...
Combine the overlapped areas of multiple polygons as a new polygon
1. In the Current Polygons box on the left, select the polygons to be combined.
Combine the combination areas of multiple polygons as a new polygon
1. In the Current Polygons box on the left, select the polygons to be combined.
Exclude the overlapped area of two polygons from one polygon to form a new polygon based on the remaining area of this polygon.
1. Select one polygon from the left area in the Current Polygons window.
2. Select Intersect in Polygon Operator.
2. Select Intersect in Polygon Operator.
2. Select Exclude. 3. Select another polygon from the right area in the Current Polygons window.
Click Run. You can preview the polygon in the Preview area.
4.
Optional: Select the new polygon in the Output area. Click Rename to change the name of the polygon. After typing a new name, press Enter to change the name or Esc.
5. l
Click OK. The combined polygon is displayed in the map window.
Set polygons in batches. If you need to...
Then...
Modify the properties of polygons in batches
1. In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab. 2. In the navigation tree, choose Polygons. 3. Choose Display Setting from the shortcut menu. 4. Set the font, fill color, and line color of polygons in batches in the Display dialog box.
Show/hide names of polygons in batches
1. In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab. 2. In the navigation tree, choose Polygons. 3. Choose Show/Hide All Polygon's Name from the shortcut menu. TIP You can right-click a polygon in the map window and choose Show Polygon Name from the shortcut menu to show/hide the name of the polygon.
----End
3.3.10 Interface Reference for Geographic Data This section describes the interfaces and parameters for managing geographic data. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
51
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Parameters for Importing Geographic Data in Planet Format This section describes the parameters that are involved in the manual and quick import of geographic data in Planet format. You can refer to this section when importing geographic data in Planet format through the Import Map dialog box. Parameter Map File Path: Indicates the path of map files.
Description Clutter
Indicates the file path of clutter-layer data.
Height
Indicates the file path of altitude-layer data.
Vector
Indicates the file path of vector-layer data.
Building
Indicates the file path of clutter-height-layer data.
Projection File Path: Indicates the path of the projection file.
Projection Path
Indicates the path of the projection file.
Projection File Valid
Indicates whether the projection file is valid.
Projection Parameter
Benchmark Longitude
Indicates the central longitudinal line in the projection zone. The default value is 117. The value range is from 0 to 360. The difference between the central longitudinal line in the coordinate system and the longitude of each site must be less than 6 degrees.
Benchmark Latitude
Indicates the central latitudinal line in the projection zone. The default value is 0. The value range is from -90 to 90. The difference between the central latitudinal line in the coordinate system and the latitude of each site must be less than 6 degrees.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Offset in Y Direction
Indicates the offset in the Y direction.
Offset in X Direction
Indicates the offset in the X direction.
Projection type
Projection type
Indicates the projection mode.
Spheroid
Spheroid
Selects a type of spheroid.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
52
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Parameters for Importing Satellite Maps This section describes the parameters for importing satellite maps. You can refer to this section when importing satellite maps in the Import Satellite Map dialog box. Parameter Geographic Information: indicates the settings related to the position of a satellite map in the map window.
Bound Type
Description
Value
Indicates the boundary mode.
If no geographic data is imported, the value can only be X/Y.
l Long/Lat indicates that the coordinates at the boundary are longitude/ latitude coordinates. This option is available only when geographic data is imported. l X/Y indicates that the coordinates at the boundary are geodetic coordinates. West
Indicates the western boundary of a satellite map.
North
Indicates the northern boundary of a satellite map.
East
Indicates the eastern boundary of a satellite map.
South
Indicates the southern boundary of a satellite map.
NOTE l The value of the eastern boundary must be greater than the value of the western boundary; the value of the northern boundary must be greater than the value of the southern boundary. l You can also drag the preview graph in the map window to change the graph position.
Transparency
Indicates the transparency of The default value is 33%. a satellite map.
Source File
Indicates the path of the satellite map file.
-
Parameters for Setting Display Parameters of Geographic Data This section describes the parameters for setting the display properties of geographic data. You can refer to this section when setting the properties for displaying the Clutter layer, Heights layer, Buildings layer, Vector layer, and geographic projection layer.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
53
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Parameters in the Clutter Dialog Box Parameter
Description
Value
Color
Indicates the color of a clutter.
The system maps the default color of each clutter based on the keyword. If the mapping fails, the clutter color is blue by default. You can click Color of each clutter to change the coloring scheme.
Value
Indicates the name of a clutter.
The value depends on the geographic data.
Legend
Indicates the name of a clutter in the legend.
The value depends on the geographic data.
Add To Legend
Indicates whether to add the coloring scheme of the clutter class to the legend.
This option is not selected by default.
Transparency
Indicates the transparency of a layer.
The default value is 40%.
Parameter in the Building Dialog Box Parameter
Description
Value
Color
Indicates the color of a height range.
By default, the system supports 11 height ranges. One height range corresponds to one color. The number of height ranges can be any number from 2 to 225. You can click Color of each clutter to change the coloring scheme.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Min Value
Indicates the minimum value of a height range.
The unit is meter.
Max Value
Indicates the maximum value of a height range.
The unit is meter.
Legend
Indicates the name of a height range in the legend.
The name of a height range consists of its maximum value and minimum value.
Add To Legend
Indicates whether to add the coloring scheme of the altitude to the legend.
This option is not selected by default.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
54
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Parameter
Description
Value
Transparency
Indicates the transparency of a layer.
The default value is 21%.
Parameter
Description
Value
Color
Indicates the color of a height range.
By default, the system supports 14 height ranges. One height range corresponds to one color.
Parameter in the Height Dialog Box
You can click Color of each clutter to change the coloring scheme. Min Value
Indicates the minimum value of a height range.
The unit is meter.
Max Value
Indicates the maximum value of a height range.
The unit is meter.
Legend
Indicates the name of a height range in the legend.
The name of a height range consists of its maximum value and minimum value.
Add To Legend
Indicates whether to add the coloring scheme of the clutter height to the legend.
This option is not selected by default.
Transparency
Indicates the transparency of a layer.
The default value is 0%.
Contrast
Indicates the threedimensional display contrast.
The default value is 7. NOTE l If the slider is moved to 10, it indicates the maximum contrast effect. l If the slider is moved to 1, it indicates there is no three-dimensional effect.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
55
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Parameters in the Vectors Dialog Box Parameter
Description
Value
Color
Indicates the line pattern and color of each vector (such as the street and railway) in display.
The system maps the default color of each clutter based on the keyword. If the mapping fails, the clutter color is orange by default. You can click Color of each vector to change the coloring scheme.
Legend
Indicates the name of a vector in the legend.
The value depends on the geographic data.
Add To Legend
Indicates whether to add the coloring scheme of the vector layer to the legend.
This option is not selected by default.
Parameter
Description
Value
Symbol
Indicates the pattern, color, and size of a point layer.
You can click Symbol of each point layer to change the coloring scheme.
Legend
Indicates the name of a point layer in the legend.
The value depends on the geographic data.
Add To Legend
Indicates whether to add the coloring scheme of the point layer to the legend.
This option is not selected by default.
Parameters in the Text Dialog Box
Parameters for Setting the Clutter Class Layer This section describes the parameters for setting the clutter class layer. You can refer to this section when setting the clutter class layer parameters in the Clutter Parameters Display dialog box.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Parameter
Description
Value
Code
Indicates the number of a clutter class.
The value depends on the geographic data.
Clutter Class
Indicates the name of a clutter class.
The value depends on the geographic data.
Clutter Height
Indicates the height of a clutter.
The default value is 0 and the unit is meter.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
56
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Parameter
Description
Value
Spatial Multiplex Factor
Indicates the spatial multiplexing factor.
The default value is 1.
Penetration Loss
Indicates the penetration loss.
The default value is 0 and the unit is dB. The penetration loss varies according to the propagation environment.
Model Standard Deviation
Indicates the standard deviation of the slow fading margin.
The default value is 7 and the unit is dB. The standard deviation varies according to the propagation environment.
Shadow Corr
C/(I+N)Standard Deviation
Indicates the factor of shadow fading.
The default value is 0.5.
Indicates the standard deviation based on C/(I + N).
The default value is 8 and the unit is dB.
The factor varies according to the propagation environment.
Parameters for Setting Coordinate Systems This section describes the parameters for setting the projection mode and spheroid data. You can refer to this section when setting the projection mode and spheroid data in the Coordinate Systems dialog box.
Parameters in the Coordinate Systems dialog box Parameter
Description
Value
Find in
Selects a coordinate system group from the drop-down list.
The default value is favorite.
New Group
Creates a coordinate system group.
The name of a coordinate system group contains a maximum of 248 characters including only numerals, letters, and underscores.
Click this button. The New Group dialog box is displayed. Enter the name of the new coordinate system group.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
57
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Parameter
Description
Value
Delete Group
Deletes a coordinate system group.
You can delete custom coordinate system groups but cannot delete predefined coordinate system groups. That is, deleting favorite coordinate system groups is not allowed.
Name
Indicates the name of an existing coordinate system.
-
Projection
Indicates the projection mode of a coordinate system.
-
Spheroid
Indicates the spheroid data of a coordinate system.
-
Region
Indicates a region.
The value is determined by the projection mode and spheroid data. You do not need to set this parameter.
Creates a coordinate system.
For details about the parameters, see Parameters in the Create dialog box.
List of existing coordinate systems in the selected group
New
Click this button. The Create dialog box is displayed. Enter the name of the new coordinate system. Then, set the project mode and spheroid data. Property
Checks the properties of the selected coordinate system.
-
Delete
Deletes the selected coordinate system.
-
Parameters in the Create dialog box Parameter General
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Name
Description
Value
Indicates the name of a coordinate system.
The default value is NewSystem.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
58
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Parameter Projection Parameter
Benchmark Longitude
NOTE The projection parameters vary according to the projection mode.
Description
Value
Indicates the central longitudinal line in the projection zone.
The default value is 117. The value range is from 0 to 360. NOTE The difference between the central longitudinal line in the coordinate system and the longitude of each site must be less than 6 degrees.
Benchmark Latitude
Indicates the central latitudinal line in the projection zone.
The default value is 0. The value range is from -90 to 90. NOTE The difference between the central latitudinal line in the coordinate system and the latitude of each site must be less than 6 degrees.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Offset in Y Direction
Indicates the offset in the Y direction.
The default value is 0 and the unit is meter. The value range is from 0 to 1,000,000.
Offset in X Direction
Indicates the offset in the X direction.
The default value is 500,000 and the unit is meter. The value range is from 0 to 600,000.
First Parallel
Indicates the first standard latitudinal line.
The default value is 0.
Second Parallel
Indicates the second standard latitudinal line.
The default value is 0.
AzCentralLin e
Indicates the azimuth of the central line in the projection.
The default value is 0.
RectifiedToS kew
Indicates the rectified angle of the oblique angle.
The default value is 0.
Longitude Zone
Indicates the longitudinal zone.
The default value is 0 and the value range is from 0 to 60.
Projection type
Projection type
Indicates the projection mode.
-
Spheroid
Spheroid
Selects a type of spheroid.
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
59
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Parameters for Viewing the Properties of Lines This section describes the parameters for viewing the properties of lines. You can refer to this section when viewing the properties of lines in the Line Properties dialog box. Table 3-5 Parameters on the Line Properties Tab Page Parameter
Description
Name
Indicates the name of a line. The default value is Line_*.
Show Line Name
Indicates whether to show the name of a line in the map window. By default, this option is selected.
Length(m)
Indicates the length of a line. Unit: m.
Line Width(px)
Indicates the width of a line. The default value is 2. The unit is pixel.
Line Type
Indicates the type of a line.
Line Color
Indicates the color of a line.
Comments
Indicates the comments on the line.
Table 3-6 Parameters on the Points List Tab Page Parameter
Description
Point Type
Indicates the display mode of the coordinates at the points of a line. The default value is X/ Y. l X/Y: displayed as geodetic coordinates. l Longitude/Latitude: displayed as longitude/latitude coordinates. NOTE If projection parameters are not set, Longitude/ Latitude is unavailable.
X
Indicates the X coordinate of a point.
Y
Indicates the Y coordinate of a point.
Parameters for Viewing the Properties of Polygons This section describes the parameters for viewing the properties of polygons or viewing the clutter information about polygons. You can refer to this section when viewing the properties Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
60
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
of polygons in the Polygon Properties dialog box or viewing the clutter information about polygons in the Clutter Statistics of XXX dialog box.
Parameters in the Polygon Properties Dialog Box Table 3-7 Parameters displayed on the Region Properties tab page Parameter
Description
Name
Indicates the name of a polygon. The default value is Polygon_Draw_*.
Show Polygon Information
Indicates whether to show the name of a polygon in the map window. By default, this option is selected.
Area
Indicates the area of a polygon. The unit is square kilometer.
Comments
Indicates the comments on a polygon.
Table 3-8 Parameters displayed on the Points List tab page Parameter
Description
Point Type
Indicates the display mode of the coordinates at the points of a polygon. The default value is X/Y. l X/Y: displayed as geodetic coordinates. l Longitude/Latitude: displayed as longitude/latitude coordinates. NOTE If projection parameters are not set, Longitude/ Latitude is unavailable.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Polygon Order
Indicates the number of a polygon. The default value is 1. This parameter is set to 1 for simple polygons by default.
X
Indicates the X coordinate of a point.
Y
Indicates the Y coordinate of a point.
Longitude
Indicates the longitude of a point.
Latitude
Indicates the latitude of a point.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
61
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Table 3-9 Parameters displayed on the Font tab page Parameter
Description
Color
Color.
Font
Font.
Size
Size.
Style
Style.
Example
Example of words.
Table 3-10 Parameters displayed on the Color&Line tab page Parameter
Description
Color
Color for filling.
Transparency
Transparence.
Lines Color
Indicates the color of lines in a polygon. The default color is blue.
Lines Type
Indicates the display mode of lines in a polygon. The default value is solid.
Line Width
Indicates the display width of lines in a polygon. The default value is 2 and the unit is pixel.
Parameters in the Clutter Statistics of XXX Dialog Box
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Parameter
Description
Value
ID
Indicates the ID of a clutter class on the U-Net.
The value depends on the geographic data.
Clutter Class
Indicates the name of a clutter class.
The value depends on the geographic data.
Area(sq.km.)
Indicates the size of a clutter in the polygon.
The value depends on the size of the polygon and the geographic data. The unit is square kilometer.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
62
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Parameter
Description
Value
Percent
Indicates the percentage of a clutter in the polygon.
The value depends on the size of the polygon and the geographic data. The unit is %.
3.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands The U-Net enables you to calculate path loss between a transmitter and a receiver based on a propagation model. Then you can use the calculated path loss matrix to perform prediction.The method for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systems on the U-Net is the same.
3.4.1 Basic Knowledge of Propagation Models Every propagation model provided by the U-Net is applicable to a certain situation, frequency, and radio technology. Table 3-11 describes the bands, required geographic data, factors, configuration requirements, and application scenarios of propagation models.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
63
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Table 3-11 Characteristics of propagation models Propagatio n Model
Band
Cost-Hata 1500 MHz to model 2000 MHz (including the Cost-Hata HW model)
Factor
Configuration Requirement
Recommended Application Scenario
l Terrain condition.
l Whether to calculate the diffraction.
1 km < Cell radius < 20 km
l Clutter statistics. l A formula corresponds to a clutter.
l Limited by the free space loss. l Loss in municipal areas.
Applicable to the GSM1800, UMTS, and LTE technologies. Not applicable to highly populated urban areas but applicable to common urban areas, suburbs, and villages. In addition, the antenna of the base station must be higher than the surrounding buildings. Usually used for prediction and rarely used for capacity simulation.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
64
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Propagatio n Model
Band
Okumura 150 MHz to Hata model 2000 MHz (including the Okumura Hata HW model)
Factor
Configuration Requirement
Recommended Application Scenario
l Terrain condition.
l Whether to calculate the diffraction.
1 km < Cell radius < 20 km
l Clutter statistics. l A formula corresponds to a clutter.
l Limited by the free space loss. l Loss in municipal areas.
Applicable to the GSM900, CDMA 2000, and LTE technologies. Not applicable to highly populated urban areas but applicable to common urban areas, suburbs, and villages. In addition, the antenna of the base station must be higher than the surrounding buildings. Usually used for prediction and rarely used for capacity simulation.
SPM model 150 MHz to (including the 2000 MHz SPM900 and SPM2G models)
l Terrain condition. l Clutter statistics. l Effective antenna height. There are six methods of calculating the effective antenna height.
l The diffraction weight is differentiated in the case of LOS or NLOS. l Limited by the free space loss. l Loss and weight of each type of clutter. l Clearance area of the receiver
0.5 km < Cell radius < 20 km Applicable to the GSM900, GSM1800, UMTS, CDMA 2000, WiMAX, and LTE technologies. Compared with the Hata models, the SPM models are widely applicable to the scenarios of macro cells. Widely used for capacity simulation.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
65
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Propagatio n Model
Band
Factor
Configuration Requirement
Recommended Application Scenario
ITURP model (that is, 1238 model)
1800 MHz to 2000 MHz
l Distance (LOS and NLOS) and frequency.
l Propagation scenarios are classified into LOS and NLOS scenarios.
Indoor scenarios.
l Margin of slow fading. l NLOS considers the loss in penetration through floors in different environments . The loss depends on the number of penetrated floors. l NLOS considers the distance loss coefficient N.
COST231WIM
800 MHz to 2000 MHz
l Terrain condition. l Clutter statistics.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Used for only prediction.
l The margin of slow fading depends on the requirement on the coverage probability and the standard deviation of indoor slow fading. l In the cases of residential buildings, office buildings, and malls, N is 28, 30, and 22, respectively. Three parts are Urban areas with involved: free a lot of high space propagation buildings. loss, rooftop-tostreet diffraction and scattering loss, and multishielding loss. Configure parameters for each part.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
66
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Propagatio n Model
Band
Factor
Configuration Requirement
Recommended Application Scenario
KeenanMotley
Around 2000 MHz
l Distance and frequency.
-
Indoor scenarios.
l Loss in penetration through walls.
Used for only prediction.
l Number of walls. l The impact of multipath propagation is not considered. The penetration loss of each wall is the same. Volcano Urban
Volcano Rural Volcano Indoor
2G, 3G, and 4G frequency bands
NOTE l The Volcano model is a third-party model. To install this model, you need to purchase the corresponding software. Volcano 3.1.2 or later needs to be installed for U-Net 3.8 or a later version. l After the Volcano model is installed, you need to run the U-Net again. The U-Net automatically detects the installed Volcano model and loads the Volcano model.
Densely populated urban areas with many buildings. Suburbs and rural areas. Indoor scenarios.
l For details about the Volcano model and how to install the Volcano model, see the user guide of the Volcano model software.
3.4.2 Configuring Propagation Models By default, the U-Net provides multiple common propagation models. You can directly modify the properties of a propagation model or duplicate a propagation model and modify the properties of the duplicated propagation model.
Context Propagation model of different types has different properties, which, however, are configured in the same way. This section takes the Cost Hata (default) propagation model as an example to describe how to configure a propagation model. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
67
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Propagation Models > Cost231 Hata > Cost Hata (default). Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. See Figure 3-13. Figure 3-13 Properties
NOTE
If you do not want to directly modify the properties of the propagation model, choose Duplicate from the shortcut menu and modify the properties of the duplicated propagation model.
Step 4 Set the properties of the propagation model in the displayed dialog box. For detailed description of parameters, see Parameters for Setting the Cost231 Hata Propagation Model. 1.
On the General tab page, change the name and description of the propagation model.
2.
On the Parameters tab page, configure the parameters related to the propagation model and set the formula.
3.
Click OK.
Step 5 Optional: You can set the parameters related to the propagation model in a centralized mode by exporting and importing the parameters. 1.
Select the propagation model from the navigation tree.
2.
Right-click and choose Export from the shortcut menu to export the parameters related to the propagation model as an .xls file.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
68
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
3.
Open the .xls file. You can set and modify the parameters.
4.
Select the propagation model from the navigation tree.
5.
Right-click and choose Import from the shortcut menu to import the parameters related to the propagation model. If the parameters are successfully imported, the system prompts that the import is successful and updates the parameters based on the imported file. If the parameters fail to be imported, check whether the information about the .xls file, such as the heading, is correct and complete.
----End
Follow-up Procedure l
To delete a propagation model, choose Delete from the shortcut menu.
l
After the propagation model is configured, you can assign it to cells for calculating the path loss. For details, see 3.4.3 Assigning Propagation Models. NOTE
If you have set the Volcano propagation model for a cell, you need to manually import the map data on the Setting tab page of the corresponding model (the map data imported from U-Net does not take effect for the Volcano propagation model). Otherwise, path loss calculation cannot proceed.
3.4.3 Assigning Propagation Models This section describes how to assign propagation models. You need to select a proper propagation model for each cell based on the technical and engineering conditions. You can assign the same propagation model to all cells or assign different propagation models to each cells.
Prerequisites l
Propagation models are available in the project.
l
Cells exist in the project.
Context To shorten the calculation time, the U-Net enables users to assign the following propagation models to each cell: l
Main propagation model: high calculation accuracy and short calculation radius
l
Extended propagation model: low calculation accuracy and long calculation radius
If the calculation accuracy of the main propagation model is not defined, the U-Net calculates the main propagation model based on the calculation accuracy of the imported geographic data. In addition, the U-Net can calculate the extended propagation model only when the propagation model, calculation radius, and calculation precision of the extended propagation model are defined.
Procedure l Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Assign a propagation model to a group of cells. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
69
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
In normal cases, cells with the same parameters and in the same environment use the same propagation model. You can group these cells together and assign a propagation model to the cell group. 1.
In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver.
3.
Right-click the cell group and choose Cells > Open Table from the shortcut menu. The table of the selected cell group is displayed. The property values of all the cells in the cell group are displayed in the table.
4.
Modify the values in each column (such as the Main Propagation Model column) to ensure that parameter values of all the cells are the same. TIP
You can set the parameters in the first row. Then, press Ctrl+D so that the parameter values in the following rows are the same as those in the first row. In this way, parameter values of all the cells are the same.
l
Assign a propagation model to a single cell. 1.
In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver > Sitex_x.
3.
Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
4.
Click the cell property tab in the displayed dialog box. For example, for the LTE-FDD network, click the LTE-FDDCell tab.
5.
Click
6.
Set propagation model parameters in the displayed Propagation dialog box. For details, see Parameters on the Propagation Tab Page in the Repeater Properties Dialog Box.
following Propagation Model.
For a multi-mode network, you need to set Propagation Model on the tab pages corresponding to each RAT. ----End
3.4.4 Setting Bands Before performing frequency planning, you must set bands. The U-Net provides multiple predefined bands. You can modify the properties of the predefined bands. When the predefined bands cannot meet your requirements, you can define bands.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver. Step 3 Right-click and choose Frequency Bands > Open Table from the shortcut menu. NOTE
If the project is about a hybrid network, the Open Table menu has a submenu.
Step 4 Set bands in the window containing a band table. For detailed description of parameters, see Parameters for Setting Bands. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
70
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
You can also double-click the heading in the table, and set properties of all bands in the Bandwidth Configuration dialog box. ----End
Follow-up Procedure l
Assign the band to a cell. 1.
In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver > Sitex_x.
3.
Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
4.
Click the cell property tab in the displayed dialog box. Click GSMTRX for a GSM network and LTE-FDDCell for an LTE-FDD network.
5. l
Set the value of Frequency Band on the tab page to assign the band to a cell.
You can also import and export band information in the window that contains a band table. For detailed description of parameters, see 10.8 Managing Table Windows.
3.4.5 Interface Reference for Propagation Models This section describes the interfaces and parameters involved in the management of propagation models.
Parameters for Setting Bands This section describes the parameters involved in band settings. You can refer to this section when setting bands in the Frequency Bands dialog box. Table 3-12 Parameters in the LTE-FDD/LTE-TDD/CDMA network Parameter
Description
Value
Name
Indicates the name of a band.
-
Bandwidth(MHz)
Indicates the bandwidth.
l LTE-FDD and LTE-TDD networks: 1.4, 3, 5, 10, 15, and 20. l CDMA network: 1.25.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Start Channel Index
Indicates the start index of the available frequencies corresponding to a band.
End Channel Index
Indicates the end index of the available frequencies corresponding to a band.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
l LTE-FDD and LTE-TDD networks: from 0 to 128. l CDMA network: from 0 to 2 The value of Start Channel Index must be less than or equal to the value of End Channel Index.
71
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Parameter
Description
Value
Excluded Channels
Indicates the index of an excluded channel.
The default value is null. Multiple values can be entered. Use commas to separate the values.
ACIR
Indicates the adjacent channel signal-tointerference ratio.
The default value is 30 and the unit is dB.
Band Number
Indicates the number of a band.
The value range is from 1 to 40.
Frequency(DL)(MHz)
Indicates the downlink frequency.
A parameter for LTE-FDD/ CDMA.
Frequency(UL)(MHz)
Indicates the uplink frequency.
A parameter for LTE-FDD/ CDMA.
Frequency(MHz)
Indicates the uplink or downlink frequency.
A parameter for LTE-TDD.
Actual Bandwidth(MHz)
Indicates the actual bandwidth.
A parameter for LTE-FDD.
Useable RB Num
Indicates the number of RBs available for use.
A parameter for LTE-FDD.
The value range is from 0 to 231.
Table 3-13 Parameters in the GSM network Parameter
Description
Value
Name
Frequency band name.
-
ARFCN
Absolute radio frequency channel number.
For example, 512-885 indicates that the range is [512,885]. 975-1023;0-124 indicates that the range is [975,1023];[0,124].
Frequency(UL)(MHz)
Uplink start frequency.
Unit: MHz. Value range: real numbers, separated by semicolons. The number is consistent with that of UARFCN(UL)s. For example, if ARFCN is set to 975-1023;0-124, you need to set Frequency(UL) (MHz) to 880.2;890.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
72
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Parameter
Description
Value
Frequency(DL)(MHz)
Downlink start frequency.
Unit: MHz. Value range: real numbers, separated by semicolons. The number is consistent with that of UARFCN(DL)s. For example, if ARFCN is set to 975-1023;0-124, you need to set Frequency(DL) (MHz) to 925.2;935.
Adjacent channel interference ratio.
ACIR
Unit: dB. Value range: real number that is greater than 0.
Table 3-14 Parameters in the UMTS network Parameter
Description
Value
Name
Frequency band name.
-
UARFCN(UL)
Uplink UTRA absolute radio frequency channel number.
For example, 9612-9888 indicates that the range is [9612,9888]. 9262-9538;12 indicates that the range is [9262,9538];[12,12].
UARFCN(DL)
Downlink UTRA absolute radio frequency channel number.
For example, 9612-9888 indicates that the range is [9612,9888]. 9262-9538;12 indicates that the range is [9262,9538];[12,12].
Frequency(UL)(MHz)
Uplink start frequency.
Unit: MHz. Value range: real numbers, separated by semicolons. The number is consistent with that of UARFCN(UL)s.
Frequency(DL)(MHz)
Downlink start frequency.
Unit: MHz. Value range: real numbers, separated by semicolons. The number is consistent with that of UARFCN(DL)s.
ACIR
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Adjacent channel interference ratio.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Unit: dB. Value range: real number that is greater than 0.
73
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Parameters for Setting the Cost231 Hata Propagation Model This section describes the parameters related to the Cost231 Hata propagation model. You can refer to this section when setting the Cost231 Hata propagation model.
Parameters Related to the Cost231 Hata Propagation Model Parameter Diffraction Calculate: Sets the parameters for calculating the diffraction.
Diffraction Loss Method
Description
Value
Indicates whether to consider diffraction during path loss calculation.
Available algorithms are as follows: l None l Atlas l Bullington l Deygout l Epstein
Effect Tx Height Calculate Method
Indicates the algorithm for calculating the effective height of the transmitter antenna.
Available algorithms are as follows: l AbsSpot l Height above the ground l Height above the average ground l Spot Hr l Slope At Receiver l Enhanced Slope at receiver
General: Sets the parameters for common calculation.
Limitation to free space loss
Formula
Indicates whether to limit the loss in the free space.
The default value is True.
For the description of parameters in the formula, see Formula of the Cost231 Hata Propagation Model.
For the parameter values, see Values of the Parameters of the Cost231 Hata Propagation Model in Typical Scenarios.
Formula of the Cost231 Hata Propagation Model The formula is as follows: l
Urban: Total = Lu - a(Hm)
l
Suburban: Total = Lu - a(Hm) - 2 x (lg(f/28))2 - K13
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
74
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
l
Rural: Total = Lu - a(Hm) - K14 x lg(f)2 + K15 x lg(f) - K16
Parameters in the formula are described as follows: Parameter
Description
Lu
Lu = K1 + K2 x lg(f) - K3 x lg(Hb) + (K4 - K5 x lg(Hb)) x lg(d)
a(Hm)
Indicates the factor for correcting the effective antenna and also a function of the size of the coverage area. l In the large city scenario: a(Hm) = K10 x [lg(K11 x Hm)]2 - K12 l In the Rural/Small city scenario: a(Hm) = (K6×lg(f) - K7) x Hm - (K8× x lg(f) - K9)
Cm
Indicates the factor for central calibration in large cities. The value varies according to the scenario. The value is already calculated in K1, and thus is not presented in this formula.
f
Indicates the frequency range. The value rang is from 1,500 MHz to 2,000 MHz.
Hb
Indicates the height of the base station antenna. The value range is from 30 m to 200 m.
d
Indicates the distance between the base station and the mobile station. The unit is kilometer.
Hm
Indicates the height of the mobile station. The value range is from 1 m to 10 m.
Values of the Parameters of the Cost231 Hata Propagation Model in Typical Scenarios
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Sc en ar io
K 1
K 2
K 3
K 4
K 5
K 6
K 7
K 8
K 9
K 10
K 11
K 12
K 13
K 14
K 15
K 16
De ns e ur ba n
49 .3
33 .9
13 . 82
44 .9
6. 55
1. 11
0. 7
1. 56
0. 8
3
0
0
5. 4
4. 78
18 . 33
40 . 94
Ur ba n/ Su bu rb
46 .3
33 .9
13 . 82
44 .9
6. 55
1. 11
0. 7
1. 56
0. 8
0
0
0
5. 4
4. 78
18 . 33
40 . 94
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
75
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Sc en ar io
K 1
K 2
K 3
K 4
K 5
K 6
K 7
K 8
K 9
K 10
K 11
K 12
K 13
K 14
K 15
K 16
Ru ral
46 .3
33 .9
13 . 82
44 .9
6. 55
1. 11
0. 7
1. 56
0. 8
0
18 . 33
35 . 94
5. 4
4. 78
18 . 33
35 . 94
Hi gh wa y/ Hi gh sp ee d rai lw ay
46 .3
33 .9
13 . 82
44 .9
6. 55
1. 11
0. 7
1. 56
0. 8
0
18 . 33
40 . 94
5. 4
4. 78
18 . 33
40 . 94
Parameters for Setting the Cost231 Hata HW Propagation Model This section describes the parameters related to the Cost231 Hata HW propagation model. You can refer to this section when setting the Cost231 Hata HW propagation model.
Parameters Related to the Cost231 Hata HW Propagation Model Parameter Diffractio n Calculate : parameter s for diffractio n calculatio n
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Diffraction Loss Method
Description
Value
Indicates whether to consider diffraction during path loss calculation.
Available algorithms are as follows: l None l Atlas l Bullington l Deygout l Epstein
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
76
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Parameter Effect Tx Height Calculate Method
Description
Value
Indicates the algorithm for calculating the effective height of the transmitter antenna.
Available algorithms are as follows: l AbsSpot l Height above the ground l Height above the average ground l Spot Hr l Slope At Receiver l Enhanced Slope at receiver
General: common calculatio n parameter s
Limitation to free space loss
Formula
Indicates whether to limit the loss in the free space.
The default value is True.
For the description of parameters in the formula, see Formula of the Cost231 Hata HW Propagation Model.
For the parameter values, see Values of the Parameters of the Formula in Typical Scenarios.
Formula of the Cost231 Hata HW Propagation Model The formula is as follows: l
Urban: Total = Lu - a(Hm)
l
Suburban: Total = Lu - a(Hm) - 2 x (lg(f/28))2 - K13
l
Rural: Total = Lu - a(Hm) - K14 x lg(f)2 + K15 x lg(f) - K16
Parameters in the formula are described as follows: Parameter
Description
Lu
Lu = K1 + K2 x lg(f) - K3 x lg(Hb) + (K4 - K5lg(Hb)) x lg(d)
a(Hm)
Indicates the factor for correcting the effective antenna and also a function of the size of the coverage area. l In the large city scenario: a(Hm) = K10 x [lg(K11 x Hm)]2 - K12 l In the rural or small city scenario: a(Hm) = (K6 x lg(f) - K7) x Hm - (K8 x lg(f) - K9)
Cm
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Indicates the factor for central calibration in large cities. The value varies according to the scenario. The value is already calculated in K1, and thus is not presented in this formula. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
77
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Parameter
Description
f
Indicates the frequency range. The value ranges from 1500 MHz to 2000 MHz.
Hb
Indicates the height of the base station antenna. The value range is from 30 m to 200 m.
d
Indicates the distance between the base station and the mobile station. The unit is kilometer.
Hm
Indicates the height of the mobile station. The value range is from 1 m to 10 m.
Values of the Parameters of the Formula in Typical Scenarios Scen ario
K1
K2
K3
K4
K5
K6
K7
K8
K9
K10~ K16
Dens e urban
49.3
33.9
13.82
44.9
6.55
1.1
0.7
1.56
0.8
0
Urba n
46.3
33.9
13.82
44.9
6.55
1.1
0.7
1.56
0.8
0
Subur b
46.3
33.9
13.82
44.9
6.55
1.1
0.7
1.56
0.8
0
Rural
46.3
33.9
13.82
44.9
6.55
1.1
0.7
1.56
0.8
0
High way
46.3
33.9
13.82
44.9
6.55
1.1
0.7
1.56
0.8
0
Highspeed railw ay
46.3
33.9
13.82
44.9
6.55
1.1
0.7
1.56
0.8
0
Parameters for Setting the SPM2G Propagation Model This section describes the parameters related to the SPM2G propagation model. You can refer to this section when setting the SPM2G propagation model.
Parameters Related to the SPM2G Propagation Model
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Parameter
Description
Value
Diffra ction Calcul
Indicates whether to consider building height.
The default value is False.
Add building height
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
78
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Parameter
Description
Value
ate: parame ters for diffract ion calcula tion
Indicates the algorithm for calculating the clutter loss.
Available algorithms are as follows:
Clutter Loss Calculate Method
l None l Uniform l Triangular l Logarithmic l Exponential Diffraction Loss Method
Indicates whether to consider diffraction during path loss calculation.
Available algorithms are as follows: l None l Atlas l Bullington l Deygout l Epstein
Effect Tx Height Calculate Method
Indicates the algorithm for calculating the effective height of the transmitter antenna.
Available algorithms are as follows: l AbsSpot l Height above the ground l Height above the average ground l Spot Hr l Slope At Receiver l Enhanced Slope at receiver
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Receiver on top clutter
Indicates whether the receiver is on the top of the clutter.
The default value is True.
Gener al: comm on calcula tion parame ters
Limitation to free space loss
Indicates whether to limit the loss in the free space.
The default value is False.
Param eters: calcula tion parame ters
K1 - K7
For the description of parameters in the formula, see Formula of the SPM2G Propagation Model.
For the parameter values, see Values of the Parameters of the Formula in Typical Scenarios.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
79
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Formula of the SPM2G Propagation Model Formula: PathLoss (dB) = K1 + K2 x lg(d) + K3 x lg(HTxeff) + K4 x DiffractionLoss + K5 x lg(d) x lg(HTxeff) + K6 x (HRxeff) + K7 x f(clutter) Parameters in the formula are described as follows: Parameter
Description
K1
Indicates a constant. Its unit is dB and its value depends on the frequency.
K2
Indicates the multiplying factor for lg(d), that is, the distance factor. The value of this parameter reflects the variation of the field strength that changes with the distance.
d
Indicates the horizontal distance between the transmitter antenna and the receiver antenna. The unit is meter.
K3
Indicates the multiplying factor for lg(HTxeff). The value of this parameter reflects the variation of the field strength that changes with the height of the transmitter antenna.
HTxeff
Indicates the effective height of the transmitter antenna. The unit is meter.
K4
Indicates the multiplying factor for diffraction loss. The value of this parameter indicates the diffraction status.
DiffractionLoss
Indicates the diffraction loss that is caused by obstruction. The unit is dB.
K5
Indicates the multiplying factor for lg(d) x lg(HTxeff).
K6
Indicates the multiplying factor for HRxeff. The value of this parameter reflects the variation of the field strength that changes with the height of the receiver antenna.
HRxeff
Indicates the effective height of the receiver antenna. The unit is meter.
K7
Indicates the multiplying factor for f(clutter). The value of this parameter indicates the weight of clutter loss.
f(clutter)
Indicates the average of weighted loss due to clutter.
Values of the Parameters of the Formula in Typical Scenarios
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Scenari o
K1
K2
K3
K4
K5
K6
K7
Dense urban
27.425
44.9
5.83
1
-6.55
0
1
Urban
23.455
44.9
5.83
1
-6.55
0
1
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
80
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Scenari o
K1
K2
K3
K4
K5
K6
K7
Suburb
11.955
44.9
5.83
1
-6.55
0
1
Rural
3.065
44.9
5.83
1
-6.55
0
1
Highway
-3.455
44.9
5.83
1
-6.55
0
1
Highspeed railway
-3.455
44.9
5.83
1
-6.55
0
1
Parameters for Setting the SPM900 Propagation Model This section describes the parameters related to the SPM900 propagation model. You can refer to this section when setting the SPM900 propagation model.
Parameters Related to the SPM900 Propagation Model Parameter Diffracti on Calculat e: paramete rs for diffracti on calculati on
Description
Value
Add building height
Indicates whether to consider building height.
The default value is False.
Clutter Loss Calculate Method
Indicates the algorithm for calculating the clutter loss.
Available algorithms are as follows: l None l Uniform l Triangular l Logarithmic l Exponential
Diffraction Loss Method
Indicates whether to consider diffraction during path loss calculation.
Available algorithms are as follows: l None l Atlas l Bullington l Deygout l Epstein
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
81
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Parameter Effect Tx Height Calculate Method
Description
Value
Indicates the algorithm for calculating the effective height of the transmitter antenna.
Available algorithms are as follows: l AbsSpot l Height above the ground l Height above the average ground l Spot Hr l Slope At Receiver l Enhanced Slope at receiver
Receiver on top clutter
Indicates whether the receiver is on the top of the clutter.
The default value is True.
General : common calculati on paramete rs
Limitation to free space loss
Indicates whether to limit the loss in the free space.
The default value is True.
Paramet ers: calculati on paramete rs
K1~K7
For the description of parameters in the formula, see Formula of the SPM900 Propagation Model.
For the parameter values, see Values of the Parameters of the Formula in Typical Scenarios.
Formula of the SPM900 Propagation Model Formula: PathLoss (dB) = K1 + K2 x lg(d) + K3 x lg(HTxeff) + K4 x DiffractionLoss + K5 x lg(d) x lg(HTxeff) + K6 x (HRxeff) + K7 x f(clutter) Parameters in the formula are described as follows:
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Parameter
Description
K1
Indicates a constant. Its unit is dB and its value depends on the frequency.
K2
Indicates the multiplying factor for lg(d), that is, the distance factor. The value of this parameter reflects the variation of the field strength that changes with the distance.
d
Indicates the horizontal distance between the transmitter antenna and the receiver antenna. The unit is meter.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
82
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Parameter
Description
K3
Indicates the multiplying factor for lg(HTxeff). The value of this parameter reflects the variation of the field strength that changes with the height of the transmitter antenna.
HTxeff
Indicates the effective height of the transmitter antenna. The unit is meter.
K4
Indicates the multiplying factor for diffraction loss. The value of this parameter indicates the diffraction status.
DiffractionLoss
Indicates the diffraction loss that is caused by obstruction. The unit is dB.
K5
Indicates the multiplying factor for lg(d) x lg(HTxeff).
K6
Indicates the multiplying factor for HRxeff. The value of this parameter reflects the variation of the field strength that changes with the height of the receiver antenna.
HRxeff
Indicates the effective height of the receiver antenna. The unit is meter.
K7
Indicates the multiplying factor for f(clutter). The value of this parameter indicates the weight of clutter loss.
f(clutter)
Indicates the average of weighted loss due to clutter.
Values of the Parameters of the Formula in Typical Scenarios Scenari o
K1
K2
K3
K4
K5
K6
K7
Dense urban
12.13
44.9
5.83
1
0
0
1
Urban
12.12
44.9
5.83
1
0
0
1
Suburb
2.17
44.9
5.83
1
0
0
1
Rural
-11.39
44.9
5.83
1
0
0
1
Highway
-16.39
44.9
5.83
1
0
0
1
Highspeed railway
-16.39
44.9
5.83
1
0
0
1
Parameters for Setting the Okumura Hata Propagation Model This section describes the parameters related to the Okumura Hata propagation model. You can refer to this section when setting the Okumura Hata propagation model. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
83
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Parameters Related to the Okumura Hata Propagation Model Parameter
Description
Value
Diffra ction Calcul ate: param eters for diffrac tion calcula tion
Indicates whether to consider diffraction during path loss calculation.
Available algorithms are as follows:
Diffraction Loss Method
l None l Atlas l Bullington l Deygout l Epstein The default value is None.
Effect Tx Height Calculate Method
Indicates the algorithm for calculating the effective height of the transmitter antenna.
Available algorithms are as follows: l AbsSpot l Height above the ground l Height above the average ground l Spot Hr l Slope At Receiver l Enhanced Slope at receiver The default value is None.
Gener al: comm on calcula tion param eters
Limitation to free space loss
Formula
Indicates whether to limit the loss in the free space.
The default value is True.
For the description of parameters in the formula, see Formula of the Okumura Hata Propagation Model.
For the parameter values, see Values of the Parameters of the Formula in Typical Scenarios.
Formula of the Okumura Hata Propagation Model The formula is as follows: l
Urban: Total = Lu - a(Hm)
l
Suburban: Total = Lu - a(Hm) - 2 x (lg(f/28))2 - K13
l
Rural: Total = Lu - a(Hm) - K14 x lg(f)2 + K15 x lg(f) - K16
Parameters in the formula are described as follows: Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
84
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Parameter
Description
Lu
Lu = K1 + K2 x lg(f) - K3 x lg(Hb) + (K4 - K5 x lg(Hb)) x lg(d)
a(Hm)
Indicates the factor for correcting the effective antenna and also a function of the size of the coverage area. l In the large city scenario: a(Hm) = K10 x [lg(K11 x Hm)]2 - K12 l In the rural or small city scenario: a(Hm) = (K6 x lg(f) - K7) x Hm - (K8 x lg(f) - K9)
Cm
Indicates the factor for central calibration in large cities. The value varies according to the scenario. The value is already calculated in K1, and thus is not presented in this formula.
f
Indicates the frequency range. The value ranges from 150 MHz to 1500 MHz.
Hb
Indicates the height of the base station antenna. The value range is from 30 m to 200 m.
d
Indicates the distance between the base station and the mobile station. The unit is kilometer.
Hm
Indicates the height of the mobile station. The value range is from 1 m to 10 m.
Values of the Parameters of the Formula in Typical Scenarios
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Sc en ar io
K 1
K 2
K 3
K 4
K 5
K 6
K 7
K 8
K 9
K 10
K 11
K 12
K 13
K 14
K 15
K 16
Hi gh sp ee d rai lw ay
64 . 77
26 . 16
13 . 82
44 .9
6. 55
1. 1
0. 7
1. 56
0. 8
-4. 78
18 . 33
40 . 94
0
4. 78
18 . 33
40 . 94
De ns e ur ba n
69 . 55
26 . 16
13 . 82
44 .9
6. 55
1. 1
0. 7
1. 56
0. 8
0
3. 2
11 . 75
4. 97
4. 78
18 . 33
40 . 94
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
85
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Sc en ar io
K 1
K 2
K 3
K 4
K 5
K 6
K 7
K 8
K 9
K 10
K 11
K 12
K 13
K 14
K 15
K 16
Ur ba n
69 . 55
26 . 16
13 . 82
44 .9
6. 55
1. 1
0. 7
1. 56
0. 8
0
0
0
0
4. 78
18 . 33
40 . 94
Su bu rb
67 . 55
26 . 16
13 . 82
44 .9
6. 55
1. 1
0. 7
1. 56
0. 8
-2
5. 4
0
0
4. 78
18 . 33
40 . 94
Ru ral
64 . 77
26 . 16
13 . 82
44 .9
6. 55
1. 1
0. 7
1. 56
0. 8
-4. 78
18 . 33
35 . 94
0
4. 78
18 . 33
40 . 94
Parameters for Setting the Okumura Hata HW Propagation Model This section describes the parameters related to the Okumura Hata HW propagation model. You can refer to this section when setting the Okumura Hata HW propagation model.
Parameters Related to the Okumura Hata HW Propagation Model Parameter
Description
Value
Diff ract ion Cal cula te: para met ers for diffr acti on calc ulati on
Indicates whether to consider diffraction during path loss calculation.
Available algorithms are as follows:
Diffraction Loss Method
l None l Atlas l Bullington l Deygout l Epstein The default value is None.
Effect Tx Height Calculate Method
Indicates the algorithm for calculating the effective height of the transmitter antenna.
Available algorithms are as follows: l AbsSpot l Height above the ground l Height above the average ground l Spot Hr l Slope At Receiver l Enhanced Slope at receiver
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
86
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Parameter
Description
Value
Gen eral : com mon calc ulati on para met ers
Indicates whether to limit the loss in the free space.
The default value is True.
For the description of parameters in the formula, see Formula of the Okumura Hata HW Propagation Model.
For the parameter values, see Values of the Parameters of the Formula in Typical Scenarios.
Limitation to free space loss
Formula
Formula of the Okumura Hata HW Propagation Model The formula is as follows: l
Urban: Total = Lu - a(Hm)
l
Suburban: Total = Lu - a(Hm) - 2 x (lg(f/28))2 - K13
l
Rural: Total = Lu - a(Hm) - K14 x lg(f)2 + K15 x lg(f) - K16
Parameters in the formula are described as follows: Parameter
Description
Lu
Lu = K1 + K2 x lg(f) - K3 x lg(Hb) + (K4 - K5lg(Hb)) x lg(d)
a(Hm)
Indicates the factor for correcting the effective antenna and also a function of the size of the coverage area. l In the large city scenario: a(Hm) = K10 x [lg(K11 x Hm)]2 - K12 l In the rural or small city scenario: a(Hm) = (K6 x lg(f) - K7) x Hm - (K8 x lg(f) - K9)
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Cm
Indicates the factor for central calibration in large cities. The value varies according to the scenario. The value is already calculated in K1, and thus is not presented in this formula.
f
Indicates the frequency range. The value ranges from 150 MHz to 1500 MHz.
Hb
Indicates the height of the base station antenna. The value range is from 30 m to 200 m.
d
Indicates the distance between the base station and the mobile station. The unit is kilometer. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
87
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Parameter
Description
Hm
Indicates the height of the mobile station. The value range is from 1 m to 10 m.
Values of the Parameters of the Formula in Typical Scenarios Scen ario
K1
K2
K3
K4
K5
K6
K7
K8
K9
K10~ K16
Dens e urban
72.55
26.16
13.82
44.9
6.55
1.1
0.7
1.56
0.8
0
Urba n
69.55
26.16
13.82
44.9
6.55
1.1
0.7
1.56
0.8
0
Subur b
61.55
26.16
13.82
44.9
6.55
1.1
0.7
1.56
0.8
0
Rural
54.55
26.16
13.82
44.9
6.55
1.1
0.7
1.56
0.8
0
High way
54.55
26.16
13.82
44.9
6.55
1.1
0.7
1.56
0.8
0
Highspeed railw ay
54.55
26.16
13.82
44.9
6.55
1.1
0.7
1.56
0.8
0
Parameters for Setting the ITURP Propagation Model This section describes the parameters related to the ITURP propagation model. You can refer to this section when setting the ITURP propagation model.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
88
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Parameters Related to the ITURP Propagation Model Parameter
Description
Value
Diffrac tion Calcul ate: parame ters for diffract ion calculat ion
Indicates the algorithm for calculating the effective height of the transmitter antenna.
Available algorithms are as follows:
Effect Tx Height Calculate Method
l AbsSpot l Height above the ground l Height above the average ground l Spot Hr l Slope At Receiver l Enhanced Slope at receiver
Gener al: commo n calculat ion parame ters
Limitation to free space loss
Formula
Indicates whether to limit the loss in the free space.
The default value is True.
For the description of parameters in the formula, see Formula of the ITURP Propagation Model.
For the parameter values, see Values of the Parameters of the Formula in Typical Scenarios.
Formula of the ITURP Propagation Model Formula: Total = K2 + K1 x lg(f) + N x lg(d x 1000) + Lf Parameters in the formula are described as follows:
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Parameter
Description
K2
Indicates an empirical coefficient. It is a constant.
K1
Indicates a coefficient corresponding to lg(f). It is a constant.
f
Indicates the frequency range.
N
Indicates a coefficient corresponding to lg(d x 1000). It is a constant.
d
Indicates the distance between the base station and the mobile station. The unit is kilometer.
Lf
Indicates the logarithm of the frequency range. The value varies according to the scenario.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
89
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Values of the Parameters of the Formula in Typical Scenarios Scenari o
Lf
K2
K1
N
K4
K5
K6
NLOS house
K4 + K5 x K6
-28
20
28
0
4
2
NLOS office
K4 + K5 x (K6-1)
-28
20
30
15
4
2
NLOS store
K4 + K5 x (K6-1)
-28
20
22
6
3
2
LOS
0
-28
20
20
0
0
0
Parameters for Setting the Cost231 Walfish-Ikegami Propagation Model This section describes the parameters related to the Cost231 Walfish-Ikegami propagation model. You can refer to this section when setting the Cost231 Walfish-Ikegami propagation model.
Parameters Related to the Cost231 Walfish-Ikegami Propagation Model Parameter Diffraction Calculate: Sets the parameters for calculating the diffraction.
Effect Tx Height Calculate Method
Description
Value
Indicates the algorithm for calculating the effective height of the transmitter antenna.
Available algorithms are as follows: l AbsSpot l Height above the ground l Height above the average ground l Spot Hr l Slope At Receiver l Enhanced Slope at receiver
Parameters: Sets the parameters for common calculation.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Angel between incident-wave and road
Indicates the angle between the road and the incident wave.
The default value is 30.
Building height
Indicates the average height of surrounding buildings.
The default value is 12.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Unit: degree.
Unit: m.
90
GENEX U-Net User Guide
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
Parameter Distance between buildings
Road Width
Description
Value
Indicates the distance between buildings.
The default value is 50.
Indicates the road width.
The default value is 25.
Unit: m.
Unit: m.
Formula of the Cost231 Walfish-Ikegami Propagation Model The formula is as follows: l
In the Los scenario: Total = K1 + K2 * lg(d) + K3
l
In the NLoss scenario and PLrts + PLmsd 0: Total = PL0 + PLrts + PLmsd
Parameters in the formula are described as follows: Parameter
Description
PL0
Indicates the free space propagation loss. Unit: dB. PL0 =NK1 + NK2*lg(d) + NK3*lg(f)
PLrts
Indicates the rooftop-to-street diffraction and scattering loss. PLrts = NK4 –NK5*lg(w) +NK6*lg(f) + NK7*lg(Hroof -Hue) +Lcri
PLmsd
Indicates the multi-shielding loss. PLmsd =Lbsk+ Ka + Kd*lg(d) + Kf*lg(f) - NK6*lg(b)
Lcri
Indicates the directional loss. l -10 Open to open an existing .ipl project file. NOTE
Alternatively, double-click an .ipl project file to start and open the project.
4.3 Importing Geographic Data You can import geographic data in various vector and grid formats and set coordinate systems. You can also add points, lines, or polygons to create vector objects.The method for importing geographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is the same.
Context The method for importing geographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is the same. For details, see 3.3 Importing Geographic Data.
4.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands The U-Net enables you to calculate path loss between a transmitter and a receiver based on a propagation model. Then you can use the calculated path loss matrix to perform prediction.The method for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systems on the U-Net is the same.
Context The method for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systems on the U-Net is the same. For details, see 3.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands. For details about the parameters for setting the frequency band information, see Parameters for Setting Bands.
4.5 Adding a Device You can import or create antennas, create TMAs, feeders, or site equipment.The method for creating site equipment for different network systems on the U-Net is the same.
Context The method for creating site equipment for different network systems on the U-Net is the same. For details, see 3.5 Adding a Device. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
279
GENEX U-Net User Guide
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
4.6 Setting LTE-TDD Traffic Parameters The U-Net obtains the average load of the network based on the simulation calculation of the detailed user distribution and therefore calculates various counters of the radio network. Traffic parameters refer to the parameters related to the user type, mobility, terminal, service, environment, MCS, and receiving devices. They are the basic data related to user distribution. Traffic parameters can be used to generate a specific traffic map. You must ensure that the traffic parameters are defined before capacity prediction.
4.6.1 Setting MCS Types This section describes how to set an MCS. You can modify the parameters (mainly the demodulation mode and coding rate) of an existing MCS type. When the existing MCS types do not meet your requirements, you can create a new MCS type.
Context The U-Net provides multiple default MCS types, corresponding to three demodulation modes (QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM) and different coding rate.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > LTE-TDD. Step 3 Choose PUSCH MCS or PDSCH MCS. The MCS table is displayed. Step 4 Click the blank row (marked with *) in the dialog box, as shown in Figure 4-3. For information on how to set a new MCS type, see Table 4-2. Figure 4-3 MCS
Table 4-2 Parameters for Setting the MCS
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Parameter
Description
Index
Indicates the index of an MCS. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
280
GENEX U-Net User Guide
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
Parameter
Description
Highest modulation
Indicates a modulation scheme, which can any of the following: l QPSK l 16QAM l 64QAM
Modulation Order
Indicates a modulation exponent.
Coding Rate
Indicates the coding rate. The value range is from 0 to 2.
Bearer Efficiency(bits/RE)
Indicates the bearer efficiency. Bearer efficiency = Coding rate x Modulation exponent
Step 5 Click
to close the table.
----End
4.6.2 Setting LTE-TDD Service Types Set the service type such as the voice service and data service. You can modify the parameters of existing service types. If the existing service types do not meet the requirements, you can create service types.
Context For an LTE-TDD network, the U-Net provides four default service types: LTEFTP, LTEVideo Conferencing, LTEVoIP, and LTEWeb Browsing.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 Set service type parameters. If...
Then...
Create a service type
1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > LTE-TDD. 2. Choose New from the shortcut menu. See Figure 4-4. 3. Set parameters for the new service type by referring to Table 4-3.
Modify an existing service type
1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > LTE-TDD > the existing service type. 2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. 3. Modify the parameters for the existing service type by referring to Table 4-3.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
281
GENEX U-Net User Guide
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
Figure 4-4 New
Table 4-3 Description of service parameters Parameter
Description
Name
Name of a service type.
Type
Service type. l Voice: CS services. l Data: PS services.
GBR
GBR service.
Priority
Service priority weighting factor, which is used to adjust the service priority for subscribers in capacity simulation. 1 indicates the lowest priority.
Activity Factor
Uplink/downlink activation factor. This parameter is required only for CS services. l Uplink: uplink activation factor. The value ranges from 0 to 1. l Downlink: downlink activation factor. The value ranges from 0 to 1.
AMR Rate(kbit/s)
Rate of CS services. The unit is kbit/s. Value range: 4.75, 5.15, 5.9, 6.7, 7.4, 7.95, 10.2, and 12.2.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
282
GENEX U-Net User Guide
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
Parameter
Description
MAC PDU(kbit)
Size of a packet for transmitting CS service data at the MAC layer.
Max Throughput (kbit/s)
Maximum uplink/downlink throughput. l Uplink: maximum uplink throughput. The value ranges from 0 to 107. l Downlink: maximum downlink throughput. The value ranges from 0 to 107. NOTE Minimum throughput ≤ Average throughput ≤ Maximum throughput.
Min Throughput (kbit/s)
Minimum uplink/downlink throughput. l Uplink: minimum uplink throughput. The value ranges from 0 to 107. l Downlink: minimum downlink throughput. The value ranges from 0 to 107. NOTE Minimum throughput ≤ Average throughput ≤ Maximum throughput.
Average Throughput (kbit/s)
Average uplink/downlink throughput. l Uplink: average uplink throughput. l Downlink: average downlink throughput.
Transmission Efficiency
Uplink/downlink transmission rate. l Uplink: uplink transmission rate. The value ranges from 0 to 1. l Downlink: downlink transmission rate. The value ranges from 0 to 1.
Offset(kbit/s)
Fixed uplink/downlink overhead, which is the length added to an encapsulated packet during the transmission at the MAC or RLC layer. l Uplink: fixed uplink overhead. The value ranges from 0 to 107. l Downlink: fixed downlink overhead. The value ranges from 0 to 107.
IBLER(%)
Block error rate. The value ranges from 0 to 100.
Body Loss(dB)
Body loss.
Step 3 Click OK. ----End
4.6.3 Setting LTE-TDD Receiver Types You can modify the parameters of existing receiver types. If the existing receiver types do not meet the requirements, you can create receiver types.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
283
GENEX U-Net User Guide
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > LTE-TDD. Step 3 Choose Reception Equipment from the shortcut menu. Step 4 Set the name of a receiver. If...
Then...
Create a receiver type.
In a blank row marked with *, type the name of the new receiver and select type of MCS Table.
Modify an existing receiver type.
Perform Step 5.
Step 5 Double-click the column heading corresponding to the receiver type, and then set parameters for the receiver type by referring to Table 4-4. If data in a row becomes unavailable in the dialog box, the data in this row cannot be changed. Step 6 Click OK. Table 4-4 Parameters for setting LTE-TDD receivers Parameter
Description
Name
Indicates the name of a receiver.
MCS Table
Indicates the modulation and coding scheme.
Mobility
Indicates the mobility type of a receiver. For details, see 3.6.7 Setting Mobility Types.
MIMO
Indicates the efficiency of adjusting codes by the receiver.
IBLER(%)
Indicates the block error rate. The value range is from 0 to 100.
Channel Relativity
Indicates the channel relativity.
Transmission Mode
Indicates the transmission mode. This parameter is valid only when the MCS Table is set to PDSCH MCS.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
284
GENEX U-Net User Guide
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
Parameter
Description
MCS Threshold
Indicates the MCS bearer table of a receiver. You can double-click a cell and then view the detailed MCS bearer information in the Demodulation area. l SINR: indicates the threshold of the SINR required during demodulation. l Spectrum Efficiency: indicate the efficiency of the spectrum. l The chart in the right pane shows the demodulation thresholds.
----End
4.6.4 Setting the LTE-TDD Terminal Type Set the terminal types used when a service is performed. You can modify the parameters of existing terminal types. If the existing terminal types do not meet the requirements, you can create terminal types.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 Set parameters of the terminal type. If...
Then...
Create a terminal 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > type LTE-TDD. 2. Choose New from the shortcut menu. 3. See Table 4-5 to set the parameters of a new terminal type. Modify an 1. On the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > existing terminal LTE-TDD > Existing Terminals. type 2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. 3. See Table 4-5 to modify the parameters of an existing terminal type.
Table 4-5 Parameter description of a terminal type Parameter
Meaning
Name
Indicates the name of a terminal type.
UE Category
Indicates the category of a terminal. The terminals are classified into five categories ranging from 1 to 5.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
285
GENEX U-Net User Guide
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
Parameter
Meaning
UL Peak Throughput(Kbps)
Indicates the peak throughput in the uplink direction.
DL Peak Throughput(Kbps)
Indicates the peak throughput in the downlink direction.
Support UL 64 QAM
Indicates that 64 QAM is supported in the uplink direction.
Maximum Layer Number
Indicates the maximum number of layers.
Min Tx Power(dBm)
Indicates the minimum transmit power of a terminal.
Max Tx Power(dBm)
Indicates the maximum transmit power of a terminal.
Noise Figure(dB)
Indicates the noise figure of a terminal.
Cable Loss(dB)
Indicates the feeder loss of a terminal.
Supported BF
Indicates whether to support the beamforming (BF). The available options are Not supported, TM7, and TM8.
UL RS Offset(dB)
Indicates the reference signal (RS) offset in the uplink direction.
RB Number
Indicates the number of resource blocks (RBs) supported by the terminal. This parameter is only applicable to prediction.
Reception Equipment
Indicates the type of the receiver for a terminal.
Gain(dBi)
Indicates the antenna gain.
Number of Transmission Antenna Ports
Indicates the number of antennas at the transmitter for a terminal.
Number of Reception Antenna Ports
Indicates the number of antennas at the receiver for a terminal.
----End
4.6.5 Setting Environment Types This section describes how to set environment types. You can modify the parameters of existing environment types, such as user, mobility type, and user density. If the existing environment types do not meet the requirements, you can create environment types.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
286
GENEX U-Net User Guide
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
Context For networks with different modes, the U-Net sets environment types in the same way. For details, see 3.6.5 Setting Environment Types.
4.6.6 Setting User Types You can modify the parameters of existing user types, such as user priority, service type, and user type. If the existing user types do not meet the requirements, you can create user types.
Context For networks with different modes, the U-Net sets user types in the same way. For details, see 3.6.6 Setting User Types.
4.6.7 Setting Mobility Types This section describes how to set mobility types for terminals. You can modify the parameters of existing mobility types, such as the velocity. If the existing mobility types do not meet the requirements, you can create mobility types.
Context For networks with different modes, the U-Net sets mobility types in the same way. For details, see 3.6.7 Setting Mobility Types.
4.7 Setting LTE-TDD NE Parameters You can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station template to automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeaters separately.
4.7.1 Importing Base Station Information You can import a data file of base station to the U-Net. After that, the system automatically creates sites, cells, and transceivers according to the base station data. You can also export base station data in a project for easy viewing of site information, cell information, and transceiver information. For networks with different modes, the U-Net imports base station information in the same way.
Context For networks with different modes, the U-Net imports site information in the same way. For details, see 3.7.1 Importing Base Station Information.
4.7.2 Creating a Single Site This section describes how to create a single site. You can create a site or modify the properties of an existing site to obtain a new one. For networks using different radio access technologies (RATs), you can use the U-Net to create a single site in the same way. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
287
GENEX U-Net User Guide
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
Context For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a single site in the same way. For details, see 3.7.2 Creating a Single Site.
4.7.3 Setting an LTE-TDD Base Station Template This section describes how to manage base station templates. You can create base stations by using the predefined templates of the U-Net. If the predefined templates do not meet your requirements, you can customize a base station template.
Procedure l
View base station templates. 1.
Select Template Management from the drop-down list on the toolbar. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-5.
Figure 4-5 Station Template Properties
2.
The Available Templates area displays the currently available base station templates. Select the default template from the drop-down list next to Default. The name of the default base station template will be displayed on the toolbar of the U-Net main window. The names of other base station templates are available in the drop-down list.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
288
GENEX U-Net User Guide
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
For example, l
.
Create a base station template. 1.
Click Add. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed. Alternatively, click Duplicate to duplicate the selected base station template. Then, a new base station template is generated on the basis of the selected template.
l
2.
Set the properties in the base station template. For details, see Parameters for Setting LTE-TDD Base Station Templates.
3.
Click OK.
View and modify properties of the base station template. 1.
Select a base station template in the Available Templates area.
2.
Click Properties. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed.
3.
View and modify the properties in the base station template. For details, see Parameters for Setting LTE-TDD Base Station Templates.
4.
Click OK.
----End
Follow-up Procedure You can create base stations based on a predefined base station template or a customized base station template. When a base station template is not required, you can select the template in the Station Template Properties dialog box and then click Delete to delete it. You cannot delete the last base station template.
4.7.4 Creating Base Stations in Batches The system supports creating a single site automatically or creating a series of base stations with the same property in batches. For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a base station automatically in the same way.
Context For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a base station automatically in the same way. For details, see 3.7.4 Creating Base Stations in Batches.
4.7.5 Creating Repeaters This section describes how to create repeaters. A repeater receives, amplifies, and forwards the RF carriers launched or transmitted in the uplink and downlink. A repeater includes two sides, that is, the donor side and the serving cell side. The donor side of a repeater receives signals from the donor transmitter. The signals may be carried by links of different types, such as radio links or microwave links. The serving cell side forwards the received signals. For networks of different types, the U-Net creates a repeater in the same way.
Context For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a repeater in the same way. For details, see 3.7.5 Creating Repeaters. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
289
GENEX U-Net User Guide
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
4.7.6 Creating a Transceiver This section describes how to create a transceiver. The U-Net combines the transceiver with cells. Before setting a cell, you must set the transceiver parameters. A transceiver supports a multi-mode network, that is, a transceiver can cover multiple cells. For networks using different radio access technologies (RATs), you can use the U-Net to create a transceiver in the same way.
Context For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a transceiver in the same way. For details, see 3.7.6 Creating a Transceiver.
4.7.7 Setting LTE-TDD Cell Parameters This section describes how to set LTE-TDD cell parameters. After a transceiver is set, the UNet automatically assigns a cell to the transceiver. After setting transceiver parameters, you can set cell parameters.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver > Sitex_x. Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. Step 4 On the LTE-TDDCell tab page of the displayed dialog box, set the properties of the LTE-TDD cell, as shown in Figure 4-6. For parameter description, see Parameters of LTE-TDD Cells. Figure 4-6 LTE-TDDCell
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
290
GENEX U-Net User Guide
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
Step 5 Click OK. ----End
4.7.8 Interface Reference for Setting LTE-TDD NE Parameters This section describes the parameters for setting LTE-TDD NE parameters by using the U-Net.
Parameters for Setting LTE-TDD Base Station Templates This section describes the parameters for creating base station templates or modifying the properties of base station templates. You can refer to this section when managing base station templates in the Station Template Properties dialog box.
Site Tab Page Parameter
Description
Name
Indicates the name of a base station template.
Support Type
Indicates the base station type. Macro indicates a macro base station, and Micro indicates a micro base station.
Use Altitude For Calculation
Indicates whether to manually enter the altitude of a site for calculation. If this option is selected, you manually enter the altitude of a site for calculation.
Hexagon Radius
Indicates the radius of a cell.
Comments
Description.
Transceiver Area on the LTE-TDD Tab Page
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Parameter
Description
Transceivers
Indicates the number of transceivers in a site.
Model
Indicates the type of an antenna.
Site Equipment
Indicates the site equipment.
Mechanical Downtilt
Indicates the mechanical tilt angle.
Electrical Downtilt
Indicates the electrical tilt angle.
Height/Ground(m)
Indicates the height of an antenna.
First Sector Azimuth
Indicates the azimuth of the first sector.
Transmission in the Number of Antennas area
Number of transmission antennas on a base station.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
291
GENEX U-Net User Guide
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
Parameter
Description
Reception in the Number of Antennas area
Number of receive antennas on a base station.
Transmission in the Number of Antenna Ports area
Number of transmission antenna ports.
Total Loss(DL)
Indicates the total downlink loss.
Total Loss(UL)
Indicates the total uplink loss.
Comments
Description.
General Tab Page in the Cell Area on the LTE-TDD Tab Page Parameter
Description
Max Power(dBm)
Indicates the maximum transmit power. The unit is dBm.
RS Power(dBm)
Indicates the power of the reference signal on a subcarrier. The unit is dBm.
Actual Load(DL)
Indicates the actual load on the downlink. The value ranges from 0 to 1.
Actual Load(UL)
Indicates the actual load on the uplink. The value ranges from 0 to 1.
Target IoT(UL)(dB)
Indicates the target ratio of the sum of interference and noise to the volume of increased noise on the uplink.
Actual IoT(UL)(dB)
Indicates the actual Interface Over Thermal (IoT) on the uplink.
CCU IoT(dB)
Indicates the IoT of users in the cell center. The value ranges from -100 to 100. The default value is 12.5.
CEU IoT(dB)
Indicates the IoT of users at the cell edge. The value ranges from -100 to 100. The default value is 10.5.
Frequency Band
Indicates a frequency band.
Channel Index
Indicates a channel index.
Reception
Indicates a receiver.
Transmission Mode
Indicates the transmission mode. For the details of the value, see Table 4-6.
DwPTS-GP-UpPTS
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Ratio of special subframes such as DwPTS, GP, and UpPTS.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
292
GENEX U-Net User Guide
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
Parameter
Description
Frame Configuration
Ratio of uplink and downlink subframes. l The ratio of uplink, downlink, and special subframes are included. l For example, the value of this parameter can be DSUUUDSUUU. D, S, and U indicate the downlink subframe, special subframe, and uplink subframe respectively.
Priority
Indicates the cell priority. The smaller the value of a cell is, the higher the priority of the cell is.
Channel Relativity
Indicates whether channel relativity is considered. By default, this option is not selected.
COMP
Indicates whether the macro diversity gain function is enabled on the base station. Enable the macro diversity gain function on the uplink for the base station to increase cell edge capacity and average cell throughput. By default, this option is not selected.
IRC
Indicates whether the interference rejection combining (IRC) function is enabled. If colored interference is strong, enable the IRC to suppress combining signal interference and increase uplink gain. By default, this option is not selected.
Advance Tab Page in the Cell Area on the LTE-TDD Tab Page Parameter
Description
Downlink
Indicates the downlink parameters. You can set downlink parameters in the text boxes in this area.
Uplink
Indicates the uplink parameters. You can set uplink parameters in the text boxes in this area.
Frequency Selectivity Schedule
Indicates whether to enable the frequency scheduling function. If this option is selected, the system allocates the proper network resources to users during capacity simulation.
ICIC(UL)
Indicates whether to perform inter-cell interference coordination (ICIC) in the uplink. l If inter-cell interference coordination (ICIC) is not enabled, the U-Net uses Actual IoT(UL) in the cell properties. l If ICIC is enabled, CCU IoT is used for the cell center and CEU IoT is used for the cell edge.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
293
GENEX U-Net User Guide
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
Parameter
Description
ICIC(DL)
Indicates whether to perform ICIC in the downlink. l When this parameter is set to ICIC Off, the PA value set in cell attributes is used. l When this parameter is set to Static ICIC, ICIC is enabled. In this case, the CCU PA value is used for the cell center and the CEU PA value for the cell edge. l When this parameter is set to Adaptive ICIC, ICIC can be enabled automatically and edge band mode can be configured automatically. Users can plan the edge band modes and then deliver the band modes without having to configure the parameter for the cells one by one.
Edge Frequency Style(UL)
Indicates the method of allocating frequencies to edge users in the uplink. The Reuse3 state is supported (Style1, Style2, or Style3).
Edge Frequency Style(DL)
Indicates the method of allocating frequencies to edge users in the downlink. l When ICIC(DL) is set to Static ICIC, the Reuse3 state is supported (Style1, Style2, or Style3). l When ICIC(DL) is set to Adaptive ICIC, the following 4 states and 11 modes are supported: Reuse3 (Style1, Style2, or Style3), Reuse6 (Style1a, Style1b, Style2a, Style2b, Style3a, or Style3b), full power Reuse1 (AllPowerReuse1), and low power Reuse1 (LowPowerReuse1). l When the parameter is set to the Reuse3 or Reuse6 state, the CCU PA value is used for the cell center for all users and the CEU PA value for cell edge. When the parameter is set to AllPowerReuse1, the PA value for all users in the cell is set to the value of PA. When the parameter is set to LowPowerReuse1, the PA value for all users in the cell is set to the value of CCU PA.
Power Control
Indicates the power control in the downlink.
Target Load
Indicates the target load.
Control Channel Overhead
l Uplink area: Indicates the number of resource blocks (RBs) on the uplink control channels. The value range is from 1 to N-1. The unit is RB. N indicates the number of RBs of the entire bandwidth. l Downlink area: Indicates the number of orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) on the downlink PDCCH.
Max Schedule Users
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Indicates the maximum number of scheduled subscribers on the uplink and downlink.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
294
GENEX U-Net User Guide
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
Parameter
Description
RS SINR Access Threshold (DL)(dB)
Indicates the signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR) access threshold of the downlink reference signal. The unit is dB.
Schedule Policy
Indicates a scheduling policy. l RR: Indicates that the scheduling is based on the polling algorithm. l PF: Indicates that the scheduling is based on the polling algorithm and the maximum signal to interference ratio. l MAX_CI: Indicates that the scheduling is based on the maximum signal to interference ratio.
TTI Bundling
Indicates whether TTI Bundling is considered.
VMIMO
Indicates whether the virtual multiple-input multiple-output (VMIMO) is considered. By default, this option is not selected.
Power Offset Tab Page in the Cell Area on the LTE-TDD Tab Page Parameter
Description
PBCH to RS(dB)
Indicates the offset of the PBCH power relative to the power of the reference signal. The value ranges from -15 to 15 and the unit is dB.
SCH to RS(dB)
Indicates the offset of the SCH power relative to the power of the reference signal. The value ranges from -15 to 15 and the unit is dB.
PCFICH to RS(dB)
Indicates the offset of the downlink PCFICH power relative to the power of the reference signal. The value range is from -15 to 15. The unit is dB.
PDCCH to RS(dB)
Indicates the offset of the downlink PDCCH power relative to the power of the reference signal. The value range is from -15 to 15. The unit is dB.
PHICH to RS(dB)
Indicates the offset of the PHICH power relative to the power of the reference signal. The value range is from -15 to 15. The unit is dB.
PA(dB)
Indicates the offset of the transmit power on the PDSCH RE relative to that on the RS RE. The value ranges from -15 to 15. The default value is -3.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
295
GENEX U-Net User Guide
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
Parameter
Description
CCU PA(dB)
Indicates the offset of the class A signal power received by users in the cell center on the PDSCH relative to the RS power. The value ranges from -15 to 15. The default value is -6.
CEU PA(dB)
Indicates the offset of the class A signal power received by users at the cell edge on the PDSCH relative to the RS power. The value ranges from -15 to 15. The default value is -1.77.
PB(dB)
Indicates the index for the offset of A symbols and B symbols of the RE relative to the RSRE power. The value can be 0, 1, 2, or 3.
Propagation Models Tab Page in the Cell Area on the LTE-TDD Tab Page Parameter
Description
Propagation Model
Indicates a propagation model. l When the parameter is present in the Main Matrix area, it indicates the main propagation model. l When the parameter is present in the Extended Matrix area, it indicates the extended propagation model.
Radius(m)
Indicates the calculation radius of a propagation model.
Resolution(m)
Indicates the calculation resolution of a propagation model.
Table 4-6 Description of Transmission Mode Values Value
Description
TM1
Indicates a single antenna port for eNodeBs.
TM2
Indicates the open-loop transmit diversity, which is used for the eNodeB 2T2R/4T2R/4T4R/8T8R configuration.
TM3
Indicates the open-loop space reuse, which is used for the eNodeB 2T2R/4T2R/4T4R configuration.
TM4
Indicates the closed-loop space reuse, which is used for the eNodeB 2T2R/4T2R/4T4R configuration.
TM6
Indicates the closed-loop transmit diversity, which is used for the eNodeB 2T2R/4T2R/4T4R configuration.
TM7
Indicates the signal-stream beamforming. This transmission mode is unavailable in the LTE-FDD network.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
296
GENEX U-Net User Guide
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
Value
Description
TM8
Indicates the signal-stream and dual-stream beamforming. This transmission mode is unavailable in the LTE-FDD network.
OL_Adaptive
Indicates the open-loop adaptive handover between TM2 and TM3.
CL_Adaptive
Indicates the closed-loop adaptive handover between TM4 and TM6.
OL_CL_Adaptive
Indicates the open-loop adaptive handover between TM2, TM3, TM4, and TM6.
TM7_MIMO_Adaptive
Indicates beamforming or MIMO adaptive. UEs that are compatible with the 3GPP R8 specification and do not support the selection of uplink transmit antenna can perform adaptive handovers between TM2, TM3, and TM7. This transmission mode is unavailable in the LTE-FDD network.
TM8_MIMO_Adaptive
Indicates beamforming or MIMO adaptive. UEs that are compatible with the 3GPP R9 specification and support the selection of uplink transmit antenna can perform adaptive handovers between TM2, TM3, and TM8. This transmission mode is unavailable in the LTE-FDD network.
Parameters of LTE-TDD Cells This section describes the parameters for creating an LTE-TDD cell or modifying the properties of an LTE-TDD cell.
LTE-TDDCell Tab Page Table 4-7 LTE-TDDCell tab page Parameter
Description
GCI
Indicates the global cell identity of a cell.
Name
Indicates the name of a carrier. The U-Net enters the default name for each new carrier.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Active
Indicates whether to activate the current carrier.
Frequency Band
Indicates a frequency band.
Channel Index
Indicates a channel index.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
297
GENEX U-Net User Guide
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
Parameter
Description
Target Load(UL)
Indicates the target load on the uplink. The value ranges from 0 to 1.
Target Load(DL)
Indicates the target load on the downlink. The value ranges from 0 to 1.
Actual Load(UL)
Indicates the actual load on the uplink. The value ranges from 0 to 1.
Actual Load(DL)
Indicates the actual load on the downlink. The value ranges from 0 to 1.
RS Power(dBm)
Indicates the power of the reference signal on a subcarrier. The unit is dBm.
PBCH to RS(dB)
Indicates the offset of the PBCH power relative to the power of the reference signal. The unit is dB.
SCH to RS(dB)
Indicates the offset of the SCH power relative to the power of the reference signal. The unit is dB.
PCFICH to RS(dB)
Indicates the offset of the downlink physical control format indicator channel (PCFICH) power relative to the power of the reference signal. The value ranges from -15 to 15. The unit is dB.
PDCCH to RS(dB)
Indicates the offset of the downlink PDCCH power relative to the power of the reference signal. The value ranges from -15 to 15. The unit is dB.
PHICH to RS(dB)
Indicates the offset of the downlink physical HARQ indicator channel (PHICH) power relative to the power of the reference signal. The value ranges from -15 to 15. The unit is dB.
Max Power(dBm)
Indicates the maximum transmit power. The unit is dBm.
Actual IoT(UL)(dB)
Indicates the actual Interface Over Thermal (IoT) on the uplink.
High Speed
Indicates the speed in a cell. This parameter can be set to one of the following values: l LowSpeed l HighSpeed l HighwaySpeed
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Radius(m)
Indicates the radius of a cell.
Min Root Sequence Index
Indicates the minimum ZC sequence of a cell.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
298
GENEX U-Net User Guide
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
Parameter
Description
Prach Reuse Tier(Neighbor)
Indicates the number of PRACH reuse tiers (depends on the neighbor relationship). The value of this parameter must be an integer larger than 0.
Preamble Format
Preamble format.
Reception
Indicates a receiver.
RS SINR Access Threshold(DL) (dB)
Indicates the signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR) access threshold of the downlink reference signal. The unit is dB.
Priority
Indicates the cell priority. The smaller the value of a cell is, the higher the priority of the cell is.
PB(dB)
Indicates the index for the offset of A symbols and B symbols of the RE relative to the RSRE power. The value can be 0, 1, 2, or 3.
Schedule Policy
Indicates a scheduling policy. l RR: Indicates that the scheduling is based on the polling algorithm. l PF: Indicates that the scheduling is based on the polling algorithm and the maximum signal to interference ratio. l MAX_CI: Indicates that the scheduling is based on the maximum signal to interference ratio.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
PCI
Indicates the physical ID of a cell.
PCI Reuse Distance(Km)
Indicates the minimum PCI reuse distance.
PCI Reuse Tier(Neighbor)
Indicates the minimum PCI reuse tiers (depends on the neighbor relationship).
Scene
Indicates the scenario of a cell.
MCC
Indicates the mobile country code (MCC).
MNC
Indicates the mobile network code (MNC).
CI
Indicates the ID of a cell.
DlEarfcn
Indicates a downlink ARFCN.
UlEarfcn
Indicates an uplink ARFCN.
TAC
Indicates the tracking area code (TAC).
Local Cell ID
Indicates the internal code of a cell for differentiating the cell from other cells under the same eNodeB.
Reselect Priority
Indicates the cell reselection priority.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
299
GENEX U-Net User Guide
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
Parameter
Description
PA(dB)
Indicates the offset of the transmit power on the PDSCH RE relative to that on the RS RE. The value ranges from -15 to 15. The default value is -3.
CCU PA(dB)
Indicates the offset of the class A signal power received by users in the cell center on the PDSCH relative to the RS power. The value ranges from -15 to 15. The default value is -6.
CEU PA(dB)
Indicates the offset of the class A signal power received by users at the cell edge on the PDSCH relative to the RS power. The value ranges from -15 to 15. The default value is -1.77.
CCU IoT(dB)
Indicates the IoT of users in the cell center. The value ranges from -100 to 100. The default value is 12.5.
CEU IoT(dB)
Indicates the IoT of users at the cell edge. The value ranges from -100 to 100. The default value is 10.5.
Alpha
This is an open loop power control parameter and indicates the path loss compensation coefficient.
Po(dBm)
This is an open loop power control parameter.
TTI Bundling
Indicates whether TTI Bundling is considered. By default, this option is not selected.
Multi-user Beamforming
Determines whether to enable the Multi-user Beamforming function during downlink scheduling.
VMIMO
Indicates whether the virtual multiple-input multipleoutput (VMIMO) is considered. By default, this option is not selected.
IRC
Indicates whether the interference rejection combining (IRC) function is enabled. If colored interference is strong, enable the IRC to suppress combining signal interference and increase uplink gain. By default, this option is not selected.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
300
GENEX U-Net User Guide
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
Parameter
Description
COMP
Indicates whether the macro diversity gain function is enabled on the base station. Enable the macro diversity gain function on the uplink for the base station to increase cell edge capacity and average cell throughput. By default, this option is not selected.
Channel Relativity
Indicates whether channel relativity is considered. By default, this option is not selected.
Transmission Mode
Indicates the transmission mode. For details, see Table 4-8.
VIP
For a VIP cell, the value of some LTE Cell parameters cannot be changed, including the azimuth, electrical tilt, and pilot power.
Throughput(UL)
Uplink throughput of a single subscriber. The value ranges from 0 to int.Max. The default value is 0.
Throughput(DL)
Downlink throughput of a single subscriber. The value ranges from 0 to int.Max. The default value is 0.
Cell Throughput(UL)
Uplink throughput of a cell. The value ranges from 0 to int.Max. The default value is 0.
Cell Throughput(DL)
Downlink throughput of a cell. The value ranges from 0 to int.Max. The default value is 0.
Density
Density of subscribers. The value ranges from 0 to int.Max. The default value is 800.
Azimuth Locked
Whether the azimuth is locked.
Azimuth Min. Value
Minimum adjustment angle of the azimuth. The value ranges from -360 to 360. The default value is -20.
Azimuth Max. Value
Maximum adjustment angle of the azimuth. The value ranges from -360 to 360. The default value is 20.
Electronic Downtilt Locked
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Whether the electrical tilt is locked.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
301
GENEX U-Net User Guide
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
Parameter
Description
Electronic Downtilt Min. Value
Minimum adjustment angle of the electrical tilt. The value ranges from -90 to 90. The default value is -10.
Electronic Downtilt Max. Value
Maximum adjustment angle of the electrical tilt. The value ranges from -90 to 90. The default value is 14.
RsPower Locked
Indicates whether the pilot power is locked.
RsPower Min. Value(dB)
Minimum adjustment range of the pilot power. The value ranges from 0 to 46. The default value is 10.
RsPower Max. Value(dB)
Maximum adjustment range of the pilot power. The value ranges from 0 to 46. The default value is 20.
Fitness Threshold(%)
Fitness threshold. The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 90.
Comments
Description.
State
Cell status, which is used to determine a cell in outage. The value can be Working or Outage. The default value is Working.
Status
Indicates the swapping status. l NONE: Indicates there is no cell in swapping state. l NEW: Indicates a new cell. l EXISTED: Indicates a live network cell. The default value is NONE.
Advance Parameters
Sets advanced parameters by clicking this button. For details, see Table 4-9.
DwPTS-GP-UpPTS
Ratio of special subframes such as DwPTS, GP, and UpPTS.
Frame Configuration
Ratio of uplink and downlink subframes. l The ratio of uplink, downlink, and special subframes are included. l For example, the value of this parameter can be DSUUUDSUUU. D, S, and U indicate the downlink subframe, special subframe, and uplink subframe respectively.
Neighbours list
Sets the list of neighboring cells by clicking this button. For details, see Table 4-10.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
302
GENEX U-Net User Guide
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
Parameter
Description
Propagation Models
Sets the propagation model by clicking this button. For details, see Table 4-11.
Table 4-8 Description of Transmission Mode Values Value
Description
TM1
Indicates a single antenna port for eNodeBs.
TM2
Indicates the open-loop transmit diversity, which is used for the eNodeB 2T2R/4T2R/4T4R/8T8R configuration.
TM3
Indicates the open-loop space reuse, which is used for the eNodeB 2T2R/4T2R/4T4R configuration.
TM4
Indicates the closed-loop space reuse, which is used for the eNodeB 2T2R/4T2R/4T4R configuration.
TM6
Indicates the closed-loop transmit diversity, which is used for the eNodeB 2T2R/4T2R/4T4R configuration.
TM7
Indicates the signal-stream beamforming. This transmission mode is unavailable in the LTE-FDD network.
TM8
Indicates the signal-stream and dual-stream beamforming. This transmission mode is unavailable in the LTE-FDD network.
OL_Adaptive
Indicates the open-loop adaptive handover between TM2 and TM3.
CL_Adaptive
Indicates the closed-loop adaptive handover between TM4 and TM6.
OL_CL_Adaptive
Indicates the open-loop adaptive handover between TM2, TM3, TM4, and TM6.
TM7_MIMO_Adaptive
Indicates beamforming or MIMO adaptive. UEs that are compatible with the 3GPP R8 specification and do not support the selection of uplink transmit antenna can perform adaptive handovers between TM2, TM3, and TM7. This transmission mode is unavailable in the LTE-FDD network.
TM8_MIMO_Adaptive
Indicates beamforming or MIMO adaptive. UEs that are compatible with the 3GPP R9 specification and support the selection of uplink transmit antenna can perform adaptive handovers between TM2, TM3, and TM8. This transmission mode is unavailable in the LTE-FDD network.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
303
GENEX U-Net User Guide
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
Table 4-9 Advance Parameters tab page Parameter
Description
Frequency Selectivity Schedule
Indicates whether to enable the frequency scheduling function. If this option is selected, the system allocates the proper network resources to users during capacity simulation.
ICIC(UL)
Indicates whether to perform inter-cell interference coordination (ICIC) on the uplink. l If inter-cell interference coordination (ICIC) is not enabled, the U-Net uses Actual IoT(UL) in the cell properties. l If ICIC is enabled, CCU IoT is used for the cell center and CEU IoT is used for the cell edge. Indicates whether to perform ICIC in the downlink.
ICIC(DL)
l When this parameter is set to ICIC Off, the PA value set in cell attributes is used. l When this parameter is set to Static ICIC, ICIC is enabled. In this case, the CCU PA value is used for the cell center and the CEU PA value for the cell edge. l When this parameter is set to Adaptive ICIC, ICIC can be enabled automatically and edge band mode can be configured automatically. Users can plan the edge band modes and then deliver the band modes without having to configure the parameter for the cells one by one. Edge Frequency Style(UL)
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Indicates the method of allocating frequencies to edge users in the uplink. The Reuse3 state is supported (Style1, Style2, or Style3).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
304
GENEX U-Net User Guide
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
Parameter
Description
Edge Frequency Style(DL)
Indicates the method of allocating frequencies to edge users in the downlink. l When ICIC(DL) is set to Static ICIC, the Reuse3 state is supported (Style1, Style2, or Style3). l When ICIC(DL) is set to Adaptive ICIC, the following 4 states and 11 modes are supported: Reuse3 (Style1, Style2, or Style3), Reuse6 (Style1a, Style1b, Style2a, Style2b, Style3a, or Style3b), full power Reuse1 (AllPowerReuse1), and low power Reuse1 (LowPowerReuse1). l When the parameter is set to the Reuse3 or Reuse6 state, the CCU PA value is used for the cell center for all users and the CEU PA value for cell edge. When the parameter is set to AllPowerReuse1, the PA value for all users in the cell is set to the value of PA. When the parameter is set to LowPowerReuse1, the PA value for all users in the cell is set to the value of CCU PA.
Power Control
Indicates the power control on the downlink.
Edge Frequency Style
Indicates the method of allocating frequencies to edge users on the uplink and downlink.
Control Channel Overhead
l Uplink area: Indicates the number of resource blocks (RBs) on the uplink control channels. The value range is from 1 to N-1. The unit is RB. N indicates the number of RBs of the entire bandwidth. l Downlink area: Indicates the number of orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) on the downlink PDCCH.
Max Schedule Users
Indicates the maximum number of scheduled subscribers on the uplink and downlink.
Target IoT(UL)(dB)
Indicates the target ratio of the sum of interference and noise to the volume of increased noise on the uplink.
Table 4-10 Cell Neighbors tab page
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Parameter
Description
Intra-frequency Neighbors
Indicates a list of intra-frequency neighboring cells.
Inter-frequency Neighbors
Indicates a list of inter-frequency neighboring cells.
Inter-RAT Neighbors
Indicates a list of inter-RAT neighboring cells.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
305
GENEX U-Net User Guide
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
Table 4-11 Propagation tab page Parameter
Description
Propagation Model
Indicates the main propagation model.
Radius(m)
Indicates the calculation radius of the main propagation model.
Resolution(m)
Indicates the calculation precision of the main propagation model.
Propagation Model
Indicates the extension propagation model.
Radius(m)
Indicates the calculation radius of the extended propagation model.
Resolution(m)
Indicates the calculation precision of the extended propagation model.
General Tab Page Table 4-12 Parameters on the General tab page Parameter
Description
Name
Name of a transceiver. This parameter uniquely identifies a transceiver.
Site
Name of the site that a transceiver belongs to. You can click New to create a site.
Hexagon Radius(m)
Radius of the hexagon indicating the cell coverage. The value ranges from 1 to 100000. l If a transceiver is directly added in the main window, the radius of the hexagon is the value of Hexagon Radius (m) in the current site template by default. l If a transceiver is added under the Transceiver node in the navigation tree, the value of this parameter is empty by default.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Transmission in the Number of Antennas area
Number of transmission antennas on a base station.
Reception in the Number of Antennas area
Number of receive antennas on a base station.
Transmission in the Number of Antenna Ports area
Number of transmission antenna ports.
Comments
Comments on a transceiver.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
306
GENEX U-Net User Guide
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
Antenna Config Tab Page Table 4-13 Parameters on the Antenna Config tab page Parameter
Description
Antenna ID
ID of an antenna for a transceiver. The ID of each antenna must be unique for a transceiver.
Power Ratio
Power allocation ratio. The value ranges from 0 to 1.
Sector ID
ID of a sector. This parameter uniquely identifies an antenna.
Dx(m)
Offset of the antenna relative to the site that the antenna belongs to in the X direction. The unit is meter.
Dy(m)
Offset of the antenna relative to the site that the antenna belongs to in the Y direction. The unit is meter.
Longitude
Longitude of an antenna.
Latitude
Latitude of an antenna.
Main Antenna
Main antenna of a transceiver. Each cell has only one main antenna.
Azimuth
Antenna azimuth. The value ranges from 0 to 360. The unit is degree.
Antenna
Type of an antenna. The default value is determined based on the configuration of the system antennas. In normal cases, the default antenna type is the type of the first antenna.
Mechanical Downtilt
Mechanical downtilt of an antenna. The unit is degree.
Electrical Downtilt
Electrical downtilt of an antenna. The unit is degree.
Height(m)
Height of an antenna. The unit is meter.
RRU ID
l ID of a remote radio unit (RRU). l The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 0. l If the value of RRU ID differs among the antennas for a transceiver, the cell served by the transceiver is a single frequency network (SFN) cell. In this case, you can configure only one cell for this transceiver.
Equipment
Equipment properties. For details, see Table 4-14.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
307
GENEX U-Net User Guide
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
Table 4-14 Parameters in the Equipment Configuration dialog box Parameter
Description
Input Total Loss
l If you select the check box, you need to manually type the total loss. l If you clear the check box, the U-Net calculates the total loss.
Site Equipment TMA
Indicates the site equipment. Tower-mounted amplifier (TMA). You can click modify its properties.
Feeder
Antenna feeder. You can click
to
to modify its properties.
Feeder Length(m)
Length of a feeder. You need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
Miscellaneous Loss(dB)
Miscellaneous loss. You need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
JumpLoss Ant-TMA(dB)
Jumper loss between the TMA and the antenna port. You need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
JumpLoss Ant-BS(dB)
Jumper loss between the top of cabinet and the antenna port. You need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
JumpLoss TMA-BS(dB)
Jumper loss between the TMA and the top of cabinet. You need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
Total Loss(dB)
Total loss, including the TMA, feeder, jumper, and miscellaneous loss. You need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
4.8 LTE-TDD Prediction By calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage and channel quality.
4.8.1 Basic Knowledge of LTE-TDD Prediction This chapter describes the basic knowledge of prediction, including the formula for calculating link loss, method for determining the calculation area, meaning of prediction counters, and prediction algorithm. You can develop a better understanding of the prediction function by learning the basic knowledge.
Basic Knowledge of LTE-TDD Prediction Counters This section describes the meanings of LTE-TDD prediction counters supported by the U-Net. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
308
GENEX U-Net User Guide
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning NOTE
Certain counters are not displayed by default. To enable the U-Net to display these counters, select the corresponding network technology, right-click a counter type and then choose More Coverage from the shortcut menu.
Table 4-15 lists the LTE-TDD prediction counters supported by the U-Net. Table 4-15 Description of LTE-TDD prediction counters Category
Counter
Meaning
Coverage by Signal Level (DL)
Best Server
Cell with the highest DL RSRP among the cells that receive downlink signals.
DL RSRP
Strength of single downlink reference signal (RS) received from the primary serving cell.
DL BandWidth RSRP
Indicates the strength of downlink reference signals on the entire bandwidth.
DL RSSI
Total power received by a UE on the entire bandwidth. The power includes the receive power of the serving cell, interference power of other cells, and the noise power of the UE.
PDSCH Signal Level
Indicates the received power of the traffic channel RE.
Handover Area
Whether an area is a handover area.
DL ICIC Zone
Downlink ICIC area, that is, the downlink central area and edge area that meet the downlink ICIC threshold.
Pilot Pollution
Determines whether a point has pilot pollution and check the number of cells producing pilot pollution. To obtain a more accurate result, you are advised to select With Shadow. NOTE By analyzing the number of cells covering each spot that reaches the pilot pollution threshold, you can learn about pilot pollution in areas such as the poor coverage area intuitively.
Coverage by C/(I+N) Level(DL)
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
DL RS SINR
Signal-to-interference-and-noise ratio (SINR) of the downlink reference signal that a UE receives. This counter reflects the quality of the downlink reference signal.
PDSCH SINR
Indicates the Signal Interference and Noise Ratio (SINR) of the traffic channel. This counter reflects the quality of the traffic channel.
DL RSRQ
Quality of the received downlink reference signals.
PDCCH SINR
Indicates the PDCCH SINR.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
309
GENEX U-Net User Guide
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
Category
Counter
Meaning
Coverage by Signal Level (UL)
UL RSRP
Strength of the uplink reference signal on an RE.
PUSCH Signal Level
Indicates the power that a cell receives on the PUSCH RE.
UL User RB TxPower
Uplink transmit power on a resource block (RB).
UL User BandWidth TxPower
Indicates the uplink transmit power on the user bandwidth.
UL ICIC Zone
Indicates the uplink ICIC area, that is, the uplink central area and edge area that meet the uplink ICIC threshold.
Coverage by C/(I+N) Level(UL)
UL RS SINR
SINR of the uplink reference signal.
PUSCH SINR
Indicates the SINR of the traffic channel. This counter reflects the quality of the traffic channel.
Coverage by MCS(UL)
PUSCH MCS
The highest MCS supported by the uplink PUSCH.
Coverage by MCS(DL)
PDSCH MCS
The highest MCS supported by the downlink PDSCH.
Coverage by Throughput (UL)
UL MAC Peak Throughput
Uplink peak throughput on the MAC layer.
UL Application Peak Throughput
Uplink peak throughput on the application layer.
Coverage by Throughput (DL)
DL MAC Peak Throughput
Downlink peak throughput on the MAC layer.
DL Application Peak Throughput
Downlink peak throughput on the application layer.
Procedure for Performing Prediction This section describes the procedure for performing prediction through the U-Net. Figure 4-7 shows the procedure for performing prediction through the U-Net.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
310
GENEX U-Net User Guide
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
Figure 4-7 Procedure of prediction
LTE-TDD Prediction Algorithm By calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage and channel quality. This section describes the LTE-TDD prediction algorithm through a schematic diagram. Figure 4-8 shows the schematic diagram of the LTE-TDD prediction algorithm.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
311
GENEX U-Net User Guide
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
Figure 4-8 LTE-TDD prediction algorithm
Table 4-16 describes the process of LTE-TDD prediction algorithm. Table 4-16 Description of the LTE-TDD prediction algorithm Step
Operation
Description
1
Traversing all the cells
Determine whether the cells in the calculation area are activated. If a cell is not activated, the prediction counters of this cell are not calculated.
2
Obtaining the path loss matrix
l If the path loss matrix does not exist, calculate the path loss matrix. l If the path loss matrix exists, it can be obtained directly.
3
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Querying the antenna gain, equipment loss, and penetration loss
You can enable the U-Net to consider the antenna gain, equipment loss, and penetration loss during the calculation of link loss.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
312
GENEX U-Net User Guide
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
Step
Operation
Description
4
Predicting slow fading by using the shadowing margin
To ensure that a base station can cover cell edges with a certain probability. Certain power of the base station is reserved to prevent shadow fading. The reserved power is called shadowing margin. You can enable the U-Net to take the shadowing margin into account during the calculation of link loss.
5
Calculating the DL RSRP to determine the primary serving cell
The DL RSRP indicates the receive level at the downlink and it is a key counter in prediction. You can determine the primary serving cell based on this counter.
6
Calculating the power of interference noises to determine the handover area
You can calculate the power of interference noises and determine the handover area.
7
Determining the target RRU in the uplink
If a cell in the calculation area is an SFN cell, you must determine the target RRU of the cell in the uplink.
8
Calculating counters of the traffic channel and common channel based on the BIN
Calculating counters of the traffic channel and common channel such as DL RS SINR, PDSCH SINR, UL RS SINR, and PUSCH SINR based on the BIN
9
Displaying prediction results
The U-Net displays the prediction results in different colors in the window and provides a prediction report.
Basic Knowledge of Link Loss Link loss refers to the loss on the entire link from the transmitter to the receiver. When calculating link loss, the U-Net considers various loss factors such as path loss, equipment loss, and shadow fading. Loss factors of the uplink are different from loss factors of the downlink. The formulas for calculating uplink loss and downlink loss are as follows: l
Uplink loss = Loss caused by the human body + Feeder loss of the terminal - Antenna gain of the terminal + Path loss + Shadow fading + Penetration loss - Antenna gain of the base station + Total loss of the base station
l
Downlink loss = Loss caused by the human body + Feeder loss of the terminal - Antenna gain of the terminal + Path loss + Shadow fading + Penetration loss - Antenna gain of the base station + Total loss of the base station
The difference between the two formulas are as follows: The uplink has TMA gains which are included into the antenna gain of the base station in calculation. The downlink has TMA loss which is included into the total loss of the base station. Table 4-17 describes the meanings of factors in the formulas.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
313
GENEX U-Net User Guide
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
Table 4-17 Meanings of factors in the formulas Factor
Meaning
Loss caused by the human body
Loss of transmit or receive power of the mobile station (MS) due to the shielding or absorption of the human body.
Feeder loss of a terminal
Loss of the feeder on a terminal.
Antenna gain of a terminal
Gain of the antenna on a terminal.
Path loss
Loss on the path between the transmit antenna and the receive antenna, which excludes the antenna gain and shadow fading.
Shadow fading
When an electromagnetic wave is blocked by fluctuant terrains, buildings, or vegetation areas in the propagation path, the shadow of the magnetic field exits. When an MS travels through the shadow of different barriers, the received signal strength decreases, and the field strength at the receiving antenna changes. In this case, fading is generated. This fading is called shadow fading.
Penetration loss
Loss that is caused when signals travel through buildings, vehicles, and leaves.
Antenna gain of a base station
Gain of the antenna on a base station.
Total loss of the base station
Power loss that is caused when signals travel through all the TMAs, feeders (including the main feeder, jumpers, and lightning arresters), and connectors
4.8.2 Calculating Path Loss The path loss refers to the loss of strength of signals transmitted from a TX end to an RX end. You must calculate the path loss because it is an input required for prediction. The U-Net automatically calculates the path loss and generates a .loss file for each cell. Alternatively, you can manually calculate the path loss before performing the prediction. This section describes how to manually calculate the path loss.
Prerequisites l
Base stations (sites and cells) are available.
l
Propagation models are assigned to cells.
Context You can manually calculate the path loss in calculation or force calculation mode. l
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Calculation
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
314
GENEX U-Net User Guide
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
– If you calculate the path loss for the first time, that is, if no path loss matrix file is available, the U-Net calculates the path loss matrix of each cell. Afterwards, the U-Net checks the validity of calculation results and updates the results. – If path loss matrices are available but the parameters related to radio data and calculation area are modified, the path loss matrices of some cells may become invalid. In this case, the U-Net calculates only these invalid path loss matrices again. l
Force calculation If path loss matrices are available, the U-Net deletes all the matrices regardless of the validity and calculates the path loss matrix of each cell again. Afterwards, the U-Net checks the validity of calculation results and updates the results.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver. Step 3 Select a calculation mode to calculate the path loss of all cells on the Transceiver node. If you need to...
Then...
Calculate
Right-click and choose Calculation > Calculate Path Loss Matrices from the shortcut menu.
Calculate forcibly
Right-click and choose Calculation > Force Calculate Path Loss Matrices from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 If you have not saved the project file, save it as prompted. The U-Net automatically creates a Project Name.losses folder that saves the information about the path loss matrix and an .ipl project file in the specified save path. Afterwards, the U-Net starts calculating the path loss. Step 5 Query the calculation results After the calculation is complete, the calculation results will be automatically saved in the Project Name.losses folder that saves the project file. Click
to stop ongoing calculations.
Step 6 Optional: Check the progress of path loss calculation In the Event Viewer docked window, query the start time and end time of path loss on the Event Viewer tab page and the progress of the path loss calculation on the Task tab page, as shown in Figure 4-9.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
315
GENEX U-Net User Guide
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
Figure 4-9 Event Viewer
----End
Follow-up Procedure The MCL with the default value of 70 dB indicates the minimum path loss between the base station and the terminal or between one terminal and another terminal. If you want to change the default value of the MCL, modify the LinkLossConfig.xml file in the U-Net installation directory.
4.8.3 Setting Shadow Fading Standard Deviation During the network prediction, the standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be set for certain prediction counters.
Context l
In the LTE-FDD network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be set for the following predication counters: DL RS SINR, DL RSRQ, Geometry, PBCH SINR, PCFICH SINR, PDCCH SINR, PRACH SINR, PUCCH SINR, SCH SINR, PDSCH SINR, PUSCH SINR, PHICH SINR, and UL RS SINR.
l
In the LTE-TDD network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be set for the following predication counters: DL RS SINR, DL RSRQ, PDCCH SINR, PDSCH SINR, PUSCH SINR, UL RS SINR.
l
In the GSM network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be set for the following predication counters: Geometry, DL BCCH CIR, DL Service CIR, and UL Service CIR.
l
In the UMTS network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be set for the following predication counters: CPICH Ec/Io, DL DPCH Eb/Nt, HS PDSCH Ec/Nt, UL DPCH Eb/Nt, and E DPDCH Ec/ Nt.
l
In the GSM/UMTS network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be set for the following predication counters: Coverage By CIR.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
316
GENEX U-Net User Guide
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Map > Clutter. Step 3 Choose Parameter Management from the shortcut menu. The Clutter Parameters Display dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Perform the following operations as required. If ...
Then ...
The map information is not imported
Click Default Value to change the default values of parameters under Model Standard Deviation and C/(I + N) Standard Deviation.
The map information is imported
Click Actual Value to change the actual values of parameters under Model Standard Deviation and C/(I + N) Standard Deviation.
NOTE
For the meanings of parameters under Model Standard Deviation and C/(I + N) Standard Deviation, see Parameters for Setting the Clutter Class Layer.
Step 5 Click OK. ----End
4.8.4 Creating an LTE-TDD Prediction Group The U-Net calculates the prediction as per prediction group. Each prediction group consists of one or more prediction items. You can create prediction groups and modify the properties.
Prerequisites l
A U-Net project is already created.
l
The geographic data is imported.
l
The calculation area is created. For details about calculation area knowledge and the method for creating a calculation area, see 3.3.9 Creating Vector Objects.
Procedure Step 1 Optional: Setting common properties for prediction groups. Before creating coverage prediction groups, you need to set common properties for prediction groups so that new prediction groups have the common properties. 1.
In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Predictions.
3.
Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
317
GENEX U-Net User Guide
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
4.
In the displayed dialog box, set the precision of prediction on the Predictions tab page. You are advised to set the precision of prediction to be the same as that of the propagation model.
5.
Set the height of receiver on the Receiver tab page.
6.
Click OK.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Predictions. Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu. Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, set prediction group name, whether to calculate immediately, and select prediction counters. For indicator description, see Basic Knowledge of LTE-TDD Prediction Counters. Step 5 Click Next. Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, set the prediction group properties. For parameter description, see 4.8.11 Parameters for Creating LTE-TDD Prediction Groups. Step 7 Click OK. Step 8 Optional: If you deselect Calculate Now in creating prediction groups, right-click the prediction group, and then choose Calculate from the shortcut menu after creating a prediction group. ----End
Follow-up Procedure After the prediction calculation is complete, you can recalculate KPIs, add or delete KPIs, and view detailed KPI result reports. For details, see 3.8.6 Managing the Prediction Result.
4.8.5 Predicting Performance of a Single Cell The U-Net can perform a single cell prediction in a specified area. In this case, other cells are deactivated by default. The single cell prediction enables you to effectively observe the prediction results of each cell in batches in the case that no interference to cells is caused.
Prerequisites l
The geographic data is imported.
l
Base stations (sites and cells) are available.
l
The calculation area is created. For details about calculation area knowledge and the method for creating a calculation area, see 3.3.9 Creating Vector Objects.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Predictions. Step 3 Choose New Single Cell Prediction from the shortcut menu. The New Prediction Group dialog box is displayed. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
318
GENEX U-Net User Guide
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, set prediction group name, whether to calculate immediately, and select prediction counters. For indicator description, see Basic Knowledge of LTE-TDD Prediction Counters. Step 5 Click Next. Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, set the prediction group properties. For parameter description, see 4.8.11 Parameters for Creating LTE-TDD Prediction Groups. Step 7 Click OK. Step 8 Optional: If you deselect Calculate Now in creating prediction groups, right-click the prediction group, and then choose Calculate from the shortcut menu after creating a prediction group. ----End
Follow-up Procedure The number of prediction groups generated after a single-cell prediction is equal to the number of cells in the map window. You can expand the Predictions node in the navigation tree to view details.
4.8.6 Viewing Coverage Prediction Results You can view the prediction result in the map window or view the statistics on various indicators by using the PDF or CDF diagram.
Procedure l
View a prediction result in the map window. For details, see Querying Prediction Statistical Results (on a Map).
l
View a prediction result by using the PDF or CDF diagram. For details, see Viewing Coverage Prediction Statistical Results (in a PDF/CDF Chart).
----End
4.8.7 Analyzing the Prediction Result After calculation on prediction, you can further analyze the prediction result. For example, after improving network parameters, you can re-analyze the prediction result and compare the prediction results before and after parameter adjustment. Based on the overall result of prediction analysis, you can use the point-based analysis function to further analyze a focus object.
Context The method of analyzing a prediction result for networks in the LTE-TDD mode is the same as that for networks in the LTE-FDD mode. For details, see 3.8.8 Analyzing the Prediction Result.
4.8.8 Exporting and Printing Prediction Results You can export and print prediction results in batches or export the detailed prediction result by Bin point. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
319
GENEX U-Net User Guide
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
Context The methods of exporting and printing a prediction result for networks in the LTE-TDD mode are the same as those for networks in the LTE-FDD mode.
Procedure l
Export prediction results in batches. For details, see Exporting Prediction Results in Batches.
l
Export the detailed prediction result by Bin point. For details, see Exporting the Detailed LTE-FDD Prediction Result by Bin Point.
l
Print prediction results in batches. For details, see Printing Prediction Results in Batches.
----End
4.8.9 Verifying the Feature Database Based on DT Data The DT data can be used to rectify the coverage prediction group after its calculation is complete in order to improve the origin authentication and simulation degree of feature database. This helps to improve the locating precision. The rectification is not required if DT data is unavailable, and this procedure can be ignored.
Context The method of verifying the feature database based on DT data in LTE-TDD is similar to that in LTE-FDD. For detailed operations, see 3.8.10 Verifying the Feature Database Based on DT Data.
4.8.10 Exporting the Feature Database Data You can export the feature database data after the prediction calculation is complete for geographical locating.
Context The method of exporting the feature database in LTE-TDD is similar to that in LTE-FDD. For detailed operations, see 3.8.11 Exporting DT Feature Data.
4.8.11 Parameters for Creating LTE-TDD Prediction Groups This section describes the parameters for creating a prediction group and setting the properties of a prediction group. You can refer to this section when creating a prediction group in the New Prediction Group dialog box or setting the properties of a prediction group in the Group Properties dialog box.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
320
GENEX U-Net User Guide
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
Parameters in the New Prediction Group Dialog Box Parameter
Description
Group Name
Name of a prediction group. This parameter uniquely identifies a prediction group. The U-Net provides a default name for each created prediction group in this parameter field.
Prediction Type
Prediction type.
Study Selected
Prediction counter.
Calculate Now
Whether to calculate each prediction counter immediately.
Parameter in the Group Properties dialog box Table 4-18 Parameters on the General tab page Parameter
Description
Name
Name of a prediction group.
Resolution(m)
Precision of the prediction.
Intra-Frequency Handover(dB)
Handover threshold of intra-frequency cells. This parameter is valid only after Handover Area is set.
Inter-Frequency Handover(dB)
Handover threshold of inter-frequency cells. This parameter is valid only after Handover Area is set.
Polygon
Calculation area for the prediction.
Neighbour PDSCH Load
Whether the load on the neighboring cell is taken into account in the calculation. The value ranges from 0 to 100.
Neighbour PDCCH Load
Whether the PDCCH load on the neighboring cell is taken into account in the calculation. The value ranges from 0 to 100.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
With Shadow
Whether the shadow fading is taken into account in the calculation.
Cell Edge Coverage Probability
Probability of cell edge coverage, that is, the probability that the receive signal strength is stronger than the specified threshold at the edge of a cell.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
321
GENEX U-Net User Guide
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
Parameter
Description
Indoor Coverage
Whether the penetration loss is taken into account.
Table 4-19 Parameters on the Condition tab page Parameter
Description
Signal Level(DL)(dBm)
Receive threshold of the downlink reference signal.
Signal Level(UL)(dBm)
Receive threshold of the uplink reference signal.
Interferer Reception Threshold(dBm)
Interference threshold.
Terminal
Mobility type.
Service
Service type.
Mobility
Mobility type.
Table 4-20 Parameters on the Advanced tab page Parameter
Description
Frequency Name
Name of a frequency band.
Channel Index
Frequency corresponding to a frequency band.
4.9 LTE-TDD Capacity Simulation Capacity is important for radio network planning. The process of capacity simulation is as follows: The U-Net generates a certain number of subscribers based on the traffic map and allocate network resources to the generated subscribers. Then, the U-Net analyzes the overall network performance and collects the final capacity simulation results. Finally, the U-Net generates a statistical report.
Context The method of capacity simulation for networks in the LTE-TDD mode is the same as that for networks in the LTE-FDD mode. For details, see 3.9 LTE-FDD Capacity Simulation.
4.10 Planning LTE-TDD Network Parameters This section describes how to properly plan the frequencies, PCIs, and PRACH channels of the LTE-TDD network by using the U-Net. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
322
GENEX U-Net User Guide
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
4.10.1 LTE PCI Planning The physical cell IDs (PCIs) of an LTE network is limited. Therefore, reuse of PCIs is unavoidable in LTE networking. To reduce the downlink interference of intra-frequency and co-PCI cells, you must assign a proper PCI to each cell. On the U-Net, you can enable the system to automatically plan PCIs or you can manually plan a PCI for each cell. After the PCI planning is complete, you can check whether the PCI planning results are proper.
Context For PCI planning, see 3.10.1 LTE PCI Planning.
4.10.2 LTE PRACH Planning To ensure successful random access of the LTE-TDD network, you must plan the physical random access channel (PRACH) parameters for each cell in the LTE-TDD network. PRACH planning refers to the Zadoff-Chu Sequence (ZC) planning.
Context The method of planning PRACH parameters for networks in the LTE-TDD mode is the same as that for networks in the LTE-FDD mode. For details, see 3.10.2 LTE PRACH Planning.
4.10.3 LTE-TDD Neighboring Cell Planning After creating base stations, you must plan neighboring cells for the cells on the LTE network. You can automatically plan neighboring cells in batches or manually plan neighboring cells for each cell one by one.
Context The method for planning neighboring cells in LTE-TDD network is the same as that in LTEFDD network. For details, see 3.10.3 LTE-FDD Neighboring Cell Planning.
4.10.4 LTE Frequency Planning After base stations are created, you must assign EARFCNs to cells on the network. The U-Net provides three frequency reuse modes: 1x1+ICIC soft frequency, 1x1+ICIC downlink edge six frequency band, and 1x3 frequency reuse modes. When the frequency band is determined, you can enable the U-Net to plan EARFCNs automatically or you can manually plan EARFCNs for each cell.
Context For frequency planning, see 3.10.4 LTE Frequency Planning.
4.10.5 LTE Cell Automatic Planning This section describes how to perform LTE cell automatic planning. You can use this function to adjust the electrical downtilt and azimuth of an antenna and transmission power of a cell so that each prediction counter in the calculation area meets your configuration requirements. This reduces the dependence on network planning engineers' experience and the times of adjusting parameter settings. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
323
GENEX U-Net User Guide
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
Context For details about the LTE cell automatic planning, see 3.10.5 Automatically Planning LTE Cells.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
324
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
5
GSM Network Planning
About This Chapter The U-Net supports the planning of the GSM network. You can model the actual network environment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creating base stations based on the imported geographic data. Then, you can plan the neighboring cell parameters, predict the network coverage range, and evaluate the network capacity to meet your network planning requirements. 5.1 Process of GSM Network Planning This section describes the process of GSM network planning. You can refer to this section when planning a GSM network by using the U-Net. 5.2 Creating a Project This section describes how to create a project. You can select different project templates for different network systems. The U-Net creates the project based on the selected template. Currently, the U-Net provides project templates for the following network systems: GSM, UMTS, CDMA, LTE-FDD, and LTE-TDD. 5.3 Importing Geographic Data You can import geographic data in various vector and grid formats and set coordinate systems. You can also add points, lines, or polygons to create vector objects.The method for importing geographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is the same. 5.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands The U-Net enables you to calculate path loss between a transmitter and a receiver based on a propagation model. Then you can use the calculated path loss matrix to perform prediction.The method for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systems on the U-Net is the same. 5.5 Adding a Device You can import or create antennas, create TMAs, feeders, or site equipment.The method for creating site equipment for different network systems on the U-Net is the same. 5.6 Setting GSM Traffic Parameters The U-Net obtains the average load of the network based on the simulation calculation of the detailed user distribution and therefore calculates various counters of the radio network. Traffic parameters refer to the parameters related to the user type, mobility, terminal, service, Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
325
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
environment, and receiving devices. They are the basic data related to user distribution. You must ensure that the traffic parameters are defined before prediction. 5.7 Setting GSM NE Parameters You can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station template to automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeaters separately. 5.8 GSM Prediction By calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage and channel quality. 5.9 GSM Neighboring Cell Planning After creating BTSs, you need to plan neighboring cells for the cells on the GSM network. You can automatically plan neighboring cells in batches or manually plan neighboring cells for each cell one by one. 5.10 Interface Reference to GSM Network Planning This section describes the interfaces and parameters for GSM network planning by using the UNet. 5.11 TSC Planning This section describes the training sequence code (TSC) planning. After a base station is created, you can plan the TSCs at a GSM site. You can use the U-Net to perform common, IBCA-based, and VAMOS-based TSC planning. 5.12 Interface Reference to TSC Parameter Planning
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
326
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
5.1 Process of GSM Network Planning This section describes the process of GSM network planning. You can refer to this section when planning a GSM network by using the U-Net. Figure 5-1 shows the process of GSM network planning. Figure 5-1 Process of GSM network planning
Table 5-1 describes the detailed information about Figure 5-1.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
327
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
Table 5-1 Process of GSM network planning No.
Procedure
Description
1
Creating a project
For details, see 5.2 Creating a Project.
2
Importing geographic data
You can import geographic data in various vector and grid formats and set coordinate systems. You can also add points, lines, or polygons to create vector objects.The method for importing geographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is the same.For details, see 3.3 Importing Geographic Data.
3
Managing propagation models and bands
The U-Net enables you to calculate path loss between a transmitter and a receiver based on a propagation model. Then you can use the calculated path loss matrix to perform prediction.The method for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systems on the U-Net is the same.For details, see 3.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands.
4
Adding a device
You can import or create antennas, create TMAs, feeders, or site equipment.The method for creating site equipment for different network systems on the U-Net is the same.For details, see 3.5 Adding a Device.
5
Setting traffic parameters
Set traffic parameters related to terminals and services, which are to be used during prediction.For details, see 5.6 Setting GSM Traffic Parameters.
6
Setting NE parameters
You can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station template to automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeaters separately.For details, see 5.7 Setting GSM NE Parameters.
7
Calculating the path loss
For details, see 3.8.2 Calculating Path Loss.
8
Planning neighboring cells
For details, see 5.9 GSM Neighboring Cell Planning .
9
Predicting network performance
For details, see 5.8 GSM Prediction.
10
Planning TSC
For details, see 5.11 TSC Planning.
11
Exporting network planning results
For details, see Prediction and Neighboring Cell Planning.
The planning results can be applied to NEs.
5.2 Creating a Project This section describes how to create a project. You can select different project templates for different network systems. The U-Net creates the project based on the selected template. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
328
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
Currently, the U-Net provides project templates for the following network systems: GSM, UMTS, CDMA, LTE-FDD, and LTE-TDD.
Context l
Only one project can run on the U-Net at a time. In normal cases, one project corresponds to the network planning for an area or a city.
l
One U-Net project may correspond to the network planning of multiple network systems. For example, a U-Net project can be created for the planning of a GSM/UMTS hybrid network.
Procedure Step 1 Choose File > New. The Project Templates dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-2. Figure 5-2 Project Templates
Step 2 Select a project template. l Different network systems correspond to different project templates. You need to select an appropriate project template based on the actual network system. l If multiple network systems are involved, you need to select the required templates. For example, If you need to create a project for a GSM/UMTS hybrid network, you need to select project templates for both the GSM and the UMTS networks. l LTE-TDD and CDMA do not support hybrid networking with other network systems. Step 3 Click OK. ----End
Follow-up Procedure l
Save a project file. Choose File > Save or click file.
to save all the information about the project in a project
You can save project files in .ipl format: .ipl or .ipl (with all data). In the former format, only NE's parameter planning configuration for the project is saved; in the latter format, all the planning calculation results are saved. The former format is selected by default. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
329
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
The U-Net automatically creates an .ipl project file and a project name.losses folder for saving the information about the path loss matrix and calculation results of capacity simulation, coverage prediction, and neighboring cell planning in the specified save path. NOTE
Based on the save format, the U-Net determines whether to add the calculation result data in the project name.losses path to the project file in .ipl format.
l
Open an existing project file. Choose File > Open to open an existing .ipl project file. NOTE
Alternatively, double-click an .ipl project file to start and open the project.
5.3 Importing Geographic Data You can import geographic data in various vector and grid formats and set coordinate systems. You can also add points, lines, or polygons to create vector objects.The method for importing geographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is the same.
Context The method for importing geographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is the same. For details, see 3.3 Importing Geographic Data.
5.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands The U-Net enables you to calculate path loss between a transmitter and a receiver based on a propagation model. Then you can use the calculated path loss matrix to perform prediction.The method for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systems on the U-Net is the same.
Context The method for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systems on the U-Net is the same. For details, see 3.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands. For details about the parameters for setting the frequency band information, see Parameters for Setting Bands.
5.5 Adding a Device You can import or create antennas, create TMAs, feeders, or site equipment.The method for creating site equipment for different network systems on the U-Net is the same.
Context The method for creating site equipment for different network systems on the U-Net is the same. For details, see 3.5 Adding a Device. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
330
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
5.6 Setting GSM Traffic Parameters The U-Net obtains the average load of the network based on the simulation calculation of the detailed user distribution and therefore calculates various counters of the radio network. Traffic parameters refer to the parameters related to the user type, mobility, terminal, service, environment, and receiving devices. They are the basic data related to user distribution. You must ensure that the traffic parameters are defined before prediction.
5.6.1 Setting MOS This section describes how to set the Mean Opinion Score (MOS). The MOS indicates the quality of calls in the current network status. You can refer to this section to modify the attributes of MOS as required. You can also create new MOS types if the existing MOS types do not meet your requirements.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > GSM. Step 3 Right-click and then choose MOS from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 5-3. The MOS Table dialog box is displayed Figure 5-3 MOS
Step 4 Set related parameters to create or modify MOS types by referring to Table 5-2. You can set the new MOS type in the blank line (marked with *) of the dialog box. Table 5-2 Description of parameters in the MOS Table dialog box
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Parameter
Meaning
Index
Indicates the MOS index. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
331
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
Parameter
Meaning
Name
Indicates the name of the speech coding scheme.
Mobility
Indicates the mobility type of a receiving device.
C/(I+N)-MOS
Indicates the signal-to-noise ratio of the MOS.
Step 5 Click OK. ----End
5.6.2 Setting GSM Service Types Set the service type such as the voice service and data service. You can modify the parameters of existing service types. If the existing service types do not meet the requirements, you can create service types.
Context The U-Net provides three default GSM service types: GSMVoice, GSMMobile Internet Access, and GSMMultimedia Messaging Service.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 Set service type parameters. Option
Description
If...
Then...
Create a service type
1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > GSM. 2. Choose New from the shortcut menu. See Figure 5-4. 3. Set parameters for the new service type by referring to Table 5-3.
Modify an existing service type 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > GSM > An existing service type. 2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. 3. Modify parameters for the existing service type by referring to Table 5-3.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
332
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
Figure 5-4 New
Table 5-3 Parameters for setting GSM services Parameter
Meaning
Name
Indicates the name of a service type.
Type
Indicates a service type. l CSServie: CS services. l PSServie: PS services.
Priority
Indicates the weighting factor based on the scheduled services. The weighting factor is assigned depending on the service priority. The value 1 indicates the lowest priority.
Body Loss(dB)
Indicates the loss due to the human body.
Activity
Indicates the uplink/downlink activation factor. This parameter is required for only CS services. l Uplink: uplink activation factor. The value ranges from 0 to 1. l Downlink: downlink activation factor. The value ranges from 0 to 1.
AMR Rate(kbit/s)
Indicates the rate of CS services. The unit is kbit/s. The values are 4.75, 5.15, 5.9, 6.7, 7.4, 7.95, 10.2, and 12.2.
FER(%)
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Indicates the frame error rate on the uplink and downlink.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
333
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
Parameter
Meaning
Max Throughput (kbit/s)
Indicates the maximum uplink/downlink throughput. l Uplink: maximum uplink throughput. The value ranges from 0 to 104. l Downlink: maximum downlink throughput. The value ranges from 0 to 104. NOTE Minimum throughput ≤ Average throughput ≤ Maximum throughput
Min Throughput (kbit/s)
Indicates the minimum uplink/downlink throughput. l Uplink: minimum uplink throughput. The value ranges from 0 to 104. l Downlink: minimum downlink throughput. The value ranges from 0 to 104. NOTE Minimum throughput ≤ Average throughput ≤ Maximum throughput
Average Throughput (kbit/s)
Indicates the average uplink/downlink throughput. l Uplink: average uplink throughput. l Downlink: average downlink throughput. NOTE Minimum throughput ≤ Average throughput ≤ Maximum throughput
Transmission Efficiency
Indicates the uplink/downlink transmission rate. l Uplink: uplink transmission rate. The value ranges from 0 to 1. l Downlink: downlink transmission rate. The value ranges from 0 to 1.
IBLER(%)
Indicates the block error rate (BLER). The value ranges from 0 to 100.
Offset(kbit/s)
Indicates the fixed uplink/downlink overhead, which is the length added to an encapsulated packet during the transmission at the MAC or RLC layer. l Uplink: fixed uplink overhead. The value ranges from 0 to 100. l Downlink: fixed downlink overhead. The value ranges from 0 to 100.
Step 3 Click OK. ----End
5.6.3 Setting GSM Receivers You can modify the parameters of existing receiver types. If the existing receiver types do not meet the requirements, you can create receiver types.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
334
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > GSM. Step 3 Choose Reception Equipment from the shortcut menu. Step 4 Set the name of a receiver. If you need to...
Then...
Create a receiver type.
Enter the name of a new receiver in a blank line (marked with *) in the dialog box. Set Link Type.
Modify an existing receiver type.
Go to Step 5 directly.
Step 5 Double-click the first column of the receiver and set property parameters in the displayed dialog box. For detailed description of parameters, see Table 5-4. Step 6 Click OK. Table 5-4 Parameters for setting GSM receivers Parameter
Meaning
Name
Indicates the name of a receiver.
LinkType
Indicates whether a receiver is on the uplink or downlink.
Mobility
Indicates the mobility type of a receiver. For details about how to create or modify a mobility type, see 3.6.7 Setting Mobility Types.
IBLER(%)
Indicates the block error rate (BLER).
Demodulation
l Indicates the demodulation threshold of PS services if this parameter is located in the PSService area. You can double-click the related cell to set this parameter. l Indicates the demodulation threshold of CS services if this parameter is located in the CSService area. You can double-click the related cell to set this parameter.
FER(%)
Indicates the frame error rate.
Voice Code Model
Indicates a voice coding scheme.
C/(I+N) Threshold
Indicates the threshold of the SINR for CS or PS services.
C/(I+N)-Throughput
Indicates the SINR throughput of CS or PS services.
----End Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
335
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
5.6.4 Setting GSM Terminal Types Set the terminal types used when a service is performed. You can modify the parameters of existing terminal types. If the existing terminal types do not meet the requirements, you can create terminal types.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 Set parameters of the terminal type. If you need to...
Then...
Create a terminal 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > type GSM. 2. Choose New from the shortcut menu. 3. Set parameters for the new terminal type by referring to Table 5-5. Modify an 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > existing terminal GSM > An existing terminal type. type 2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. 3. Modify parameters for the existing terminal type by referring to Table 5-5.
Table 5-5 Parameters for setting GSM terminal types Parameter
Meaning
Name
Indicates the name of a terminal type.
Support Frequency Band
Indicates the main frequency used by a terminal.
Min Tx Power(dBm)
Indicates the minimum transmit power of a terminal.
Max Tx Power(dBm)
Indicates the maximum transmit power of a terminal.
Noise Figure(dB)
Indicates the noise figure of a terminal.
Cable Loss(dB)
Indicates the feeder loss of a terminal.
Attenuation(dB)
Indicates the signal attenuation of a terminal.
Gain(dBi)
Indicates the antenna gain.
Reception Equipment
Indicates the type of the receiver for a terminal. For details, see 5.6.3 Setting GSM Receivers.
Number of Transmission Antennas
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Indicates the number of antennas at the transmitter for a terminal.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
336
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
Parameter
Meaning
Number of Reception Antennas
Indicates the number of antennas at the receiver for a terminal.
Code Configuration
Indicates a voice coding scheme.
Technology
Indicates the technologies supported by a terminal.
Number of TimeSlots(DL)
Indicates the maximum number of timeslots supported on the downlink. This parameter is invalid if Technology is set to GSM because a GSM user occupies only one channel.
Number of Timeslots(UL)
Indicates the maximum number of timeslots supported on the uplink. This parameter is invalid if Technology is set to GSM because a GSM user occupies only one channel.
Support Half-Rate
Indicates whether the half rate is supported.
Support DTX
Indicates whether DTX is supported.
----End
5.6.5 Setting Mobility Types This section describes how to set mobility types for terminals. You can modify the parameters of existing mobility types, such as the velocity. If the existing mobility types do not meet the requirements, you can create mobility types.
Context For networks with different modes, the U-Net sets mobility types in the same way. For details, see 3.6.7 Setting Mobility Types.
5.7 Setting GSM NE Parameters You can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station template to automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeaters separately.
5.7.1 Importing Base Station Information You can import a data file of base station to the U-Net. After that, the system automatically creates sites, cells, and transceivers according to the base station data. You can also export base station data in a project for easy viewing of site information, cell information, and transceiver information. For networks with different modes, the U-Net imports base station information in the same way.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
337
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
Context For networks with different modes, the U-Net imports site information in the same way. For details, see 3.7.1 Importing Base Station Information.
5.7.2 Creating a Single Site This section describes how to create a single site. You can create a site or modify the properties of an existing site to obtain a new one. For networks using different radio access technologies (RATs), you can use the U-Net to create a single site in the same way.
Context For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a single site in the same way. For details, see 3.7.2 Creating a Single Site.
5.7.3 Setting a GSM BTS Template This section describes how to manage base station templates. You can create base stations by using the predefined templates of the U-Net. If the predefined templates do not meet your requirements, you can customize a base station template.
Procedure l
View base station templates. 1.
dropOn the toolbar, select Template Management from the down list. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-5.
Figure 5-5 Station Template Properties
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
338
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
2.
The Available Templates area displays the currently available base station templates. Select the default template from the drop-down list next to Default. The name of the default base station template will be displayed on the toolbar of the U-Net main window. The names of other base station templates are available in the drop-down list. Such as
l
.
Create a base station template. 1.
Click Add. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed. Alternatively, click Duplicate to duplicate the selected base station template. Then, a new base station template is generated on the basis of the selected template.
l
2.
Set properties of the BTS template. For detailed description of parameters, see Parameter for Setting GSM Base Station Templates.
3.
Click OK.
View and modify properties of the base station template. 1.
Select a base station template in the Available Templates area.
2.
Click Properties. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed.
3.
Query and modify properties of the base station template. For detailed description of parameters, see Parameter for Setting GSM Base Station Templates.
4.
Click OK.
----End
Follow-up Procedure You can create base stations based on a predefined base station template or a customized base station template. When a base station template is not required, you can select the template in the Station Template Properties dialog box and then click Delete to delete it. You cannot delete the last base station template.
5.7.4 Creating a Base Station Automatically The system supports creating a single site automatically or creating a series of base stations with the same property in batches. For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a base station automatically in the same way.
Context For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a base station automatically in the same way. For details, see 3.7.4 Creating Base Stations in Batches.
5.7.5 Creating a Repeater This section describes how to create repeaters. A repeater receives, amplifies, and forwards the RF carriers launched or transmitted in the uplink and downlink. A repeater includes two sides, that is, the donor side and the serving cell side. The donor side of a repeater receives signals Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
339
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
from the donor transmitter. The signals may be carried by links of different types, such as radio links or microwave links. The serving cell side forwards the received signals. For networks of different types, the U-Net creates a repeater in the same way.
Context For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a repeater in the same way. For details, see 3.7.5 Creating Repeaters.
5.7.6 Creating a Transceiver This section describes how to create a transceiver. The U-Net combines the transceiver with cells. Before setting a cell, you must set the transceiver parameters. A transceiver supports a multi-mode network, that is, a transceiver can cover multiple cells. For networks using different radio access technologies (RATs), you can use the U-Net to create a transceiver in the same way.
Context For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a transceiver in the same way. For details, see 3.7.6 Creating a Transceiver.
5.7.7 Setting GSM Cell Parameters This section describes how to set LTE-FDD cell parameters. After a transceiver is set, the UNet automatically assigns a cell to the transceiver. After setting transceiver parameters, you can set cell parameters.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver > Sitex_x. Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. See Figure 5-6. Figure 5-6 Properties
Step 4 Set the properties of GSM cells on the GSMTRX tab page. For detailed description of parameters, see Parameters for Setting the Parameters of GSM Cells. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
340
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
Step 5 Click OK. ----End
5.7.8 Interface Reference for Setting GSM NE Parameters This section describes the parameters for setting GSM NE parameters by using the U-Net.
Parameter for Setting GSM Base Station Templates This section describes the parameters for creating base station templates or modifying the properties of base station templates. You can refer to this section when managing base station templates in the Station Template Properties dialog box.
Site Tab Page Parameter
Description
Name
Indicates the name of a base station template.
Support Type
Indicates the base station type. Macro indicates a macro base station, and Micro indicates a micro base station.
Use Altitude For Calculation
Indicates whether to manually enter the altitude of a site for calculation. If this option is selected, you manually enter the altitude of a site for calculation.
Hexagon Radius
Indicates the radius of a cell.
Comments
Description.
Transceiver Area on the GSM Tab Page
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Parameter
Description
Transceivers
Indicates the number of transceivers in a site.
Comments
Description.
Model
Indicates the type of the antenna on the transceiver.
Site Equipment
Indicates the site equipment.
First Sector Azimuth
Indicates the azimuth of the first antenna.
Mechanical Downtilt
Indicates the mechanical downtilt.
Electrical Downtilt
Indicates the electrical downtilt.
Height/Ground(m)
Indicates the height of an antenna.
Total Loss(DL)
Indicates the total downlink loss.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
341
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
Parameter
Description
Total Loss(UL)
Indicates the total uplink loss.
General Tab in the Cell Area on the GSM Tab Page Parameter
Description
Max Power(dBm)
Indicates the maximum transmit power.
IoT Target(UL)
Indicates the target Interfere Over Thermal (IoT) on the uplink.
DTX
Indicates whether the discontinuous transmission (DTX) is used.
TRX Power(dBm)
Indicates the transmit power of a TRX.
Target Load(DL)
Indicates the target load on the downlink. The value range is from 0 to 1.
Target Load(UL)
Indicates the target load on the uplink. The value range is from 0 to 1.
Frequency Band
Indicates a frequency band.
Reception
Indicates a receiver.
Propagation Models Tab in the Cell Area on the GSM Tab Page Parameter
Description
Propagation Model
Indicates a propagation model. l When the parameter is present in the Main Matrix area, it indicates the main propagation model. l When the parameter is present in the Extended Matrix area, it indicates the extended propagation model.
Radius(m)
Indicates the calculation radius of a propagation model.
Resolution(m)
Indicates the calculation resolution of a propagation model.
Parameters for Setting the Parameters of GSM Cells This section describes the parameters for creating a GSM cell or modifying the properties of a GSM cell.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
342
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
Table 5-6 GSMCell tab page Parameter
Description
Name
Indicates the name of a cell.
Active
Indicates whether to activate the current cell.
Frequency Band
Indicates a frequency band.
Target Load(DL)
Indicates the target load in the downlink. The value ranges from 0 to 1.
Target Load(UL)
Indicates the target load in the uplink. The value ranges from 0 to 1.
DTX
Indicates whether discontinuous transmission (DTX) is used.
IoT Target(UL)
Indicates the target Interfere Over Thermal (IoT) in the uplink.
Max Power(dBm)
Indicates the maximum transmit power of a transceiver. When the value of Max Power(dBm), Frequency Band, or PB(dB) is changed, the system automatically calculates the value of RS Power (dBm).
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
MS Max Power(dBm)
Indicates the maximum transmit power of an MS. The unit is dBm.
Reception
Indicates a receiver.
SynchroRank
Indicates the synchronization parameter.
TRX Power(dBm)
Indicates the transmit power of a TRX.
Coverage Type
Indicates the cell coverage type used during capacity planning.
Co-BCCH Signal Difference
Indicates the signal strength difference between GSM900 and GSM1800.
Mapping Cell
Indicates the indoor mapping cell.
Use In Capability
Indicates whether the cell is used for capacity absorption.
Scene
Indicates the scenario of a cell.
MCC
Indicates the mobile country code (MCC).
MNC
Indicates the mobile network code (MNC).
LAC
Indicates a location area code.
CI
Indicates the ID of a cell.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
343
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
Parameter
Description
CGI
Indicates the cell global identification (CGI).
RAC
Indicates the routing area code (RAC).
BSC ID
Indicates the ID of the BSC that a cell belongs to.
BTS ID
Indicates the ID of the BTS that a cell belongs to.
Local Cell ID
Indicates the internal code of a cell for differentiating the cell from other cells under the same BSC.
BSC Name
Indicates the name of a base station controller (BSC).
Module Type
Indicates the type of a module.
Module Info
Indicates the module information.
TRX Number
Indicates the number of TRXs.
Max TRX Number
Indicates the number of TRXs that can be configured in a cell.
Status
Indicates the swapping status. l NONE: Indicates there is no cell in swapping state. l NEW: Indicates a new cell. l EXISTED: Indicates a live network cell. The default value is NONE.
Hopping Mode
Indicates the hopping mode of a cell. This parameter can be set to one of the following values: l NO_FH l BaseBand_FH l Hybrid_FH l RF_FH
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Frame Offset
Indicates the frame offset.
BSIC
Indicates the base transceiver station identity code (BSIC).
BCCH
Indicates the absolute radio frequency channel number (ARFCN) of the BCCH TRX in a cell.
TCH
Indicates the collection of ARFCNs of the TCH TRXs in a cell.
MAIO
Indicates the collection of mobile allocation index offsets (MAIOs) of TRXs in a cell.
AFPFreqNum
Indicates the number of GSM TRXs generated by one row of data when users import the engineering parameters.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
344
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
Parameter
Description
HSN
Indicates the hopping sequence number (HSN) of a cell. The value range is from 0 to 63.
MA
Indicates the collection of frequency hopping ARFCNs.
MAIO Plan
Indicates the MAIO planning information.
TSC
Indicates the training sequence code (TSC).
VAMOS Main TSC
Indicates the primary training sequence code for VAMOS.
VAMOS Sub TSC
Indicates the secondary training sequence code for VAMOS.
Vendor
Indicates the device manufacturer.
Comments
Description.
Propagation Models
Indicates a propagation model.
Table 5-7 Parameters on the General tab page Parameter
Description
Name
Name of a transceiver. This parameter uniquely identifies a transceiver.
Site
Name of the site that a transceiver belongs to. You can click New to create a site.
Hexagon Radius(m)
Radius of the hexagon indicating the cell coverage. The value ranges from 1 to 100000. l If a transceiver is directly added in the main window, the radius of the hexagon is the value of Hexagon Radius (m) in the current site template by default. l If a transceiver is added under the Transceiver node in the navigation tree, the value of this parameter is empty by default.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Transmission in the Number of Antennas area
Number of transmission antennas on a base station.
Reception in the Number of Antennas area
Number of receive antennas on a base station.
Transmission in the Number of Antenna Ports area
Number of transmission antenna ports.
Comments
Comments on a transceiver.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
345
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
Table 5-8 Parameters on the Antenna Config tab page Parameter
Description
Antenna ID
ID of an antenna for a transceiver. The ID of each antenna must be unique for a transceiver.
Power Ratio
Power allocation ratio. The value ranges from 0 to 1.
Sector ID
ID of a sector. This parameter uniquely identifies an antenna.
Dx(m)
Offset of the antenna relative to the site that the antenna belongs to in the X direction. The unit is meter.
Dy(m)
Offset of the antenna relative to the site that the antenna belongs to in the Y direction. The unit is meter.
Longitude
Longitude of an antenna.
Latitude
Latitude of an antenna.
Main Antenna
Main antenna of a transceiver. Each cell has only one main antenna.
Azimuth
Antenna azimuth. The value ranges from 0 to 360. The unit is degree.
Antenna
Type of an antenna. The default value is determined based on the configuration of the system antennas. In normal cases, the default antenna type is the type of the first antenna.
Mechanical Downtilt
Mechanical downtilt of an antenna. The unit is degree.
Electrical Downtilt
Electrical downtilt of an antenna. The unit is degree.
Height(m)
Height of an antenna. The unit is meter.
RRU ID
l ID of a remote radio unit (RRU). l The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 0. l If the value of RRU ID differs among the antennas for a transceiver, the cell served by the transceiver is a single frequency network (SFN) cell. In this case, you can configure only one cell for this transceiver.
Equipment
Equipment properties. For details, see Table 5-9.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
346
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
Table 5-9 Parameters in the Equipment Configuration dialog box Parameter
Description
Input Total Loss
l If you select the check box, you need to manually type the total loss. l If you clear the check box, the U-Net calculates the total loss.
Site Equipment TMA
Indicates the site equipment. Tower-mounted amplifier (TMA). You can click modify its properties.
Feeder
Antenna feeder. You can click
to
to modify its properties.
Feeder Length(m)
Length of a feeder. You need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
Miscellaneous Loss(dB)
Miscellaneous loss. You need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
JumpLoss Ant-TMA(dB)
Jumper loss between the TMA and the antenna port. You need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
JumpLoss Ant-BS(dB)
Jumper loss between the top of cabinet and the antenna port. You need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
JumpLoss TMA-BS(dB)
Jumper loss between the TMA and the top of cabinet. You need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
Total Loss(dB)
Total loss, including the TMA, feeder, jumper, and miscellaneous loss. You need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
5.8 GSM Prediction By calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage and channel quality.
5.8.1 Basic Knowledge of GSM Prediction This chapter describes the basic knowledge of prediction, including the formula for calculating link loss, method for determining the calculation area, meaning of prediction counters, and prediction algorithm. You can develop a better understanding of the prediction function by learning the basic knowledge.
Basic Knowledge of GSM Prediction Counters This section describes the meanings of the GSM prediction counters. The U-Net can be used to predict multiple GSM counters. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
347
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning NOTE
Certain counters are not displayed by default. To enable the U-Net to display these counters, select the corresponding network technology, right-click a counter type and then choose More Coverage from the shortcut menu.
Table 5-10 lists the GSM prediction counters supported by the U-Net. Table 5-10 Description of GSM prediction counters Category
Counter
Description
Coverage by Signal Level (DL)
DL BCCH Signal Level
Indicates the strength of the downlink BCCH signals received by a terminal.
Best Server
Indicates the cell that has the strongest DL BCCH signal strength among the cells that receive downlink signals.
DL TCH Signal Level
Indicates the strength of the downlink traffic signals received by a terminal.
DL BCCH CIR
Indicates the quality of received downlink BCCH signals.
DL Service CIR
Indicates the receive quality of the downlink TCH/ PDCH.
Geometry
Indicates a geographical factor, which represents the difference between the highest receive power and the interference power.
Coverage by C/(I+N) Level(UL)
UL Service CIR
Indicates the receive quality of the uplink TCH/ PDCH.
Coverage Area Analysis
Coding Scheme
Indicates the best coding scheme that you can select according to channels.
MOS
Indicates the mean opinion score (MOS), which is used for assessing voice quality.
Handover Area
Indicates whether an area is a handover area.
Coverage Area
Indicates the coverage area of the current network.
Coverage by Throughput (DL)
DL PDCH MAC Peak Throughput
Indicates the peak throughput of the downlink PDCH at the MAClayer.
DL PDCH Application Peak Throughput
Indicates the peak throughput of the downlink PDCH at the application layer.
Coverage by Throughput (UL)
UL PDCH MAC Peak Throughput
Indicates the peak throughput of the uplink PDCH at the MAC layer.
Coverage by C/(I+N) Level(DL)
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
348
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
Category
Counter
Description
UL PDCH Application Peak Throughput
Indicates the peak throughput of the uplink PDCH at the application layer.
Procedure for Performing Coverage Prediction This section describes the procedure for performing prediction through the U-Net. Figure 5-7 shows the procedure for performing prediction through the U-Net. Figure 5-7 Procedure of prediction
GSM Prediction Algorithm By calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage and channel quality. This section describes the GSM prediction algorithm through a schematic chart. Figure 5-8 shows the schematic chart of the GSM prediction algorithm. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
349
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
Figure 5-8 GSM prediction algorithm
Table 5-11 describes the process of GSM prediction algorithm. Table 5-11 Description of the GSM prediction algorithm
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Procedur e
Operation
Description
1
Traversing all the cells
Determines whether the cells in the calculation area are activated. If a cell is not activated, the prediction counters of this cell are not calculated.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
350
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
Procedur e
Operation
Description
2
Obtaining the path loss matrix
l If the path loss matrix does not exist, it needs to be calculated. l If the path loss matrix already exists, it can be directly obtained.
3
Querying the antenna gain, equipment loss, and penetration loss
You can enable the U-Net to consider the antenna gain, equipment loss, and penetration loss during the calculation of link loss.
4
Predicting slow fading by using the shadow fading margin
To ensure that a base station can cover cell edges with a certain probability, certain power of the base station is reserved against the shadow fading. The reserved power is called shadowing margin. You can enable the U-Net to consider the shadowing margin during the calculation of link loss.
5
Calculating the DL BCCH to determine the primary serving cell
DL BCCH indicates the receive level of the downlink broadcast frequency and it is a key counter in prediction. You can determine the primary serving cell based on this counter.
6
Calculating the power of interference noises to determine the handover area
You can calculate the power of interference noises and determine the handover area.
7
Calculating counters of traffic channels and common channels based on the Bin points
You can calculate the required counters and custom counters such as DL BCCH Rx Power, Best Server, power of interference noises, and handover area of Bin points.
8
Displaying prediction results
The U-Net displays the prediction results in different colors in a window and provides a prediction report.
Basic Knowledge of Link Loss Link loss refers to the loss on the entire link from the transmitter to the receiver. When calculating link loss, the U-Net considers various loss factors such as path loss, equipment loss, and shadow fading. Loss factors of the uplink are different from loss factors of the downlink. The formulas for calculating uplink loss and downlink loss are as follows: l
Uplink loss = Loss caused by the human body + Feeder loss of the terminal - Antenna gain of the terminal + Antenna attenuation of the terminal + Path loss + Shadow fading + Penetration loss - Antenna gain of the base station + Total loss of the base station
l
Downlink loss = Loss caused by the human body + Feeder loss of the terminal - Antenna gain of the terminal + Antenna attenuation of the terminal + Path loss + Shadow fading + Penetration loss - Antenna gain of the base station + Total loss of the base station
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
351
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
The difference between the two formulas are as follows: The uplink has TMA gains which are included into the antenna gain of the base station in calculation. The downlink has TMA loss which is included into the total loss of the base station. Table 5-12 describes the meanings of factors in the formulas. Table 5-12 Meanings of factors in the formulas Factor
Meaning
Loss caused by the human body
Loss of transmit or receive power of the mobile station (MS) due to the shielding or absorption of the human body.
Feeder loss of a terminal
Loss of the feeder on a terminal.
Antenna gain of a terminal
Gain of the antenna on a terminal.
Antenna fading of a terminal
Fading of the antenna on a terminal.
Path loss
Loss on the path between the transmit antenna and the receive antenna, which excludes the antenna gain and shadow fading.
Shadow fading
When an electromagnetic wave is blocked by fluctuant terrains, buildings, or vegetation areas in the propagation path, the shadow of the magnetic field exits. When an MS travels through the shadow of different barriers, the received signal strength decreases, and the field strength at the receiving antenna changes. In this case, fading is generated. This fading is called shadow fading.
Penetration loss
Loss that is caused when signals travel through buildings, vehicles, and leaves.
Antenna gain of a base station
Gain of the antenna on a base station.
Total loss of the base station
Power loss that is caused when signals travel through all the TMAs, feeders (including the main feeder, jumpers, and lightning arresters), and connectors
5.8.2 Calculating Path Loss The path loss refers to the loss of strength of signals transmitted from a TX end to an RX end. You must calculate the path loss because it is an input required for prediction. The U-Net automatically calculates the path loss and generates a .loss file for each cell. Alternatively, you can manually calculate the path loss before performing the prediction. This section describes how to manually calculate the path loss.
Prerequisites l Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Base stations (sites and cells) are available. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
352
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
l
Propagation models are assigned to cells.
Context You can manually calculate the path loss in calculation or force calculation mode. l
Calculation – If you calculate the path loss for the first time, that is, if no path loss matrix file is available, the U-Net calculates the path loss matrix of each cell. Afterwards, the U-Net checks the validity of calculation results and updates the results. – If path loss matrices are available but the parameters related to radio data and calculation area are modified, the path loss matrices of some cells may become invalid. In this case, the U-Net calculates only these invalid path loss matrices again.
l
Force calculation If path loss matrices are available, the U-Net deletes all the matrices regardless of the validity and calculates the path loss matrix of each cell again. Afterwards, the U-Net checks the validity of calculation results and updates the results.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver. Step 3 Select a calculation mode to calculate the path loss of all cells on the Transceiver node. If you need to...
Then...
Calculate
Right-click and choose Calculation > Calculate Path Loss Matrices from the shortcut menu.
Calculate forcibly
Right-click and choose Calculation > Force Calculate Path Loss Matrices from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 If you have not saved the project file, save it as prompted. The U-Net automatically creates a Project Name.losses folder that saves the information about the path loss matrix and an .ipl project file in the specified save path. Afterwards, the U-Net starts calculating the path loss. Step 5 Query the calculation results After the calculation is complete, the calculation results will be automatically saved in the Project Name.losses folder that saves the project file. Click
to stop ongoing calculations.
Step 6 Optional: Check the progress of path loss calculation In the Event Viewer docked window, query the start time and end time of path loss on the Event Viewer tab page and the progress of the path loss calculation on the Task tab page, as shown in Figure 5-9. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
353
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
Figure 5-9 Event Viewer
----End
Follow-up Procedure The MCL with the default value of 70 dB indicates the minimum path loss between the base station and the terminal or between one terminal and another terminal. If you want to change the default value of the MCL, modify the LinkLossConfig.xml file in the U-Net installation directory.
5.8.3 Setting Shadow Fading Standard Deviation During the network prediction, the standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be set for certain prediction counters.
Context l
In the LTE-FDD network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be set for the following predication counters: DL RS SINR, DL RSRQ, Geometry, PBCH SINR, PCFICH SINR, PDCCH SINR, PRACH SINR, PUCCH SINR, SCH SINR, PDSCH SINR, PUSCH SINR, PHICH SINR, and UL RS SINR.
l
In the LTE-TDD network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be set for the following predication counters: DL RS SINR, DL RSRQ, PDCCH SINR, PDSCH SINR, PUSCH SINR, UL RS SINR.
l
In the GSM network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be set for the following predication counters: Geometry, DL BCCH CIR, DL Service CIR, and UL Service CIR.
l
In the UMTS network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be set for the following predication counters: CPICH Ec/Io, DL DPCH Eb/Nt, HS PDSCH Ec/Nt, UL DPCH Eb/Nt, and E DPDCH Ec/ Nt.
l
In the GSM/UMTS network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be set for the following predication counters: Coverage By CIR.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
354
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Map > Clutter. Step 3 Choose Parameter Management from the shortcut menu. The Clutter Parameters Display dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Perform the following operations as required. If ...
Then ...
The map information is not imported
Click Default Value to change the default values of parameters under Model Standard Deviation and C/(I + N) Standard Deviation.
The map information is imported
Click Actual Value to change the actual values of parameters under Model Standard Deviation and C/(I + N) Standard Deviation.
NOTE
For the meanings of parameters under Model Standard Deviation and C/(I + N) Standard Deviation, see Parameters for Setting the Clutter Class Layer.
Step 5 Click OK. ----End
5.8.4 Creating a GSM Prediction Group The U-Net calculates the prediction as per prediction group. Each prediction group consists of one or more prediction items. You can create prediction groups and modify the properties.
Prerequisites l
A U-Net project is already created.
l
The geographic data is imported.
l
The calculation area is created. For details about calculation area knowledge and the method for creating a calculation area, see 3.3.9 Creating Vector Objects.
Procedure Step 1 Optional: Setting common properties for prediction groups. Before creating coverage prediction groups, you need to set common properties for prediction groups so that new prediction groups have the common properties. 1.
In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Predictions.
3.
Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
355
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
4.
In the displayed dialog box, set the precision of prediction on the Predictions tab page. You are advised to set the precision of prediction to be the same as that of the propagation model.
5.
Set the height of receiver on the Receiver tab page.
6.
Click OK.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Predictions. Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu. See Figure 5-10. Figure 5-10 New
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, set prediction group name, whether to calculate immediately, and select prediction counters.For indicator description, see Basic Knowledge of GSM Prediction Counters. Step 5 Click Next. Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, set the prediction group properties.For parameter description, see 5.10.1 Parameters for Creating GSM Prediction Groups. Step 7 Click OK. Step 8 Optional: If you deselect Calculate Now in creating prediction groups, right-click the prediction group, and then choose Calculate from the shortcut menu after creating a prediction group. ----End
Follow-up Procedure After the prediction calculation is complete, you can recalculate KPIs, add or delete KPIs, and view detailed KPI result reports. For details, see 3.8.6 Managing the Prediction Result.
5.8.5 Viewing the Prediction Result You can view the prediction result in the map window or view the statistics on various indicators by using the PDF or CDF diagram.
Procedure l
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
View a prediction result in the map window. For details, see Querying Prediction Statistical Results (on a Map). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
356
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
l
View a prediction result by using the PDF or CDF diagram. For details, see Viewing Coverage Prediction Statistical Results (in a PDF/CDF Chart).
----End
5.8.6 Analyzing Prediction Results The U-Net supports the function of comparing similar predictions to identify the differences. This helps you to quickly know the impact of changes on the network.
Procedure Step 1 Create and calculate a prediction group. Step 2 View the prediction result and check whether any counter needs to be optimized. Step 3 Adjust the setting of the counter that needs to be optimized to improve the coverage. Step 4 Duplicate the prediction group. 1.
In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > first prediction group.
3.
Choose Duplicate from the shortcut menu.
Step 5 Calculate the duplicate prediction group. 1.
In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > copied prediction group.
2.
Choose Calculate from the shortcut menu.
Step 6 Compare the original prediction result and the new prediction result. 1.
In the navigation tree, choose Predictions.
2.
Choose Compare from the shortcut menu. The CDF Compare window is displayed.
3.
Select the counters from the drop-down list on the left. NOTE
l Coverage Area: The area that is actually covered by the counters. It is the area rendered by colors on the map window. l Calculate Area: The Polygon area that you select when creating a new prediction group
4.
Select the prediction groups from the pane on the left and the corresponding display colors.
5.
View the CDF comparison chart in the pane on the right.
----End
Example This section takes the antenna downtilt as an example to describe the function of comparison. The coverage of a cell in a prediction group is not good. Based on the analysis, the antenna downtilt may be improperly set. Perform the following steps to adjust the antenna downtilt. 1.
In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver > Sitex_x.
3.
Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
4.
Click Antenna Config tab Page.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
357
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
5.
Modify the value of Mechanical Downtilt or Electrical Downtilt.
After the downtilt is adjusted, you can recalculate the prediction group but cannot compare the two coverage predictions, that is, the prediction before and the prediction after the adjustment. Therefore, duplicate the existing prediction group before the recalculation. After the recalculation, you can view the coverage change in the map window. To know the detailed change, compare the change of counters by referring to Step 6.
Follow-up Procedure l
To save the CDF comparison chart, right-click the chart and choose Save Image As from the shortcut menu. The chart can be saved in .emf, .png, .gif, .jpg, .tif, or .bmp format.
l
To print the CDF comparison chart, right-click the chart and choose Print from the shortcut menu.
l
To copy the CDF comparison chart, right-click the chart and choose Copy from the shortcut menu.
5.8.7 Exporting GSM Planning Results You can export and print prediction results in batches or export the detailed prediction result by Bin point.
Exporting Prediction Results in Batches After the prediction calculation is complete, you can select one or more counters and then export a statistical report on the prediction as a .csv file and a prediction map in .mif or .jpg format.
Context The method for exporting statistics for prediction results in batches for different network systems from the U-Net is the same. For details, see Exporting Prediction Results in Batches.
Exporting the Detailed GSM Prediction Result by Bin Point After the prediction calculation is complete, you can export detailed prediction results of the Bin points in a specified area. The prediction results include the information about the longitudinal and latitudinal coordinates and counter values of the Bin points.
Procedure l
Export the detailed prediction results of Bin points according to the specified area. You can specify a calculation area and export the detailed prediction results of all Bin points in this area.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
1.
In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2.
Select the objects to be exported. If...
Then...
Export the detailed prediction results of a prediction group
In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
358
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
l
If...
Then...
Export the detailed prediction results of a single counter in a prediction group
In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx > counter item.
3.
Choose Export BIN By > Polygon from the shortcut menu.
4.
In the displayed dialog box, select the area to be exported.
5.
Click Export.
Export the detailed result of a Bin point by pilot power. This function is applicable only to single-mode networks. You can specify the value range of the pilot power to export only the detailed result of a Bin point within the range. 1.
In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2.
Select the objects to be exported. If...
Then...
Export the detailed prediction results of a prediction group
In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx.
Export the detailed prediction results of a single counter in a prediction group
In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx > DL BCCH Signal Level or DL TCH Signal Level.
NOTE
You can also set interval values in the properties of each preceding indicator.
3.
Choose Export BIN By > DL BCCH Signal Level or DL TCH Signal Level from the shortcut menu. – When you perform prediction calculation, select at least one of the preceding two indicators. Otherwise, you cannot export the result of a Bin point by pilot power. – The dialog box displayed lists the value segments of the selected KPI, the coverage area of the selected value segment, the percentage of the coverage area, and the cumulative percentage of the coverage area.
4.
In the displayed dialog box, set the value range of the indicator. The U-Net exports only the detailed prediction result of a Bin point within the specified range.
5. l
Export the top N records of the reception levels in each Bin point. This function is applicable only to single-mode networks. 1.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Click Export.
In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
359
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx > DL BCCH Signal Level.
3.
Choose Export BIN By > Top Signal Level from the shortcut menu.The dialog box as shown in Figure 5-11 is displayed.
4.
Set the minimum exported value and the maximum reception level for the top N records to be exported.
5.
Click Export.
6.
After setting the export path, file name, and file format, export the data. NOTE
l To implement this function successfully, the selected indicators must include DL BCCH Signal Level when you create a prediction project, as shown in Figure 5-12. l To export multiple maximum reception levels in a Bin point, you need to set the value of TopNSignalLevel when creating a prediction project, as shown in Figure 5-13. This value specifies the number of top records for which the maximum reception level is calculated.
Figure 5-11 Export By Top Signal Level dialog box
Figure 5-12 Indicator selection
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
360
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
Figure 5-13 Property setting
----End
Follow-up Procedure You can navigate to the export path to view the exported contents. The exported contents mainly include: l
X-coordinate and Y-coordinate: If no geographic data is imported, the geodetic coordinates are exported.
l
Indicator values: It refers to the values of the selected indicators.
Printing Prediction Results in Batches After the prediction calculation is complete, you can print the prediction results of counters in batches. The results include prediction chart, geographic data, and base station data.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
361
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
Context The method for printing prediction results in batches for different network systems on the UNet is the same. For details, see Printing Prediction Results in Batches.
5.8.8 Verifying the Feature Database Based on DT Data The DT data can be used to rectify the coverage prediction group after its calculation is complete in order to improve the origin authentication and simulation degree of feature database. This helps to improve the locating precision. The rectification is not required if DT data is unavailable, and this procedure can be ignored.
Prerequisites l
The base station information involving the site, transceiver, and cell has been imported or created.
l
The coverage prediction for DL BCCH Signal Level is complete.
l
The DT data file has been imported.
Context The method of rectifying the DT feature database in UMTS is similar to that in LTE-FDD. For detailed operations, see 3.8.10 Verifying the Feature Database Based on DT Data.
5.8.9 Exporting the Feature Database Data You can export the feature database data after the prediction calculation is complete for geographical locating.
Context For detailed operations of exporting the feature database in GSM, see Export the top N records of the reception levels in each Bin point in Exporting the Detailed GSM Prediction Result by Bin Point.
5.9 GSM Neighboring Cell Planning After creating BTSs, you need to plan neighboring cells for the cells on the GSM network. You can automatically plan neighboring cells in batches or manually plan neighboring cells for each cell one by one.
5.9.1 Basic Knowledge of Neighboring Cell Planning This section describes basic knowledge of neighboring cell planning. Proper neighbor relationships ensure that a UE at the edge of a serving cell can be handed over in time and that the handover gain is obtained. This helps to reduce intra-RAT interference, improve the QoS of the network, and ensure stable network performance. The purpose of neighboring cell planning is to properly configure neighbor relationships during the construction or expansion of a network. Planning neighboring cells is mandatory during initial construction of a network. Whether neighboring cells are properly planned has direct impacts on the network performance. Traditionally, neighboring cells are manually planned, which features low work efficiency. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
362
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
Currently, neighboring cells are automatically planned, which greatly improves work efficiency, reduces network construction cost, and accelerates network construction. Manual adjustments to the results of automatic planning can be made based on the actual situation. The U-Net provides the function of automatically planning neighboring cells. It supports neighboring cell planning for special scenarios that require repeaters or remote RF units. These features of U-Net ensure reliable planning results. The U-Net determines the neighbor relationships of a serving cell from the following aspects: l
If a cell is covered by the same base station as the serving cell, it is considered as a neighboring cell of the serving cell.
l
If a cell in the candidate neighboring cells has the highest score, it is considered as a neighboring cell of the serving cell.
l
The existing neighboring cell relationships are not changed.
l
Whether a cell is configured as a neighboring cell of the serving cell to ensure bidirectional neighbor relationship.
The U-Net provides the following neighboring cell planning algorithms: l
Topology: algorithm based on topology
l
Prediction: algorithm based on coverage prediction
l
Topology + Prediction: algorithm based on topology and coverage prediction The U-Net determines neighboring cells using the algorithm based on coverage prediction. If the neighbor relationships between the serving cell and some cells cannot be determined according to the algorithm based on coverage prediction, the U-Net determines neighboring cells using the algorithm based on topology.
Take UMTS as an example, neighboring cell planning and optimization of U-Net applies to the following scenarios: l
6.9.3 Initial Neighboring Cell Planning for a New Network
l
6.9.4 Neighboring Cell Replanning for a Partially Expanded Network
l
6.9.5 Replanning of Neighboring Cells from 2G Network to 3G Network
l
6.9.6 Checking and Optimizing Neighboring Cell Configuration NOTE
For CDMA networks, the U-Net supports only the algorithm based on topology for planning neighboring cells.
5.9.2 Importing Neighboring Relations This section describes how to import neighbor relationships. The U-Net provides the function of importing neighbor relationships, through which the existing neighbor relationships on the network can be imported into the U-Net. This helps to plan neighboring cells according to the actual situation of the network.
Prerequisites l
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Base station information has been created or imported, including sites, transceivers, and cells. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
363
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
l
The neighbor relationships to be imported must be collected into a neighbor relationship template. You can obtain the neighbor relationship template by exporting neighbor relationships.
l
Neighbor relationships of an LTE-FDD or LTE-TDD network are matched by the cell name.
l
Neighbor relationships of a GSM network are matched by cell name, LAC, and CI.
l
Neighbor relationships of a UMTS network are matched by cell name, RNC ID, and CI.
l
Neighbor relationships of a CDMA network are matched by MSC ID, BSC ID, BTS ID, Cell ID, Sector ID, ARFCN, and BNDCLS.
l
Neighbor relationships of a multi-mode network must be imported separately by network technology.
Context
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose neighbor planning > RAT. Step 3 Choose Import Neighbor Relations from the shortcut menu. The Import Neighbor Relations dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Select Update Blind Handover Flag as required. If Update Blind Handover Flag is selected, blind handover flags of cells are updated when the neighbor relationships are imported. NOTE
Update Blind Handover Flag is unavailable in GSM/CDMA, and therefore you do not need to select it.
Step 5 Click Browse to choose a neighbor relationship file. Step 6 Click OK. ----End
5.9.3 Planning GSM Neighboring Cells The U-Net provides the function of automatically planning neighboring cells. You can enable the U-Net to configure neighboring relationships for each cell automatically to reduce handover problems resulting from inappropriate neighboring cell configuration.
Prerequisites l
Base station information has been created or imported, including sites, transceivers, and cells.
l
In the case of capacity expansion, the existing neighboring relationships have been imported into the U-Net.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
364
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > GSM. Step 3 Choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu. See Figure 5-14. Figure 5-14 Neighbor Automatic Allocation
Step 4 Set planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For details about the parameters, see 5.10.2 Parameters for Planning GSM Neighboring Cells. Step 5 Click Run. After the planning is complete, the planning results are displayed in the lower pane of the U-Net main window. For details about the parameters, see 5.10.5 Parameters for Viewing Neighboring Cell Planning Results. ----End
Follow-up Procedure l
l
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Set the mode and colors for displaying neighboring relationships in the map window. 1.
In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > GSM.
3.
Choose Display Option from the shortcut menu.
4.
In the displayed dialog box, set the mode and colors for displaying neighboring relationships in the map window. For details about the parameters, see 5.10.3 Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of Neighboring Cells.
5.
Click OK.
Export the other vendors' neighboring cell planning results. 1.
In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > GSM.
3.
Right-click and choose Export Other Vendor's Neighbor Relations > file export format from the shortcut menu.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
365
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning NOTE
The file can be saved in .xls or .xlsx format. For the other vendors' neighboring cell planning results, U-Net exports one file for each vendor to the specified directory.
5.9.4 Managing the Result of Neighboring Cell Planning This section describes how to manage the result of neighboring cell planning. After the planning is complete, you can view, filter, remove the filter effect on, audit, export, and modify neighboring cell relationships of all the cells in the network.
Prerequisites The neighboring cell planning is complete.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose neighbor planning > RAT. NOTE
You need to select the check box of RAT in the navigation tree so that neighboring cell relationships can be displayed in the map window.
Step 3 Choose Open Neighbor Relations from the shortcut menu. Step 4 Perform the following operations as required. If you need to...
Then...
View neighboring cell relationships
In the main window of the U-Net, click a cell in the Cell Name area. Alternatively, click a certain cell in the map window, as shown in Figure 5-15. The neighboring cell relationships of the selected cell are displayed in the table in the Cell Name area and in the map window simultaneously.
Filter neighboring cells
1. In the Cell Name area of the main window, Choose Filter from the shortcut menu.. 2. Set filter criteria in the displayed dialog box. For details, see 5.10.4 Parameters for Setting the Audit and Filter Conditions Based on Neighboring Relations. 3. Select the box in front of Highlighted on Geographic. The filtered cells are displayed in green in the map window, as shown in Figure 5-16. NOTE If you select the None option in the Filter dialog box, the color of filtered cells in the map window is cleared.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
366
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
If you need to...
Then...
Remove the filter effect on neighboring cells
Right-click in the Cell Name area of the main window and choose Remove Filter from the shortcut menu. The table in the Cell area switches back to the state when no filter criterion is used, and the color of filtered cells in the map window is cleared. NOTE Remove Filter is available only after filter criteria are used.
Audit neighboring cell relationships
1. In the Cell Name area of the main window, right-click the table and choose Statistic from the shortcut menu. 2. Set audit conditions in the displayed dialog box. For details, see 5.10.4 Parameters for Setting the Audit and Filter Conditions Based on Neighboring Relations. 3. Click OK. The check report is exported to an XLS file. The exported file contains multiple sheets, and each sheet shows the result that meets certain audit conditions.
Export the result of neighboring cell planning
1. In the Cell Name area of the main window, Choose Export from the shortcut menu.. 2. In the displayed Export Neighbor dialog box, select an export mode. l Incremental Export: Export only the changed neighboring cell relationships. l Full Export: Export all neighboring cell relationships. 3. Click Export. NOTE In the exported file of neighboring cell relationships, you can refer to the values in the CellPCI and NeighborCellPCI columns for the LTE network when creating MML scripts.
Delete neighboring cell relationships
1. In the Cell Name area of the main window, select a cell whose neighboring cell relationships need to be adjusted. 2. Clear the check box for the selected cell in the Confirm column of the table in the right pane.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
367
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
If you need to...
Then...
Modify neighboring cell relationships
1. Select a source cell on the map. 2. Hold down Ctrl and click the cells except the source cell to add or delete unidirectional neighboring cell relationships. 3. Hold down Shift and click the cells except the source cell to add or delete bidirectional neighboring cell relationships. NOTE l If an added or deleted neighboring cell relationship is the same as an existing one, the check box for the selected cell in the Confirm column of the table in the right pane is automatically selected or cleared. l If an added neighboring cell relationship is different from the existing ones, the neighboring cell relationship is added to the neighboring cell list and the value of Cause for the cell is force in the Cause column. l If the number of neighboring cells for a cell reaches the maximum number, a confirmation dialog box is displayed when more neighboring cells are added. You can click Yes to add these neighboring cells, or click No to cancel the operation.
Export the X2 interface relationship data
This function is available only for the LTE-FDD network. The X2 interface relationship data can be exported only after the planning result is applied to each cell. 1. In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > LTE. 2. Right-click and choose Export X2 Relations from the shortcut menu. The Export X2 Relations dialog box is displayed. 3. In the Area area, set the area whose X2 interface relationship data needs to be exported. 4. Specify an export path. 5. Click OK.
Clear the result of neighboring cell planning
1. Right-click in the Cell Name area of the main window and choose Clear Existed Neighbors from the shortcut menu. 2. In the displayed U-Net dialog box, click Y. The existing result of neighboring cell planning is cleared. NOTE You can clear the existing result of neighboring cell planning so that the planning of neighboring cells next time will not be affected.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
368
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
Figure 5-15 Clicking a cell in the map window
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
369
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
Figure 5-16 Filter
----End
5.10 Interface Reference to GSM Network Planning This section describes the interfaces and parameters for GSM network planning by using the UNet.
5.10.1 Parameters for Creating GSM Prediction Groups This section describes the parameters for creating a prediction group and setting the properties of a prediction group. You can refer to this section when creating a prediction group in the New Prediction Group dialog box or setting the properties of a prediction group in the Group Properties dialog box.
Parameters in the New Prediction Group Dialog Box Parameter
Description
Group Name
Name of a prediction group. This parameter uniquely identifies a prediction group. The U-Net provides a default name for each created prediction group in this parameter field.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Prediction Type
Prediction type.
Study Selected
Prediction counter.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
370
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
Parameter
Description
Calculate Now
Whether to calculate each prediction counter immediately.
Parameters in the GSM Group Properties Dialog Box Table 5-13 Parameters on the General tab page Parameter
Description
Name
Indicates the name of a prediction group.
Resolution(m)
Indicates the prediction precision.
Handover Threshold(dB)
Indicates the handover area threshold.
Polygon
Indicates the area calculated in prediction.
Cell Edge Coverage Probability
Indicates the probability of cell edge coverage, that is, the probability that the receive signal strength is stronger than the specified threshold at the edge of a cell.
With Shadow
Indicates whether shadow fading is considered in the calculation.
Indoor Coverage
Indicates whether penetration loss is considered in the calculation.
Table 5-14 Parameters on the Condition tab page Parameter
Description
Signal Level(dBm)
Indicates the receive threshold of the downlink reference signal.
Terminal
Indicates a terminal type.
Service
Indicates a service type.
Mobility
Indicates a mobility type.
Table 5-15 Parameters on the Advance tab page
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Parameter
Description
TopNSignalLevel
Indicates the number of top receive levels to be ranked.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
371
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
Parameter
Description
TrxDTXFactor
Indicates the DTX factor.
5.10.2 Parameters for Planning GSM Neighboring Cells This section describes the parameters for planning GSM neighboring cells. Table 5-16 Parameters on the General tab page Parameter
Description
Methods Select
Indicates a network planning scenario to be selected. l Topology: Plans neighboring cells on the basis of network topology. l Prediction: Plans neighboring cells on the basis of prediction results. This method applies only to outdoor base stations. l Topology + Prediction: Plans neighboring cells on the basis of both the network topology and the prediction results.
Max Neighbor Distance (km)
Indicates the maximum neighboring cell distance.
Planning Neighbor based on existed Neighbors
Plan neighboring cells based on the existing neighboring relationships.
If the distance between two cells exceeds the specified value, the two cells cannot be planned as neighboring cells.
If this option is not selected, the existing neighboring relationships are deleted and neighboring cells are replanned.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Force Co-Site As Neighbor
Indicates that internal cells are forcibly configured as bidirectional neighboring cells.
Co-Site Distance(m)
Configures the two cells as bidirectional neighboring cells when the distance between the two cells is smaller than the value of this parameter.
Swapped out cells taken into planning
Indicates whether swapped-out cells need to be planned.
Reference Existed Neighbors
Indicates whether existing neighboring cells need to be referred.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
372
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
Parameter
Description
Reference Rules
Click Reference Rules and configure reference rules in the displayed window. l Source Cell Frequency Band: Indicates the frequency band to be planned. l Neighbor Cell Frequency Band: Indicates the frequency band of the neighboring cell. l Referenced Cell Frequency Band: Indicates the frequency band of the referenced cell. l Reference Neighbor Cell Frequency Band: Indicates the frequency band of the neighboring cell of the referenced cell.
Azimuth Difference(°)
Indicates the azimuth difference between the cells to be planned and the cells used for reference.
Reference Site Distance (m)
Indicates the distance difference between the site of the cells to be planned and the site of the cells used for reference.
Consider Handover Statistics
Indicates whether to consider the handover data and the path for saving the handover data.
Planning Weight
Indicates the weight of the planning result upon neighboring cell ranking.
Handover Statistics Weight
Indicates the weight of the handover data upon neighboring cell ranking.
Resolution(m)
Indicates the precision for the calculation. You can set this parameter in the Prediction Parameter Setting window after you click Setting when the network planning scenario is set to Prediction or Topology + Prediction.
Handover Area Percent (%)
Compute Shadowing
Indicates the handover area proportion. You can set this parameter in the Prediction Parameter Setting window after you click Setting when the network planning scenario is set to Prediction or Topology + Prediction. Indicates whether shadow fading is considered in the calculation. You can set this parameter in the Prediction Parameter Setting window after you click Setting when the network planning scenario is set to Prediction or Topology + Prediction.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
373
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
Parameter
Description
Cell Edge Coverage Probability(%)
Indicates the probability of the cell edge coverage. This parameter is valid only when shadow fading is considered. The value of this parameter is directly proportional to the value of shadowing fading. You can set this parameter in the Prediction Parameter Setting window after you click Setting when the network planning scenario is set to Prediction or Topology + Prediction. NOTE This parameter is valid when you select Compute Shadowing.
Compute Indoor Loss
Indicates whether the penetration loss is considered in the calculation. You can set this parameter in the Prediction Parameter Setting window after you click Setting when the network planning scenario is set to Prediction or Topology + Prediction.
Min Signal Level(dBm)
Indicates the minimum signal receive level. You can set this parameter in the Prediction Parameter Setting window after you click Setting when the network planning scenario is set to Prediction or Topology + Prediction.
Handover Threshold(dB)
Indicates the handover area threshold. You can set this parameter in the Prediction Parameter Setting window after you click Setting when the network planning scenario is set to Prediction or Topology + Prediction.
Automatic generate Planning Cells
Automatically generates cells to be planned.
Area
Indicates the planning area.
NOTE You can select new cells and related cells as cells to be planned.
l You can select all the cells in an area or click Filter to select only the cells to be planned in the area. l In the Filter dialog box, you can specify the contents to be found, set the search direction, and set whether to match cases.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
374
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
Table 5-17 Parameters on the Intra-Technology tab page Parameter
Description
Force Symmetry
Indicates whether to forcibly configure unidirectional neighboring cells as bidirectional neighboring cells. If this option is selected during network capacity expansion, the unidirectional neighboring cells are configured as bidirectional neighboring cells, adjusting the original neighbor relationship table.
New Cell-Indoor Cell-Max Outdoor Neighbor Number
Indicates the maximum number of outdoor neighboring cells planned for a newly established indoor cell.
New Cell-Indoor Cell-Max Indoor Neighbor Number
Indicates the maximum number of indoor neighboring cells planned for a newly established indoor cell.
New Cell-Outdoor Cell-Max Outdoor Neighbor Number
Indicates the maximum number of outdoor neighboring cells planned for a newly established outdoor cell.
New Cell-Outdoor Cell-Max Indoor Neighbor Number
Indicates the maximum number of indoor neighboring cells planned for a newly established outdoor cell.
Existed Cell-Indoor Cell-Max Outdoor Neighbor Number
Indicates the maximum number of outdoor neighboring cells planned for an existing indoor cell.
Existed Cell-Indoor Cell-Max Indoor Neighbor Number
Indicates the maximum number of indoor neighboring cells planned for an existing indoor cell.
Existed Cell-Outdoor CellMax Outdoor Neighbor Number
Indicates the maximum number of outdoor neighboring cells planned for an existing outdoor cell.
Existed Cell-Outdoor CellMax Indoor Neighbor Number
Indicates the maximum number of indoor neighboring cells planned for an existing outdoor cell.
Table 5-18 Parameters on the Inter-RAT tab page (available only in multi-mode neighboring cell planning)
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Parameter
Description
Total Max Number
Indicates the maximum number of neighboring cells.
ARFCN
Indicates the UTRA absolute radio frequency channel number (UARFCN) to be handed over when the RAT is switched to UMTS.
Min Signal Level(dBm)
Indicates the minimum signal receive level.
Handover Threshold(dB)
Indicates the handover area threshold.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
375
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
5.10.3 Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of Neighboring Cells This section describes the parameters for setting the display properties of neighboring cells. Table 5-19 Parameters on the General tab page Parameter
Description
Display Links
Identifies neighbor relationships by using lines.
Display Cell Color
Identifies neighbor relationships in cell colors.
Fit Neighbor Cell Visible
Displays the neighbor relationships of a cell on the map after you select the cell in the neighbor relationship table.
Display Deleted Existed Neighbor
Displays the neighboring cells that are available on the live network but are currently deleted from the U-Net.
Selected Cell Color
Sets the color of the source cell.
Intra Frequency Neighbors
Displays intra-frequency neighboring cells.
Inter Frequency Neighbors
Displays inter-frequency neighboring cells.
Inter-RAT Neighbors
Displays inter-RAT neighboring cells.
Intra Technology Neighbors
Displays intra-RAT neighboring cells.
Table 5-20 Parameters on the Neighbor Display Color tab page
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Legend
Description
Confirm Intra Frequency
Sets the display color of unidirectional intra-frequency neighboring cells on the map.
Confirm Inter Frequency
Sets the display color of unidirectional inter-frequency neighboring cells on the map.
Confirm Inter-RAT
Sets the display color of unidirectional inter-RAT neighboring cells on the map.
Deleted Intra Frequency
Sets the display color of unidirectional intra-frequency neighboring cells that are deleted from the live network on the map.
Deleted Inter Frequency
Sets the display color of unidirectional inter-frequency neighboring cells that are deleted from the live network on the map.
Deleted Iner-RAT
Sets the display color of unidirectional inter-RAT neighboring cells that are deleted from the live network on the map.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
376
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
Legend
Description
Add To Legend
Displays the neighbor relationships on the map.
Transparency
Sets the transparency of the color.
NOTE
The neighboring cell types displayed on the U-Net may be different in different network systems. You can view the meaning of the displayed neighboring cell type.
5.10.4 Parameters for Setting the Audit and Filter Conditions Based on Neighboring Relations This section describes the parameters for setting the conditions for checking neighbor relationships and filtering neighboring cells. Table 5-21 Parameter for setting the conditions for checking neighbor relationships and filtering neighboring cells
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Parameter
Description
Source Cell
Selects the source cell.
Intra-Frequency
Filters the intra-frequency neighboring cells.
Inter-Frequency
Filters the inter-frequency neighboring cells.
Intra-Technology
Filters the intra-RAT neighboring cells.
Inter-RAT
Filters the inter-RAT neighboring cells.
Average No. of Neighbors
Indicates the average number of neighboring cells.
Empty List
Filters the unconfigured neighboring cells.
Missing Co-Site
Filters the neighboring cells that belong to different sites.
Missing Symmetry
Filters the unconfigured bidirectional neighboring cells.
List > No:
Filters the neighboring cells whose number of neighboring cells is greater than the specified number.
Percentage of Reference Neighbors
Indicates the percentage of UMTS cells that share neighbor relationships with the GSM cells at the same site as the UMTS cells.
Same PCI
Filters the neighboring cells that use the same PCI. This parameter is available only for the LTE network.
With Deleted Existed Neighbor
Collects cells whose existing neighboring cells have been deleted.
None
Sets no filter criterion.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
377
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
Parameter
Description
Highlighted on Geographic Interface
Determines whether to highlight filtered cells on the map.
This table provides all the parameters for checking neighbor relationships and filtering neighboring cells in each network system. Some parameters may be available only in a specific network system. Check the parameter description based on site conditions.
5.10.5 Parameters for Viewing Neighboring Cell Planning Results This section describes the parameters for viewing neighbor relationships. You can refer to this section when viewing neighboring cell planning results after the neighboring cell planning is complete. Table 5-22 Tab page description Parameter
Description
Intra-Technology
Indicates intra-technology neighboring cells.
Inter-RAT
Indicates inter-RAT neighboring cells.
The tab page name varies according to the network technology. Read the description on the actual tab page. Table 5-23 Parameter description Parameter
Description
Neighbor Name
Indicates the name of a neighboring cell.
Frequency Band
Indicates a frequency band.
Cause
Indicates the reason for configuring a cell as the neighboring cell of the serving cell. l existed: Indicates the existing neighbor relationships on the network. l planned: Indicates the planned neighbor relationships. l force: Indicates the neighbor relationships manually added by users. l inherited: Indicates the inherited neighbor relationships.
Confirm
Indicates whether a cell is configured as the neighboring cell of the serving cell. If the option is selected, the cell is configured as the neighboring cell of the serving cell. If the option is not selected, the cell is not configured as the neighboring cell of the serving cell.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
378
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
5.11 TSC Planning This section describes the training sequence code (TSC) planning. After a base station is created, you can plan the TSCs at a GSM site. You can use the U-Net to perform common, IBCA-based, and VAMOS-based TSC planning. The VAMOS feature increases the GSM network capacity when the network cannot be expanded due to restricted frequency. The IBCA feature improves voice quality and network performance without new hardware. In the VAMOS-based TSC planning, orthogonal TSCs are used to multiplex two subscribers to the same timeslot to increase voice capacity, but the voice quality decreases accordingly. The orthogonal TSCs need to be configured in pair to avoid intra-frequency interference when two VAMOS subscribers are using the same timeslot of the same frequency. In the IBCA-based TSC planning, the IBCA algorithm is used to search interference calls and allocate the channels with the minimum interference to subscribers. In this way, network performance can be improved. The IBCA feature improves channel quality by reducing the interference traffic. Therefore, TSCs need to be configured to ensure the minimum of interference traffic of the same TSC station. Manual configuration of TSCs is complicated. In this case, the U-Net is required.
5.11.1 Planning TSC This section describes how to perform TSC planning for the allocation of TSCs in cells and at sites in GSM networks. The planning result can be used for the VAMOS and IBCA features.
Prerequisites Base station information has been created and imported, including sites, transceivers, and cells.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Step 2 On the displayed Operation tab page, click GSM TSC Planning in the navigation tree. Step 3 Right-click GSM TSC Planning and choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 5-17.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
379
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
Figure 5-17 Automatic Allocation
Step 4 Set planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For details, see 5.12.1 Parameters for TSC Planning. Step 5 Click Run. l You can right-click GSM TSC Planning on the Operation tab page and choose Stop from the shortcut menu to stop the planning of TSCs. l The planning result is displayed in the lower area in the main window of the U-Net. For details, see 5.12.2 Parameters for Viewing the TSC Planning Result. ----End
Follow-up Procedure l
Set the color of cells displayed in the map window for different TSC planning modes. 1.
In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2.
On the displayed Operation tab page, click GSM TSC Planning in the navigation tree.
3.
Right-click TSC Planning and choose GSM Display Option from the shortcut menu.
4.
In the displayed TSC Display Options dialog box, set the color of cells displayed in the map window for different TSC planning modes. For details, see 5.12.5 Parameters for Setting the TSC Display Effect.
5.
Click OK.
5.11.2 Managing the TSC Planning Result This section describes how to manage the TSC planning result. After the TSC planning is complete, you can apply and export the planning result.
Prerequisites The TSC planning is complete.
Procedure Step 1 Click the Operation tab in the Explorer window. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
380
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
Step 2 On the displayed Operation tab page, select GSM TSC Planning in the navigation tree. Step 3 Right-click GSM TSC Planning and choose Open Table from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 5-18. Figure 5-18 Open TSC Table
Step 4 Perform the following operations as required. If you need to...
Then...
Export the TSC planning result
1. Right-click in the TSC Planning Display window and choose Export from the shortcut menu. 2. Set parameters in the displayed Data Export dialog box. For details, see Parameters in the Data Export Dialog Box. 3. Click Export. 4. Set the file format and file name and specify the saving path. Then, click Save. After the data is exported successfully, you can open it to view and modify the data.
Enable the map window and the planning result table to display the TSC planning result simultaneously
1. In the TSC Planning Display window, click a row heading. Alternatively, click a certain cell in the map window. 2. Information about the selected cell is displayed in the map window and the planning result table in the right pane of the TSC Planning Display window simultaneously, as shown in Figure 5-19. NOTE You need to select GSM TSC Planning in the navigation tree so that the selected cell can be displayed in the map window.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
381
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
If you need to...
Then...
Enable the U-Net to display or hide certain columns
1. In the right pane of the TSC Planning Display window, right-click a certain table heading and choose Display Columns from the shortcut menu. 2. In the displayed Columns to be displayed dialog box, select or clear the check boxes of columns to be displayed or hidden. NOTE You can right-click a certain table heading in the TSC Planning Display window and choose Hide Columns from the shortcut menu to hide the selected column.
Figure 5-19 Display
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
382
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
----End
5.11.3 IBCA Interference Neighboring Cell Planning This section describes how to perform IBCA interference neighboring cell planning. The IBCA feature improves voice quality and network performance in GSM networks. The configuration data of interference neighboring cells is required for the IBCA feature, which can be obtained after the interference neighboring cell planning is complete.
Prerequisites l
Base station information has been created and imported, including sites, transceivers, and cells.
l
The parameters MA and MAIO Plan have been configured for the cells.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Step 2 On the displayed Operation tab page, select GSM IBCA Interference Neighbor in the navigation tree. Step 3 Right-click GSM IBCA Interference Neighbor and choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 5-20. Figure 5-20 Automatic Allocation
Step 4 Set planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For details, see 5.12.3 Parameters for IBCA Interference Neighboring Cell Planning. Step 5 Click Run. l You can right-click GSM IBCA Interference Neighbor on the Operation tab page and choose Stop from the shortcut menu to stop the planning of IBCA interference neighboring cells. l The planning result is displayed in the lower area in the main window of the U-Net. For details, see 5.12.4 Parameters for Viewing the Result of IBCA Interference Neighboring Cell Planning. ----End Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
383
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
5.11.4 Managing the Result of IBCA Interference Neighboring Cell Planning This section describes how to manage the result of IBCA interference neighboring cell planning. After the planning is complete, you can export the planning result.
Prerequisites The planning of IBCA interference neighboring cells is complete.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Step 2 On the displayed Operation tab page, select GSM IBCA Interference Neighbor in the navigation tree. NOTE
You need to select GSM IBCA Interference Neighbor so that the IBCA interference neighboring cell relationships can be displayed in the map window.
Step 3 Right-click IBCA Interference Neighbor and choose Open Table from the shortcut menu. The IBCA Interference Neighbor window is displayed. Step 4 Perform the following operations as required. If...
Then...
You want to export the result of IBCA interference neighboring cell planning
1. In the IBCA Interference Neighbor window, right-click in the left pane and choose Export from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 5-21. 2. Set parameters in the displayed Data Export dialog box. For details, see Parameters in the Data Export Dialog Box. 3. Click Export. 4. Set the file format and file name and specify the saving path. Then, click Save. After the data is exported to a file, you can open it to view and modify the data.
You want to enable the map window to display the result of IBCA interference neighboring cell planning together with that in the planning result table
1. In the IBCA Interference Neighbor window, click a cell in the left pane. Alternatively, click a certain cell in the map window. 2. In the right pane of the IBCA Interference Neighbor window, the interference neighboring cells of the selected cell is displayed in the map window and the planning result table at the same time, as shown in Figure 5-22.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
384
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
Figure 5-21 Export
Figure 5-22 IBCA Interference Neighbor
----End
5.12 Interface Reference to TSC Parameter Planning 5.12.1 Parameters for TSC Planning This section describes the parameters used for TSC planning in GSM networks. You can refer to this section when setting planning parameters in the TSC Parameter Setting dialog box. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
385
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
Parameter
Description
Planning on
Network planning scenario l Common asynchronous network: TSC planning is performed on a common asynchronous network. l IBCA network: TSC planning is performed on an IBCA network. l VAMOS asynchronous network: TSC planning is performed on a VAMOS asynchronous network. l VAMOS synchronization network: TSC planning is performed on a VAMOS synchronization network.
Planning based on
l Site: TSC planning is performed based on sites. l Cell: TSC planning is performed based on cells.
Planning TSC based on existed TSC
If this item is selected, TSC planning is performed based on existing TSCs.
Data
l Interference Matrix Path: directory of the interference matrix file to be imported. NOTE Set parameters in the Data Import dialog box. For details, see Parameters in the Data Import Dialog Box.
l The count of interference: maximum number of interference neighboring cells. The value ranges from 1 to 10. Area
Planning area You can select all the cells in an area or click Filter and select only the cells to be planned in the area. If you select Full Map, all the cells on the map are to be planned. You can set filter criteria such as Direction and Match case in the Filter dialog box.
5.12.2 Parameters for Viewing the TSC Planning Result This section describes the parameters for viewing the TSC planning result. You can refer to this section when viewing the TSC planning result in the TSC Planning Display area after the TSC planning is complete.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
386
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
Parameter
Description
Site Name
Name of a site.
Site ID
ID of a site.
Cell Name
Name of a cell.
CI
ID of a cell.
Existed TSC
Existing TSC.
Existed VamosMainTSC
Existing VAMOS main TSC.
Existed VamosSubTSC
Existing VAMOS sub-TSC.
Existed TSC Group
Existing VAMOS TSC group.
Suggest TSC
Suggested TSC, that is, the TSC planning result. Suggest indicates that the obtained data after the TSC planning has not been applied to NEs.
Suggest VamosMainTSC
Obtained VAMOS main TSC after the planning.
Suggest VamosSubTSC
Obtained VAMOS sub-TSC after the planning.
Suggest TSC Group
Obtained VAMOS TSC group after the planning.
Confirm TSC
Confirmed TSC. By default, the value of Confirm TSC is the same as that of Suggest TSC. You can change the value manually. You submit the value of Confirm TSC as the TSC planning result.
Confirm VamosMainTSC
Confirmed VAMOS main TSC.
Confirm VamosSubTSC
Confirmed VAMOS sub-TSC.
Confirm TSC Group
Confirmed VAMOS TSC group.
5.12.3 Parameters for IBCA Interference Neighboring Cell Planning The section describes the parameters used for IBCA interference neighboring cell planning in GSM networks. You can refer to this section when setting planning parameters in the IBCA Interference Neighbor dialog box.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
387
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
Parameter
Description
Data
l Interference Matrix Path: directory of the interference matrix file to be imported. NOTE Set planning parameters in the Data Import dialog box. For details, see Parameters in the Data Import Dialog Box.
l The count of interference: maximum number of interference neighboring cells. The value ranges from 1 to 64. Interference sort strategy
Mode for ranking interference neighboring cells. l Interferenced traffic to others: ranking interference neighboring cells by interference traffic of other cells caused by an interference neighboring cell. l Interferenced traffic by others: ranking interference neighboring cells by interference traffic of an interference neighboring cell caused by other cells. l Total Interference: Interference neighboring cells are ranked based on the sum of the interference traffic of other cells caused by an interference neighboring cell and the interference traffic of an interference neighboring cell caused by other cells.
Area
Planning area. You can select all the cells in an area or click Filter and select only the cells to be planned in the area. If you select Full Map, all the cells on the map are to be planned. You can set filter criteria such as Direction and Match case in the Filter dialog box.
5.12.4 Parameters for Viewing the Result of IBCA Interference Neighboring Cell Planning This section describes the parameters in the IBCA Interference Neighbor window. You can refer to this section when viewing the result of IBCA interference neighboring cell planning.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Parameter
Description
Cell Name
Name of an interference neighboring cell.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
388
GENEX U-Net User Guide
5 GSM Network Planning
Parameter
Description
CI
ID of a cell.
Co Traffic
Co-frequency interference traffic.
Adj Traffic
Adjacent frequency interference traffic.
Interference Relation
Interference relationship. This parameter is used to determine cofrequency and adjacent frequency interference, co-frequency interference, and adjacent frequency interference based on interference probability.
5.12.5 Parameters for Setting the TSC Display Effect This section describes the parameters used for setting the TSC display effect in the TSC Display Options dialog box.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Parameter
Description
TSC
Indicates the rendering effect for common TSCs.
Vamos TSC
Indicates the rendering effect for the VAMOS TSCs.
Selected Cell Color
Indicates the color of the source cell.
Co-TSCCell Color
Indicates the color of cells with the same TSC value as that of the source cell in the TSC planning.
Co-TSCPair Cell
Indicates the color of cells with the value of VamosMainTSC being the same as that of VamosMainTSC in the source cell in the VAMOS-based TSC planning.
Related-TSC Cell
Indicates the color of cells with the value of VamosMainTSC being the same as that of VamosSubTSC in the source cell in the VAMOS-based TSC planning.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
389
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
6
UMTS Network Planning
About This Chapter The U-Net supports the planning of the UMTS network. You can model the actual network environment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creating base stations based on the imported geographic data. Then, you can plan the neighboring cells and scrambling codes, predict the network coverage range, and evaluate the network capacity to meet you network planning requirements. 6.1 Process of UMTS Network Planning This section describes the process of UMTS network planning. You can refer to this section when planning a UMTS network by using the U-Net. 6.2 Creating a Project This section describes how to create a project. You can select different project templates for different network systems. The U-Net creates the project based on the selected template. Currently, the U-Net provides project templates for the following network systems: GSM, UMTS, CDMA, LTE-FDD, and LTE-TDD. 6.3 Importing Geographic Data You can import geographic data in various vector and grid formats and set coordinate systems. You can also add points, lines, or polygons to create vector objects.The method for importing geographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is the same. 6.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands The U-Net enables you to calculate path loss between a transmitter and a receiver based on a propagation model. Then you can use the calculated path loss matrix to perform prediction.The method for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systems on the U-Net is the same. 6.5 Adding a Device You can import or create antennas, create TMAs, feeders, or site equipment.The method for creating site equipment for different network systems on the U-Net is the same. 6.6 Setting UMTS Traffic Parameters Traffic parameters refer to the parameters related to the user type, mobility, terminal, service, environment, MCS, and receiving devices. They are the basic data related to user distribution. Traffic parameters can be used to generate a specific traffic map. 6.7 Setting UMTS NE Parameters Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
390
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
You can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station template to automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeaters separately. 6.8 UMTS Prediction By calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage and channel quality. 6.9 Planning UMTS Neighboring Cells After creating NodeBs, you need to plan neighboring cells for the cells on the UMTS network. You can automatically plan neighboring cells in batches or manually plan neighboring cells for each cell one by one. 6.10 UMTS Scrambling Code Planning This section describes UMTS scrambling code planning. Scrambling codes used for differentiating cells and users are important resources in the UMTS system. Scrambling code planning of the U-Net supports multiple grouping functions such as horizontal grouping and vertical grouping. In addition, the scrambling code planning is applicable to multiple scenarios such as scrambling code check and network deployment. 6.11 UMTS Measurement Reports Analysis This chapter describes how to analyze UMTS measurement reports by creating measurement report analysis groups. The U-Net geographically displays each counter, helping users analyze the live network. 6.12 UMTS Network Capacity Expansion Analysis Using the policy of network capacity expansion by splitting sectors, the U-Net can expand the UMTS network capacity to meet increasing capacity requirements. 6.13 Interface Reference to UMTS Network Planning This section describes the interfaces and parameters for UMTS network planning by using the U-Net.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
391
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
6.1 Process of UMTS Network Planning This section describes the process of UMTS network planning. You can refer to this section when planning a UMTS network by using the U-Net. Figure 6-1 shows the process of UMTS network planning. Figure 6-1 Process of UMTS network planning
Table 6-1 describes the detailed information about Figure 6-1. Table 6-1 Description of the UMTS network planning process
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
No.
Procedure
Description
1
Creating a project
For details, see 3.2 Creating a Project.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
392
GENEX U-Net User Guide
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
6 UMTS Network Planning
No.
Procedure
Description
2
Importing geographic data
You can import geographic data in various vector and grid formats and set coordinate systems. You can also add points, lines, or polygons to create vector objects.The method for importing geographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is the same.For details, see 3.3 Importing Geographic Data.
3
Managing propagation models and bands
The U-Net enables you to calculate path loss between a transmitter and a receiver based on a propagation model. Then you can use the calculated path loss matrix to perform prediction.The method for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systems on the U-Net is the same.For details, see 3.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands.
4
Adding a device
You can import or create antennas, create TMAs, feeders, or site equipment.The method for creating site equipment for different network systems on the U-Net is the same.For details, see 3.5 Adding a Device.
5
Setting traffic parameters
Set traffic parameters related to terminals and services, which are to be used during prediction.For details, see 6.6 Setting UMTS Traffic Parameters.
6
Setting NE parameters
You can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station template to automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeaters separately.For details, see 6.7 Setting UMTS NE Parameters.
7
Calculating the path loss
For details, see 3.8.2 Calculating Path Loss.
8
Planning scrambling codes/ Planning neighboring cells
For details, see 6.10 UMTS Scrambling Code Planning and 6.9 Planning UMTS Neighboring Cells.
9
Analyzing Network Capacity Expansion/ Analyzing Measurement Reports
For details, see 6.12 UMTS Network Capacity Expansion Analysis and 6.11 UMTS Measurement Reports Analysis.
10
Predicting network performance
For details, see 6.8 UMTS Prediction.
11
Exporting network planning results
For details, see Prediction and Neighboring Cell Planning.
The planning results can be applied to NEs.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
393
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
6.2 Creating a Project This section describes how to create a project. You can select different project templates for different network systems. The U-Net creates the project based on the selected template. Currently, the U-Net provides project templates for the following network systems: GSM, UMTS, CDMA, LTE-FDD, and LTE-TDD.
Context l
Only one project can run on the U-Net at a time. In normal cases, one project corresponds to the network planning for an area or a city.
l
One U-Net project may correspond to the network planning of multiple network systems. For example, a U-Net project can be created for the planning of a GSM/UMTS hybrid network.
Procedure Step 1 Choose File > New. The Project Templates dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-2. Figure 6-2 Project Templates
Step 2 Select a project template. l Different network systems correspond to different project templates. You need to select an appropriate project template based on the actual network system. l If multiple network systems are involved, you need to select the required templates. For example, If you need to create a project for a GSM/UMTS hybrid network, you need to select project templates for both the GSM and the UMTS networks. l LTE-TDD and CDMA do not support hybrid networking with other network systems. Step 3 Click OK. ----End
Follow-up Procedure l
Save a project file. Choose File > Save or click file.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
to save all the information about the project in a project
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
394
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
You can save project files in .ipl format: .ipl or .ipl (with all data). In the former format, only NE's parameter planning configuration for the project is saved; in the latter format, all the planning calculation results are saved. The former format is selected by default. The U-Net automatically creates an .ipl project file and a project name.losses folder for saving the information about the path loss matrix and calculation results of capacity simulation, coverage prediction, and neighboring cell planning in the specified save path. NOTE
Based on the save format, the U-Net determines whether to add the calculation result data in the project name.losses path to the project file in .ipl format.
l
Open an existing project file. Choose File > Open to open an existing .ipl project file. NOTE
Alternatively, double-click an .ipl project file to start and open the project.
6.3 Importing Geographic Data You can import geographic data in various vector and grid formats and set coordinate systems. You can also add points, lines, or polygons to create vector objects.The method for importing geographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is the same.
Context The method for importing geographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is the same. For details, see 3.3 Importing Geographic Data.
6.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands The U-Net enables you to calculate path loss between a transmitter and a receiver based on a propagation model. Then you can use the calculated path loss matrix to perform prediction.The method for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systems on the U-Net is the same.
Context The method for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systems on the U-Net is the same. For details, see 3.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands. For details about the parameters for setting the frequency band information, see Parameters for Setting Bands.
6.5 Adding a Device You can import or create antennas, create TMAs, feeders, or site equipment.The method for creating site equipment for different network systems on the U-Net is the same.
Context The method for creating site equipment for different network systems on the U-Net is the same. For details, see 3.5 Adding a Device. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
395
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
6.6 Setting UMTS Traffic Parameters Traffic parameters refer to the parameters related to the user type, mobility, terminal, service, environment, MCS, and receiving devices. They are the basic data related to user distribution. Traffic parameters can be used to generate a specific traffic map.
6.6.1 Setting MIMO Types You can modify the parameters of existing MIMO types. If the existing MIMO types do not meet the requirements, you can create MIMO types.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > UMTS. Step 3 Right-click Traffic Parameters > Services > UMTS and choose MIMO from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 6-3. The MIMO Configuration dialog box is displayed. Figure 6-3 MIMO
Step 4 Modify the parameters of an existing MIMO type. Alternatively, click a blank line marked with an asterisk (*) in the dialog box to set parameters for the new MIMO type. For detailed description of parameters of MIMO types, see Table 6-2. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
396
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Table 6-2 Parameters for setting MIMO types Parameter
Meaning
Name
Indicates the name of the MIMO.
TX_ANTENNAS
Indicates the number of transmit antennas.
RX_ANTENNAS
Indicates the number of receive antennas.
SM_SUPPORTED
Indicates whether space division multiplexing is supported.
SM_GAIN(dB)
Indicates the MIMO gain. The SM_GAIN(dB) takes effect only after the SM_SUPPORTED is selected.
Step 5 Click
to close MIMO Configuration.
----End
6.6.2 Setting UMTS Service Types Set the service type such as the voice service and data service. You can modify the parameters of existing service types. If the existing service types do not meet the requirements, you can create service types.
Context The U-Net provides six default UMTS service types: UMTSVideo Conferencing, UMTSVoice, UMTSHSDPA, UMTSHSUPA, UMTSMobile Internet Access, and UMTSMultimedia Messaging Service.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 Set service type parameters. If you need to...
Then...
Create a service type
1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > UMTS. 2. Choose New from the shortcut menu. See Figure 6-4. 3. Set parameters for the new service type by referring to Table 6-3.
Modify an existing service type
1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > UMTS > An existing service type. 2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. 3. Modify parameters for the existing service type by referring to Table 6-3.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
397
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Figure 6-4 New
Table 6-3 Parameters for setting UMTS services Parameter
Meaning
Name
Indicates the name of a service type.
Body Loss
Indicates the loss due to the human body.
Priority
Indicates the weighting factor based on the scheduled services. The weighting factor is assigned depending on the service priority. The value 1 indicates the lowest priority.
Type
Indicates a service type. l CSServie: CS services. l PSServie: PS services.
Is VOIP
Indicates whether the voice over IP (VoIP) is used. This parameter is available only for the PS services.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
R99 Bearer
Indicates the R99 bearer table assigned to a service type.
Soft Handoff Allowed
Indicates whether a soft handoff is supported.
HSDPA
Indicates whether the HSDPA service is supported.
HSUPA
Indicates whether the HSUPA service is supported.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
398
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Parameter
Meaning
Activity
Indicates the uplink/downlink activation factor. This parameter is required for only voice services. l Uplink: uplink activation factor. The value ranges from 0 to 1. l Downlink: downlink activation factor. The value ranges from 0 to 1. Indicates the frame error rate on the uplink and downlink.
FER(%)
This parameter is available only for the CS services. Max Throughput(kbit/s)
Indicates the maximum uplink/downlink throughput. l Uplink: maximum uplink throughput. The value ranges from 0 to 107. l Downlink: maximum downlink throughput. The value ranges from 0 to 107. NOTE Minimum throughput ≤ Average throughput ≤ Maximum throughput
Min Throughput(kbit/s)
Indicates the minimum uplink/downlink throughput. l Uplink: minimum uplink throughput. The value ranges from 0 to 107. l Downlink: minimum downlink throughput. The value ranges from 0 to 107. NOTE Minimum throughput ≤ Average throughput ≤ Maximum throughput
Average Throughput(kbit/ s)
Indicates the average uplink/downlink throughput. l Uplink: average uplink throughput. l Downlink: average downlink throughput. NOTE Minimum throughput ≤ Average throughput ≤ Maximum throughput
Transmission Efficiency
Indicates the uplink/downlink transmission rate. l Uplink: uplink transmission rate. The value ranges from 0 to 1. l Downlink: downlink transmission rate. The value ranges from 0 to 1.
IBLER(%)
Indicates the block error rate (BLER). The value ranges from 0 to 100.
Offset(kbit/s)
Indicates the fixed uplink/downlink overhead, which is the length added to an encapsulated packet during the transmission at the MAC or RLC layer. l Uplink: fixed uplink overhead. The value ranges from 0 to 107. l Downlink: fixed downlink overhead. The value ranges from 0 to 107.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
399
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Step 3 Click OK. ----End
6.6.3 Setting UMTS Receivers You can modify the parameters of existing receiver types. If the existing receiver types do not meet the requirements, you can create receiver types.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > UMTS. Step 3 Choose Reception Equipment from the shortcut menu. Step 4 Set the name of a receiver. If you need to...
Then...
Create a receiver type.
Enter the name of a new receiver in a blank line (marked with *) in the dialog box. Select Bearer Selection Table.
Modify an existing receiver type.
Go to Step 5.
Step 5 Double-click the heading of the receiver and set properties in the displayed dialog box. For detailed description of parameters, see Table 6-4. Step 6 Click OK. Table 6-4 Parameters for setting UMTS receivers Parameter
Meaning
Name
Indicates the name of a receiver.
Bearer Selection Table
Indicates the bearer table.
Mobility
Indicates the mobility type of a receiver. For detailed description of parameters, see 3.6.7 Setting Mobility Types.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
MIMO
Indicates the efficiency of adjusting codes by the receiver.
IBLER(%)
Indicates the block error rate (BLER). The value ranges from 0 to 100.
Retransmission Gain(dB)
Indicates the retransmission gain.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
400
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Parameter
Meaning
Demodulation
l Indicates the demodulation threshold of PS services if this parameter is located in the PSService area. You can double-click the related cell to set this parameter. l Indicates the demodulation threshold of CS services if this parameter is located in the CSService area. You can double-click the related cell to set this parameter.
Bearer Index
Indicates the index of the HSDPA or HSUPA bearer table.
Ec/Nt(dB)
Indicates the demodulation threshold.
----End
6.6.4 Setting UMTS Terminal Types Set the terminal types used when a service is performed. You can modify the parameters of existing terminal types. If the existing terminal types do not meet the requirements, you can create terminal types.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 Set parameters of the terminal type. If you need to...
Then...
Create a terminal 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > UMTS. type 2. Choose New from the shortcut menu. 3. Set parameters for the new terminal type by referring to Table 6-5. Modify an 1. Choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > UMTS > Existing existing terminal Terminal from the navigation tree. type 2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. 3. Modify parameters for the existing terminal type by referring to Table 6-5.
Table 6-5 Parameters for setting UMTS terminal types
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Parameter
Meaning
Name
Indicates the name of a terminal type.
Min Tx Power(dBm)
Indicates the minimum transmit power of a terminal.
Max Tx Power(dBm)
Indicates the maximum transmit power of a terminal.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
401
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Parameter
Meaning
Gain(dBi)
Indicates the antenna gain.
Cable Loss(dB)
Indicates the feeder loss of a terminal.
Compressed Mode
Indicates whether to use the compressed mode.
Noise Figure(dB)
Indicates the noise figure of a terminal.
Attenuation(dB)
Indicates the signal attenuation of a terminal.
Active Set Size
Indicates the threshold for the number of cells in an active set. The value ranges from 1 to 6.
Rake Factor(DL)
Indicates the efficiency factor of the Rake receiver on the downlink. The value ranges from -32768 to 32768.
Reception Equipment
Indicates the type of the receiver for a terminal. For details, see 3.6.3 Setting LTE-FDD Receivers.
Frequency Band
Indicates the frequency band.
Technology
Indicates the technologies supported by a terminal.
HSDPA UE Category
Indicates the UE category supported by the HSDPA. The value range is relevant to the value range of HSDPA UE Category.
HSUPA UE Category
Indicates the UE category supported by the HSUPA. The value range is relevant to the value range of HSUPA UE Category.
Space Multiplexing Supported (DL)
Indicates whether the space division multiplexing is supported on the downlink.
Space Multiplexing Supported (UL)
Indicates whether the space division multiplexing is supported on the uplink.
Number of Reception Antennas
Indicates the number of antennas at the receiver for a terminal.
Number of Transmission Antennas
Indicates the number of antennas at the transmitter for a terminal.
----End
6.6.5 Setting Mobility Types This section describes how to set mobility types for terminals. You can modify the parameters of existing mobility types, such as the velocity. If the existing mobility types do not meet the requirements, you can create mobility types.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
402
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Context For networks with different modes, the U-Net sets mobility types in the same way. For details, see 3.6.7 Setting Mobility Types.
6.6.6 Setting the HSUPA Bearer Table The U-Net needs to access the HSUPA bearer table in UMTS prediction. Therefore, before the prediction, you must set the HSUPA bearer table.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > UMTS. Step 3 Right-click and choose HSUPA Bearer from the shortcut menu. The HSUPA Bearer Table window is displayed. Step 4 Set parameters by referring to Table 6-6. Table 6-6 Description of the parameters in the HSUPA bearer table Parameter
Description
Radio Bearer Index
Indicates the index of the HSUPA bearer table. Its value is greater than 0.
TTI Duration (ms)
Indicates the duration of TTI scheduling. Its value is either 10 ms or 2 ms.
Number of EDPDCH codes
Indicates the number of traffic channel codes. The value ranges from 1 to 32767.
Min Spreading Factor
Indicates the minimum spreading factor. The value ranges from 2 to 32767.
Number of CEs Used
Indicates the total CEs of the bearer service.
Transport Block Size (bits)
Indicates the size of a transported block at the physical layer.
RLC Peak Rate (bps)
Indicates the peak rate at the RLC layer.
Highest modulation
Indicates a modulation mode.
Step 5 Click
to close the table.
----End
6.6.7 Setting the HSDPA Bearer Table The U-Net needs to access the HSDPA bearer table in UMTS prediction. Therefore, before the prediction, you must set the HSDPA bearer table. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
403
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > UMTS. Step 3 Right-click and choose HSDPA Bearer from the shortcut menu. The HSDPA Bearer Table window is displayed. Step 4 Set parameters by referring to Table 6-7. Table 6-7 Description of the parameters in the HSDPA bearer table Parameter
Description
Index
Indicates the index.
CQI
Indicates the channel quality indicator.
Transport Block Size (bits)
Indicates the size of a transported block at the physical layer. The unit is bit. The default value is 0.
Number of Used HSPDSCH Channels
Indicates the number of traffic channel codes. The default value is 1.
RLC Peak Rate (bps)
Indicates the peak rate at the RLC layer. The unit is bit/s. The default value is 0.
Highest Modulation
Indicates a modulation mode. Its value is QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM. The default value is QPSK.
Step 5 Click
to close the table.
----End
6.6.8 Setting the R99 Bearer Table The U-Net needs to access the R99 bearer table in UMTS prediction. Therefore, before the prediction, you must set the R99 bearer table.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > UMTS. Step 3 Right-click and choose R99 Bearer from the shortcut menu. The UMTS R99 Bearer Table window is displayed. Step 4 Set parameters by referring to Table 6-8. Table 6-8 Description of the parameters in the R99 bearer table
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Parameter
Description
Name
Indicates the name of the R99 bearer service. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
404
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Parameter
Description
Nominal Rate(UL)
Indicates the nominal rate of the uplink bearer service.
Nominal Rate(DL)
Indicates the nominal rate of the downlink bearer service.
Min TCH Power (dBm)
Indicates the allowed lowest power of the downlink traffic channel. The unit is dBm.
Max TCH Power (dBm)
Indicates the allowed highest power of the downlink traffic channel. The unit is dBm.
CE Used Num(UL)
Specifies the total CEs of the uplink bearer service.
CE Used Num(DL)
Specifies the total CEs of the downlink bearer service.
Spreading Factor (UL)
Indicates the spreading factor corresponding to the uplink nominal rate.
Spreading Factor (DL)
Indicates the spreading factor corresponding to the downlink nominal rate.
Step 5 Double-click the column heading of the bearer table to open the UMTS Service Quality dialog box. Then, set relevant parameters, and click OK. NOTE
l Each bearer service in the R99 bearer table must be set. That is, each row in the table must be set. l Mobility: set mobility. l UL Target Eb/No: set the value of Eb/No of the uplink traffic channel for the related mobility. l DL Target Eb/No: set the value of Eb/No of the downlink traffic channel for the related mobility.
Step 6 Click
to close the table.
----End
6.6.9 Setting the HSUPA UE Category Table The U-Net needs to access the HSUPA UE Category table in UMTS prediction. Therefore, before the prediction, you must set the HSUPA UE Category table.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > UMTS. Step 3 Right-click and choose HSUPA UE Category from the shortcut menu. The HSUPA UE Category Table window is displayed. Step 4 Set parameters by referring to Table 6-9.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
405
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Table 6-9 Description of parameters in the HSUPA UE Category table Parameter
Description
Category
Indicates the power level of the UPA terminal. The value must be unique and cannot be empty. It must be greater than or equal to 1.
Max Number of E-DPDCH Codes
Indicates the maximum number of traffic channel codes.
TTI 2ms
Indicates whether to support TTI scheduling of 2 ms.
Min Spreading Factor
Indicates the minimum spreading factor.
Its value is greater than or equal to 1.
Its value is greater than or equal to 1. Max Block Size for a 2ms TTI (bits)
Indicates the maximum size of blocks transferred during TTI scheduling of 2 ms. Its value is greater than or equal to 0.
Max Block Size for a 10ms TTI (bits)
Indicates the maximum size of blocks transferred during TTI scheduling of 10 ms. Its value is greater than or equal to 0.
Highest Modulation
Indicates the highest modulation mode. Its value is either QPSK or 16QAM.
Step 5 Click
to close the table.
----End
6.6.10 Setting the HSDPA UE Category Table The U-Net needs to access the HSDPA UE Category table in UMTS prediction. Therefore, before the prediction, you must set the HSDPA UE Category table.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > UMTS. Step 3 Right-click and choose HSDPA UE Category from the shortcut menu. The HSDPA UE Category Table window is displayed. Step 4 Set parameters by referring to Table 6-10.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
406
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Table 6-10 Description of parameters in the HSDPA UE Category table Parameter
Description
Category
Indicates the power level of the DPA terminal. The value must be unique and cannot be empty. It must be greater than or equal to 1.
Max Number of HS-PDSCH Codes
Indicates the maximum number of traffic channel codes.
Min Inter-TTI interval
Indicates the minimum interval between the TTI scheduling.
Its value is greater than or equal to 1.
Its value is greater than or equal to 1. Max Transport Block Size(bits)
Indicates the maximum size of a transported block. Its value is greater than or equal to 0.
Highest Modulation
Indicates the highest modulation mode. Its value is QPSK, 16QAM, or 64QAM.
MIMO Support
Step 5 Click
Indicates whether MIMO is supported.
to close the table.
----End
6.7 Setting UMTS NE Parameters You can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station template to automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeaters separately.
6.7.1 Importing Base Station Information You can import a data file of base station to the U-Net. After that, the system automatically creates sites, cells, and transceivers according to the base station data. You can also export base station data in a project for easy viewing of site information, cell information, and transceiver information. For networks with different modes, the U-Net imports base station information in the same way.
Context For networks with different modes, the U-Net imports site information in the same way. For details, see 3.7.1 Importing Base Station Information.
6.7.2 Creating a Single Site This section describes how to create a single site. You can create a site or modify the properties of an existing site to obtain a new one. For networks using different radio access technologies (RATs), you can use the U-Net to create a single site in the same way. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
407
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Context For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a single site in the same way. For details, see 3.7.2 Creating a Single Site.
6.7.3 Setting UMTS Base Station Templates This section describes how to manage base station templates. You can create base stations by using the predefined templates of the U-Net. If the predefined templates do not meet your requirements, you can customize a base station template.
Procedure l
View base station templates. 1.
dropOn the toolbar, select Template Management from the down list. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-5.
Figure 6-5 Station Template Properties
2.
The Available Templates area displays the currently available base station templates. Select the default template from the drop-down list next to Default. The name of the default base station template will be displayed on the toolbar of the U-Net main window. The names of other base station templates are available in the drop-down list.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
408
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Such as l
.
Create a base station template. 1.
Click Add. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed. Alternatively, click Duplicate to duplicate the selected base station template. Then, a new base station template is generated on the basis of the selected template.
l
2.
Set properties of the base station template. For detailed description of parameters, see Parameter for Setting UMTS Base Station Templates.
3.
Click OK.
View and modify properties of the base station template. 1.
Select a base station template in the Available Templates area.
2.
Click Properties. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed.
3.
Query and modify properties of the base station template. For detailed description of parameters, see Parameter for Setting UMTS Base Station Templates.
4.
Click OK.
----End
Follow-up Procedure You can create base stations based on a predefined base station template or a customized base station template. When a base station template is not required, you can select the template in the Station Template Properties dialog box and then click Delete to delete it. You cannot delete the last base station template.
6.7.4 Creating Base Stations in Batches The system supports creating a single site automatically or creating a series of base stations with the same property in batches. For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a base station automatically in the same way.
Context For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a base station automatically in the same way. For details, see 3.7.4 Creating Base Stations in Batches.
6.7.5 Creating Repeaters This section describes how to create repeaters. A repeater receives, amplifies, and forwards the RF carriers launched or transmitted in the uplink and downlink. A repeater includes two sides, that is, the donor side and the serving cell side. The donor side of a repeater receives signals from the donor transmitter. The signals may be carried by links of different types, such as radio links or microwave links. The serving cell side forwards the received signals. For networks of different types, the U-Net creates a repeater in the same way.
Context For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a repeater in the same way. For details, see 3.7.5 Creating Repeaters. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
409
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
6.7.6 Creating a Transceiver This section describes how to create a transceiver. The U-Net combines the transceiver with cells. Before setting a cell, you must set the transceiver parameters. A transceiver supports a multi-mode network, that is, a transceiver can cover multiple cells. For networks using different radio access technologies (RATs), you can use the U-Net to create a transceiver in the same way.
Context For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a transceiver in the same way. For details, see 3.7.6 Creating a Transceiver.
6.7.7 Setting UMTS Cell Parameters This section describes how to set UMTS cell parameters. After a transceiver is set, the U-Net automatically assigns a cell to the transceiver. After setting transceiver parameters, you can set cell parameters.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver > Sitex_x. Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. Step 4 Set the properties of UMTS cells on the UMTSCell tab page in the displayed dialog box, as shown in Figure 6-6. For detailed description of parameters, see Parameters for Setting the Parameters of UMTS Cells.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
410
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Figure 6-6 UMTSCell
Step 5 Click OK. ----End
6.7.8 Interface Reference for Setting UMTS NE Parameters This section describes the parameters for setting UMTS NE parameters by using the U-Net.
Parameter for Setting UMTS Base Station Templates This section describes the parameters for creating base station templates or modifying the properties of base station templates. You can refer to this section when managing base station templates in the Station Template Properties dialog box.
Site Tab Page Parameter
Description
Name
Indicates the name of a base station template.
Support Type
Indicates the base station type. Macro indicates a macro base station, and Micro indicates a micro base station.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
411
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Parameter
Description
Use Altitude For Calculation
Indicates whether to manually enter the altitude of a site for calculation. If this option is selected, you manually enter the altitude of a site for calculation.
Hexagon Radius
Indicates the radius of a cell.
Comments
Description.
Transceiver area on the UMTS tab page Parameter
Description
Transceivers
Indicates the number of transceivers in a site.
Comments
Description.
Model
Indicates the type of an antenna.
Site Equipment
Indicates the site equipment.
First Sector Azimuth
Indicates the azimuth of the first antenna.
Mechanical Downtilt
Indicates the mechanical downtilt.
Electrical Downtilt
Indicates the electrical downtilt.
Height/Ground(m)
Indicates the height of an antenna.
Transmission in Number of Antennas area
Number of transmission antennas on a base station.
Reception in Number of Antennas area
Number of receive antennas on a base station.
Transmission in Number of Antenna Ports area
Number of transmission antenna ports.
Total Loss(DL)
Indicates the total downlink loss.
Total Loss(UL)
Indicates the total uplink loss.
General tab in the Cell area on the UMTS tab page
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Parameter
Description
Max Power(dBm)
Indicates the maximum transmit power.
Pilot Power(dBm)
Indicates the transmit power of pilot channels.
CCH Power(dBm)
Indicates the transmit power of the CCH.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
412
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Parameter
Description
Available HSDPA Power (dBm)
Indicates the maximum available power of HSDPA.
Actual Power(dBm)
Indicates the actual transmit power.
HS-SCCH Power(dBm)
Indicates the power of the HS-SCCH.
Target Load(DL)
Indicates the target load on the downlink. The value range is from 0 to 1.
Target Load(UL)
Indicates the target load on the uplink. The value range is from 0 to 1.
Max Load(DL)
Indicates the maximum load of HSDPA on the downlink. The value range is from 0 to 1.
Max Load(UL)
Indicates the maximum load of HSUPA on the uplink. The value range is from 0 to 1.
SHO Threshold(dB)
Indicates the threshold of the soft handover.
SHO Reserve Ratio
Indicates the soft handoff reserve ratio. The value range is from 0 to 1. Uplink: the ratio of load reserved for soft handoff to the total uplink load. Downlink: the ratio of load reserved for soft handoff to the total downlink load.
Max Noise Rise
Indicates the upper limit of the noise rise.
UL Rake Factor
Indicates the combination efficiency of a Rake transceiver. The value range is from 0 to 1.
Frequency Band
Indicates a frequency band.
ARFCN
Indicates the downlink ARFCN.
Reception
Indicates a receiver.
Cell Type
Indicates the type of a cell. The parameter value can be R99, HSUPA, HSDPA, R99AndHSUPA, or R99AndHSDPA.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
413
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Propagation Models Tab in the Cell Area on the UMTS Tab Page Parameter
Description
Propagation Model
Indicates a propagation model. l When the parameter is present in the Main Matrix area, it indicates the main propagation model. l When the parameter is present in the Extended Matrix area, it indicates the extended propagation model.
Radius(m)
Indicates the calculation radius of a propagation model.
Resolution(m)
Indicates the calculation resolution of a propagation model.
Parameters for Setting the Parameters of UMTS Cells This section describes the parameters for creating a UMTS cell or modifying the properties of a UMTS cell. Table 6-11 Parameters on the UMTSCell tab page Parameter
Description
Name
Indicates the name of a cell.
Active
Indicates whether to activate the current cell.
Frequency Band
Indicates a frequency band.
ARFCN
Indicates the downlink ARFCN.
Target Load(DL)
Indicates the target load on the downlink. The value range is from 0 to 1.
Target Load(UL)
Indicates the target load on the uplink. The value range is from 0 to 1.
Cell Type
Indicates the type of a cell. The cell type can be R99, HSUPA, HSDPA, R99 And HSUPA, or R99 And HSDPA.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Available HSDPA Power(dBm)
Indicates the maximum available power of HSDPA.
CCH Power(dBm)
Indicates the transmit power of the CCH.
Code Allocation Ratio
Indicates the static allocation ratio of codes of a cell. The value range is from 0 to 1.
Dynamic HSDPA Power
Indicates whether dynamically allocated power is used for the HSDPA.
HSDPA Code Allocation
Indicates the allocation mode of codes of a cell.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
414
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Parameter
Description
HS-SCCH Power(dBm)
Indicates the power of the HS-SCCH.
Max Load(DL)
Indicates the maximum load of HSDPA on the downlink. The value range is from 0 to 1.
Max Noise Rise
Indicates the upper limit of the noise rise.
Max Power(dBm)
Indicates the maximum transmit power.
Max Load(UL)
Indicates the maximum load of HSDPA on the uplink. The value range is from 0 to 1.
Pilot Power(dBm)
Indicates the transmit power of pilot channels.
Power Allocation Ratio
Indicates the static power allocation ratio of a cell. The value range is from 0 to 1.
Reception
Indicates a receiver.
SHO Reserve Ratio
Indicates the soft handoff reserve ratio. The value range is from 0 to 1. Uplink: the ratio of load reserved for soft handoff to the total uplink load. Downlink: the ratio of load reserved for soft handoff to the total downlink load.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
SHO Threshold(dB)
Indicates the threshold of the soft handover.
Actual Power(dBm)
Indicates the actual transmit power.
UL Rake Factor
Indicates the combination efficiency of a Rake transceiver. The value range is from 0 to 1.
Load Factor(UL)
Indicates the total uplink load. The value range is from 0 to 1.
HSUPA Load(UL)
Indicates the HSUPA uplink load. The value range is from 0 to 1.
Scrambling Code
Indicates the scrambling code assigned to a cell.
Scrambling Code Reuse Distance(km)
Indicates the reuse distance of a scrambling code.
Scrambling Code Reuse Tier
Indicates the number of reuse layers of a scrambling code.
Forbidden Scrambling Code
Indicates a forbidden scrambling code.
Scene
Indicates the scenario of a cell.
MCC
Indicates the mobile country code (MCC).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
415
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Parameter
Description
MNC
Indicates the mobile network code (MNC).
CI
Indicates the ID of a cell.
CGI
Indicates the cell global identification (CGI).
RNC ID
Indicates the ID of an RNC.
LAC
Indicates a location area code.
RNC Name
Indicates the name of a radio network controller.
Status
Indicates the swapping status. l NONE: Indicates there is no cell in swapping state. l NEW: Indicates a new cell. l EXISTED: Indicates a live network cell. The default value is NONE.
Vendor
Indicates the device manufacturer.
Comments
Remarks
Neighbors list
Indicates a list of neighboring cells.
Propagation Models
Indicates a propagation model.
Table 6-12 Parameters on the General tab page Parameter
Description
Name
Name of a transceiver. This parameter uniquely identifies a transceiver.
Site
Name of the site that a transceiver belongs to. You can click New to create a site.
Hexagon Radius(m)
Radius of the hexagon indicating the cell coverage. The value ranges from 1 to 100000. l If a transceiver is directly added in the main window, the radius of the hexagon is the value of Hexagon Radius (m) in the current site template by default. l If a transceiver is added under the Transceiver node in the navigation tree, the value of this parameter is empty by default.
Transmission in the Number of Antennas area
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Number of transmission antennas on a base station.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
416
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Parameter
Description
Reception in the Number of Antennas area
Number of receive antennas on a base station.
Transmission in the Number of Antenna Ports area
Number of transmission antenna ports.
Comments
Comments on a transceiver.
Table 6-13 Parameters on the Antenna Config tab page Parameter
Description
Antenna ID
ID of an antenna for a transceiver. The ID of each antenna must be unique for a transceiver.
Power Ratio
Power allocation ratio. The value ranges from 0 to 1.
Sector ID
ID of a sector. This parameter uniquely identifies an antenna.
Dx(m)
Offset of the antenna relative to the site that the antenna belongs to in the X direction. The unit is meter.
Dy(m)
Offset of the antenna relative to the site that the antenna belongs to in the Y direction. The unit is meter.
Longitude
Longitude of an antenna.
Latitude
Latitude of an antenna.
Main Antenna
Main antenna of a transceiver. Each cell has only one main antenna.
Azimuth
Antenna azimuth. The value ranges from 0 to 360. The unit is degree.
Antenna
Type of an antenna. The default value is determined based on the configuration of the system antennas. In normal cases, the default antenna type is the type of the first antenna.
Mechanical Downtilt
Mechanical downtilt of an antenna. The unit is degree.
Electrical Downtilt
Electrical downtilt of an antenna. The unit is degree.
Height(m)
Height of an antenna. The unit is meter.
RRU ID
l ID of a remote radio unit (RRU). l The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 0. l If the value of RRU ID differs among the antennas for a transceiver, the cell served by the transceiver is a single frequency network (SFN) cell. In this case, you can configure only one cell for this transceiver.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
417
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Parameter
Description
Equipment
Equipment properties. For details, see Table 6-14.
Table 6-14 Parameters in the Equipment Configuration dialog box Parameter
Description
Input Total Loss
l If you select the check box, you need to manually type the total loss. l If you clear the check box, the U-Net calculates the total loss.
Site Equipment TMA
Indicates the site equipment. Tower-mounted amplifier (TMA). You can click modify its properties.
Feeder
Antenna feeder. You can click
to
to modify its properties.
Feeder Length(m)
Length of a feeder. You need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
Miscellaneous Loss(dB)
Miscellaneous loss. You need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
JumpLoss Ant-TMA(dB)
Jumper loss between the TMA and the antenna port. You need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
JumpLoss Ant-BS(dB)
Jumper loss between the top of cabinet and the antenna port. You need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
JumpLoss TMA-BS(dB)
Jumper loss between the TMA and the top of cabinet. You need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
Total Loss(dB)
Total loss, including the TMA, feeder, jumper, and miscellaneous loss. You need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
6.8 UMTS Prediction By calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage and channel quality.
6.8.1 Basic Knowledge of UMTS Prediction This chapter describes the basic knowledge of prediction, including the formula for calculating link loss, method for determining the calculation area, meaning of prediction counters, and Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
418
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
prediction algorithm. You can develop a better understanding of the prediction function by learning the basic knowledge.
Basic Knowledge of UMTS Prediction Counters The U-Net can be used to predict multiple UMTS counters. This section describes the meanings of the UMTS prediction counters. NOTE
Certain counters are not displayed by default. To enable the U-Net to display these counters, select the corresponding network technology, right-click a counter type and then choose More Coverage from the shortcut menu.
Table 6-15 lists the UMTS prediction counters supported by the U-Net. Table 6-15 Description of UMTS prediction counters Category
Counter
Description
Coverage by Signal Level (DL)
CPICH RSCP
Indicates Received Signal Code Power (RSCP) of the Common Pilot Channel (CPICH).
Best Server
Indicates the best serving cell that has the highest CPICH RSCP on a specified frequency.
UE RSSI
Indicates the total receive power of a UE on the entire bandwidth.
Handover Area
Indicates whether an area is a handover area.
Pilot Pollution
Indicates the pilot pollution
Number Of Service
Indicates the number of cells that can be added to the active set.
DL Noise Rise
Indicates the downlink noise rise.
Ec/Io
CPICH Ec/Io
Indicates the Ec/Io of the pilot signal received by a UE.
Eb/Nt(UL)
UL DPCH Eb/Nt
Indicates the Eb/Nt of the uplink DPCH.
Eb/Nt(DL)
DL DPCH Eb/Nt
Indicates the Eb/Nt of the downlink DPCH.
HSDPA Coverage
HS PDSCH Ec/Nt
Indicates the Ec/Nt of the signals received on the HSPDSCH.
HSDPA CQI
Indicates the HSDPA channel quality indicator.
HSDPA Peak Throughput
Indicates the HSDPA peak throughput.
E DPDCH Ec/Nt
Indicates the Eb/Nt of the E-DPDCH.
HSUPA Peak Throughput
Indicates the HSUPA peak throughput.
Coverage Area Analysis
HSUPA Coverage
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
419
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Procedure for Performing Prediction This section describes the procedure for performing prediction through the U-Net. Figure 6-7 shows the procedure for performing prediction through the U-Net. Figure 6-7 Procedure of prediction
UMTS Prediction Algorithm By calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage and channel quality. This section describes the UMTS prediction algorithm through a schematic chart. Figure 6-8 shows the schematic chart of the UMTS prediction algorithm.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
420
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Figure 6-8 UMTS prediction algorithm
Table 6-16 describes the processes shown in Figure 6-8. Table 6-16 Description of the UMTS prediction algorithm Procedur e
Operation
Description
1
Traversing all the cells
Determine whether the cells in the calculation area are activated. If a cell is not activated, the counters of this cell are not calculated.
2
Obtaining the path loss matrix
l If the path loss matrix does not exist, calculate the path loss matrix. l If the path loss matrix already exists, it can be obtained directly.
3
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Querying the antenna gain, equipment loss, and penetration loss
You can enable the U-Net to consider the antenna gain, equipment loss, and penetration loss during the calculation of link loss.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
421
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Procedur e
Operation
Description
4
Predicting slow fading by using the shadow fading margin
To ensure that a base station can cover cell edges with a certain probability. A certain amount of power of the base station is reserved to prevent shadow fading. The reserved power is called shadow fading margin. During the calculation of link loss, you can enable the U-Net to take the shadow fading margin into account.
5
Calculating the CPICH RSCP to determine the primary serving cell
CPICH RSCP indicates the Received Signal Code Power (RSCP) of the Common Pilot Channel (CPICH). It is an important counter used for prediction. You can determine the primary serving cell based on this counter.
6
Calculating the power of interference noise to determine the handover area.
You can calculate the power of interference and noise and determine the handover area.
7
Calculating counters of traffic channels and common channels based on the Bin points
You must calculate the mandatory counters and custom counters based on the BIN.
8
Displaying prediction results
The U-Net displays the prediction results in different colors in the window and provides a prediction report.
Basic Knowledge of Link Loss Link loss refers to the loss on the entire link from the transmitter to the receiver. When calculating link loss, the U-Net considers various loss factors such as path loss, equipment loss, and shadow fading. Loss factors of the uplink are different from loss factors of the downlink. The formulas for calculating uplink loss and downlink loss are as follows: l
Uplink loss = Loss caused by the human body + Feeder loss of the terminal - Antenna gain of the terminal + Antenna attenuation of the terminal + Path loss + Shadow fading + Penetration loss - Antenna gain of the base station + Total loss of the base station
l
Downlink loss = Loss caused by the human body + Feeder loss of the terminal - Antenna gain of the terminal + Antenna attenuation of the terminal + Path loss + Shadow fading + Penetration loss - Antenna gain of the base station + Total loss of the base station
The difference between the two formulas are as follows: The uplink has TMA gains which are included into the antenna gain of the base station in calculation. The downlink has TMA loss which is included into the total loss of the base station. Table 6-17 describes the meanings of factors in the formulas.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
422
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Table 6-17 Meanings of factors in the formulas Factor
Meaning
Loss caused by the human body
Loss of transmit or receive power of the mobile station (MS) due to the shielding or absorption of the human body.
Feeder loss of a terminal
Loss of the feeder on a terminal.
Antenna gain of a terminal
Gain of the antenna on a terminal.
Antenna fading of a terminal
Fading of the antenna on a terminal.
Path loss
Loss on the path between the transmit antenna and the receive antenna, which excludes the antenna gain and shadow fading.
Shadow fading
When an electromagnetic wave is blocked by fluctuant terrains, buildings, or vegetation areas in the propagation path, the shadow of the magnetic field exits. When an MS travels through the shadow of different barriers, the received signal strength decreases, and the field strength at the receiving antenna changes. In this case, fading is generated. This fading is called shadow fading.
Penetration loss
Loss that is caused when signals travel through buildings, vehicles, and leaves.
Antenna gain of a base station
Gain of the antenna on a base station.
Total loss of the base station
Power loss that is caused when signals travel through all the TMAs, feeders (including the main feeder, jumpers, and lightning arresters), and connectors
6.8.2 Calculating Path Loss The path loss refers to the loss of strength of signals transmitted from a TX end to an RX end. You must calculate the path loss because it is an input required for prediction. The U-Net automatically calculates the path loss and generates a .loss file for each cell. Alternatively, you can manually calculate the path loss before performing the prediction. This section describes how to manually calculate the path loss.
Prerequisites l
Base stations (sites and cells) are available.
l
Propagation models are assigned to cells.
Context You can manually calculate the path loss in calculation or force calculation mode. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
423
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
l
Calculation – If you calculate the path loss for the first time, that is, if no path loss matrix file is available, the U-Net calculates the path loss matrix of each cell. Afterwards, the U-Net checks the validity of calculation results and updates the results. – If path loss matrices are available but the parameters related to radio data and calculation area are modified, the path loss matrices of some cells may become invalid. In this case, the U-Net calculates only these invalid path loss matrices again.
l
Force calculation If path loss matrices are available, the U-Net deletes all the matrices regardless of the validity and calculates the path loss matrix of each cell again. Afterwards, the U-Net checks the validity of calculation results and updates the results.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver. Step 3 Select a calculation mode to calculate the path loss of all cells on the Transceiver node. If you need to...
Then...
Calculate
Right-click and choose Calculation > Calculate Path Loss Matrices from the shortcut menu.
Calculate forcibly
Right-click and choose Calculation > Force Calculate Path Loss Matrices from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 If you have not saved the project file, save it as prompted. The U-Net automatically creates a Project Name.losses folder that saves the information about the path loss matrix and an .ipl project file in the specified save path. Afterwards, the U-Net starts calculating the path loss. Step 5 Query the calculation results After the calculation is complete, the calculation results will be automatically saved in the Project Name.losses folder that saves the project file. Click
to stop ongoing calculations.
Step 6 Optional: Check the progress of path loss calculation In the Event Viewer docked window, query the start time and end time of path loss on the Event Viewer tab page and the progress of the path loss calculation on the Task tab page, as shown in Figure 6-9.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
424
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Figure 6-9 Event Viewer
----End
Follow-up Procedure The MCL with the default value of 70 dB indicates the minimum path loss between the base station and the terminal or between one terminal and another terminal. If you want to change the default value of the MCL, modify the LinkLossConfig.xml file in the U-Net installation directory.
6.8.3 Setting Shadow Fading Standard Deviation During the network prediction, the standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be set for certain prediction counters.
Context l
In the LTE-FDD network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be set for the following predication counters: DL RS SINR, DL RSRQ, Geometry, PBCH SINR, PCFICH SINR, PDCCH SINR, PRACH SINR, PUCCH SINR, SCH SINR, PDSCH SINR, PUSCH SINR, PHICH SINR, and UL RS SINR.
l
In the LTE-TDD network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be set for the following predication counters: DL RS SINR, DL RSRQ, PDCCH SINR, PDSCH SINR, PUSCH SINR, UL RS SINR.
l
In the GSM network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be set for the following predication counters: Geometry, DL BCCH CIR, DL Service CIR, and UL Service CIR.
l
In the UMTS network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be set for the following predication counters: CPICH Ec/Io, DL DPCH Eb/Nt, HS PDSCH Ec/Nt, UL DPCH Eb/Nt, and E DPDCH Ec/ Nt.
l
In the GSM/UMTS network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be set for the following predication counters: Coverage By CIR.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
425
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Map > Clutter. Step 3 Choose Parameter Management from the shortcut menu. The Clutter Parameters Display dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Perform the following operations as required. If ...
Then ...
The map information is not imported
Click Default Value to change the default values of parameters under Model Standard Deviation and C/(I + N) Standard Deviation.
The map information is imported
Click Actual Value to change the actual values of parameters under Model Standard Deviation and C/(I + N) Standard Deviation.
NOTE
For the meanings of parameters under Model Standard Deviation and C/(I + N) Standard Deviation, see Parameters for Setting the Clutter Class Layer.
Step 5 Click OK. ----End
6.8.4 Creating a UMTS Prediction Group The U-Net calculates the prediction as per prediction group. Each prediction group consists of one or more prediction items. You can create prediction groups and modify the properties.
Prerequisites l
A U-Net project is already created.
l
The geographic data is imported.
l
The calculation area is created. For details about calculation area knowledge and the method for creating a calculation area, see 3.3.9 Creating Vector Objects.
Procedure Step 1 Optional: Setting common properties for prediction groups. Before creating coverage prediction groups, you need to set common properties for prediction groups so that new prediction groups have the common properties. 1.
In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Predictions.
3.
Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
426
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
4.
In the displayed dialog box, set the precision of prediction on the Predictions tab page. You are advised to set the precision of prediction to be the same as that of the propagation model.
5.
Set the height of receiver on the Receiver tab page.
6.
Click OK.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Predictions. Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu. See Figure 6-10. Figure 6-10 New
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, set prediction group name, whether to calculate immediately, and select prediction counters. For counter descriptions, see Basic Knowledge of UMTS Prediction Counters. Step 5 Click Next. Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, set the prediction group properties. For detailed description of parameters, see 6.13.1 Parameters for Creating UMTS Prediction Groups. Step 7 Click OK. Step 8 Optional: If you deselect Calculate Now in creating prediction groups, right-click the prediction group, and then choose Calculate from the shortcut menu after creating a prediction group. ----End
Follow-up Procedure After the prediction calculation is complete, you can recalculate KPIs, add or delete KPIs, and view detailed KPI result reports. For details, see 3.8.6 Managing the Prediction Result.
6.8.5 Viewing Coverage Prediction Results You can view the prediction result in the map window or view the statistics on various indicators by using the PDF or CDF diagram.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
427
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Procedure l
View a prediction result in the map window. For details, see Querying Prediction Statistical Results (on a Map).
l
View a prediction result by using the PDF or CDF diagram. For details, see Viewing Coverage Prediction Statistical Results (in a PDF/CDF Chart).
----End
6.8.6 Analyzing Prediction Results The U-Net supports the function of comparing similar predictions to identify the differences. This helps you to quickly know the impact of changes on the network.
Procedure Step 1 Create and calculate a prediction group. Step 2 View the prediction result and check whether any counter needs to be optimized. Step 3 Adjust the setting of the counter that needs to be optimized to improve the coverage. Step 4 Duplicate the prediction group. 1.
In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > first prediction group.
3.
Choose Duplicate from the shortcut menu.
Step 5 Calculate the duplicate prediction group. 1.
In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > copied prediction group.
2.
Choose Calculate from the shortcut menu.
Step 6 Compare the original prediction result and the new prediction result. 1.
In the navigation tree, choose Predictions.
2.
Choose Compare from the shortcut menu. The CDF Compare window is displayed.
3.
Select the counters from the drop-down list on the left. NOTE
l Coverage Area: The area that is actually covered by the counters. It is the area rendered by colors on the map window. l Calculate Area: The Polygon area that you select when creating a new prediction group
4.
Select the prediction groups from the pane on the left and the corresponding display colors.
5.
View the CDF comparison chart in the pane on the right.
----End
Example This section takes the antenna downtilt as an example to describe the function of comparison. The coverage of a cell in a prediction group is not good. Based on the analysis, the antenna downtilt may be improperly set. Perform the following steps to adjust the antenna downtilt. 1. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
In the Explorer window, click the Network tab. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
428
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver > Sitex_x.
3.
Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
4.
Click Antenna Config tab Page.
5.
Modify the value of Mechanical Downtilt or Electrical Downtilt.
After the downtilt is adjusted, you can recalculate the prediction group but cannot compare the two coverage predictions, that is, the prediction before and the prediction after the adjustment. Therefore, duplicate the existing prediction group before the recalculation. After the recalculation, you can view the coverage change in the map window. To know the detailed change, compare the change of counters by referring to Step 6.
Follow-up Procedure l
To save the CDF comparison chart, right-click the chart and choose Save Image As from the shortcut menu. The chart can be saved in .emf, .png, .gif, .jpg, .tif, or .bmp format.
l
To print the CDF comparison chart, right-click the chart and choose Print from the shortcut menu.
l
To copy the CDF comparison chart, right-click the chart and choose Copy from the shortcut menu.
6.8.7 Exporting UMTS Planning Results You can export and print prediction results in batches or export the detailed prediction result by Bin point.
Exporting Coverage Prediction Statistical Results in Batches After the prediction calculation is complete, you can select one or more counters and then export a statistical report on the prediction as a .csv file and a prediction map in .mif or .jpg format.
Context The method for exporting statistics for prediction results in batches for different network systems from the U-Net is the same. For details, see Exporting Prediction Results in Batches.
Exporting the Detailed UMTS Prediction Result by Bin Point After the prediction calculation is complete, you can export detailed prediction results of the Bin points in a specified area. The prediction results include the information about the longitudinal and latitudinal coordinates and counter values of the Bin points.
Procedure l
Export the detailed prediction results of Bin points according to the specified area. You can specify a calculation area and export the detailed prediction results of all Bin points in this area.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
1.
In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2.
Select the objects to be exported. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
429
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
l
If...
Then...
Export the detailed prediction results of a prediction group
In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx.
Export the detailed prediction results of a single counter in a prediction group
In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx > counter item.
3.
Choose Export BIN By > Polygon from the shortcut menu.
4.
In the displayed dialog box, select the area to be exported.
5.
Click Export.
Export the detailed result of a Bin point by pilot power. This function is applicable only to single-mode networks. You can specify the value range of the pilot power to export only the detailed result of a Bin point within the range. 1.
In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2.
Select the objects to be exported. If...
Then...
Export the detailed prediction results of a single counter in a prediction group
In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx.
Export the detailed prediction results of a single counter in a prediction group
In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx > CPICH RSCP.
NOTE
You can also set interval values in the properties of each preceding indicator.
3.
Choose Export BIN By > CPICH RSCP from the shortcut menu. – When you do not select the CPICH RSRP indicator when performing prediction calculation, you cannot export the detailed result of a Bin point by pilot power. – The dialog box displayed lists the value segments of the selected KPI, the coverage area of the selected value segment, the percentage of the coverage area, and the cumulative percentage of the coverage area.
4.
In the displayed dialog box, set the value range of the indicator. The U-Net exports only the detailed prediction result of a Bin point within the specified range.
5. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Click Export. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
430
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
l
Export the top N records of the reception levels in each Bin point. This function is applicable only to single-mode networks. 1.
In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx > CPICH RSCP.
3.
Choose Export BIN By > Top Signal Level from the shortcut menu. The dialog box as shown in Figure 6-11 is displayed.
4.
Set the minimum exported value and the maximum reception level for the top N records to be exported.
5.
Click Export.
6.
After setting the export path, file name, and file format, export the data. NOTE
l To implement this function successfully, the selected indicators must include CPICH RSCP when you creating a prediction project, as shown in Figure 6-12. l To export multiple maximum reception levels in a Bin point, you need to set the value of TopNSignalLevel when creating a prediction project, as shown in Figure 6-13. This value specifies the number of top records for which the maximum reception level is calculated.
Figure 6-11 Export By Top Signal Level dialog box
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
431
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Figure 6-12 Indicator selection
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
432
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Figure 6-13 Property setting
----End
Follow-up Procedure You can navigate to the export path to view the exported contents. The exported contents mainly include: l
X-coordinate and Y-coordinate: If no geographic data is imported, the geodetic coordinates are exported.
l
Indicator values: It refers to the values of the selected indicators.
Printing Coverage Prediction Results in Batches After the prediction calculation is complete, you can print the prediction results of counters in batches. The results include prediction chart, geographic data, and base station data.
Context The method for printing prediction results in batches for different network systems on the UNet is the same. For details, see Printing Prediction Results in Batches. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
433
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
6.8.8 Verifying the Feature Database Based on DT Data The DT data can be used to rectify the coverage prediction group after its calculation is complete in order to improve the origin authentication and simulation degree of feature database. This helps to improve the locating precision. The rectification is not required if DT data is unavailable, and this procedure can be ignored.
Prerequisites l
The base station information involving the site, transceiver, and cell has been imported or created.
l
The coverage prediction for CPICH RSCP is complete.
l
The DT data file has been imported.
Context The method of rectifying the DT feature database in UMTS is similar to that in LTE-FDD. For detailed operations, see 3.8.10 Verifying the Feature Database Based on DT Data.
6.8.9 Exporting the Feature Database Data You can export the feature database data after the prediction calculation is complete for geographical locating.
Context For detailed operations of exporting the feature database, see Export the top N records of the reception levels in each Bin point in Exporting the Detailed UMTS Prediction Result by Bin Point.
6.9 Planning UMTS Neighboring Cells After creating NodeBs, you need to plan neighboring cells for the cells on the UMTS network. You can automatically plan neighboring cells in batches or manually plan neighboring cells for each cell one by one.
6.9.1 Basic Knowledge of Neighboring Cell Planning This section describes basic knowledge of neighboring cell planning. Proper neighbor relationships ensure that a UE at the edge of a serving cell can be handed over in time and that the handover gain is obtained. This helps to reduce intra-RAT interference, improve the QoS of the network, and ensure stable network performance. The purpose of neighboring cell planning is to properly configure neighbor relationships during the construction or expansion of a network. Planning neighboring cells is mandatory during initial construction of a network. Whether neighboring cells are properly planned has direct impacts on the network performance. Traditionally, neighboring cells are manually planned, which features low work efficiency. Currently, neighboring cells are automatically planned, which greatly improves work efficiency, reduces network construction cost, and accelerates network construction. Manual adjustments to the results of automatic planning can be made based on the actual situation. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
434
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
The U-Net provides the function of automatically planning neighboring cells. It supports neighboring cell planning for special scenarios that require repeaters or remote RF units. These features of U-Net ensure reliable planning results. The U-Net determines the neighbor relationships of a serving cell from the following aspects: l
If a cell is covered by the same base station as the serving cell, it is considered as a neighboring cell of the serving cell.
l
If a cell in the candidate neighboring cells has the highest score, it is considered as a neighboring cell of the serving cell.
l
The existing neighboring cell relationships are not changed.
l
Whether a cell is configured as a neighboring cell of the serving cell to ensure bidirectional neighbor relationship.
The U-Net provides the following neighboring cell planning algorithms: l
Topology: algorithm based on topology
l
Prediction: algorithm based on coverage prediction
l
Topology + Prediction: algorithm based on topology and coverage prediction The U-Net determines neighboring cells using the algorithm based on coverage prediction. If the neighbor relationships between the serving cell and some cells cannot be determined according to the algorithm based on coverage prediction, the U-Net determines neighboring cells using the algorithm based on topology.
Take UMTS as an example, neighboring cell planning and optimization of U-Net applies to the following scenarios: l
6.9.3 Initial Neighboring Cell Planning for a New Network
l
6.9.4 Neighboring Cell Replanning for a Partially Expanded Network
l
6.9.5 Replanning of Neighboring Cells from 2G Network to 3G Network
l
6.9.6 Checking and Optimizing Neighboring Cell Configuration NOTE
For CDMA networks, the U-Net supports only the algorithm based on topology for planning neighboring cells.
6.9.2 Importing Neighboring Relations This section describes how to import neighbor relationships. The U-Net provides the function of importing neighbor relationships, through which the existing neighbor relationships on the network can be imported into the U-Net. This helps to plan neighboring cells according to the actual situation of the network.
Prerequisites l
Base station information has been created or imported, including sites, transceivers, and cells.
l
The neighbor relationships to be imported must be collected into a neighbor relationship template. You can obtain the neighbor relationship template by exporting neighbor relationships.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
435
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Context l
Neighbor relationships of an LTE-FDD or LTE-TDD network are matched by the cell name.
l
Neighbor relationships of a GSM network are matched by cell name, LAC, and CI.
l
Neighbor relationships of a UMTS network are matched by cell name, RNC ID, and CI.
l
Neighbor relationships of a CDMA network are matched by MSC ID, BSC ID, BTS ID, Cell ID, Sector ID, ARFCN, and BNDCLS.
l
Neighbor relationships of a multi-mode network must be imported separately by network technology.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose neighbor planning > RAT. Step 3 Choose Import Neighbor Relations from the shortcut menu. The Import Neighbor Relations dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Select Update Blind Handover Flag as required. If Update Blind Handover Flag is selected, blind handover flags of cells are updated when the neighbor relationships are imported. NOTE
Update Blind Handover Flag is unavailable in GSM/CDMA, and therefore you do not need to select it.
Step 5 Click Browse to choose a neighbor relationship file. Step 6 Click OK. ----End
6.9.3 Initial Neighboring Cell Planning for a New Network This section describes how to perform neighboring cell planning for a new network. The U-Net provides the function of automatically planning neighboring cells. This function helps to plan the neighboring cells for each cell automatically, which reduces the number of handover problems due to improper neighboring cell configuration.
Prerequisites Base station information has been created or imported, including sites, transceivers, and cells.
Context On a new network, neighboring cell relationships do not exist. All neighboring cells are planned initially. The initial planning of neighboring cells includes intra-frequency neighboring cell planning, inter-frequency neighboring cell planning, and inter-RAT neighboring cell planning.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
436
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > UMTS. Step 3 Choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu. See Figure 6-14. Figure 6-14 Neighbor Automatic Allocation
Step 4 Set planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For details, see 6.13.2 Parameters for Planning Neighboring UMTS Cells. Step 5 Click Run. NOTE
You can right-click UMTS and choose Stop Neighbor Allocation from the shortcut menu to stop the current neighboring cell planning.
After the planning is complete, the planning results are displayed in the lower pane of the U-Net main window. For details, see 6.13.5 Parameters for Viewing Neighboring Cell Planning Results. ----End
Follow-up Procedure l
l
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Set the mode and colors for displaying neighboring relationships in the map window. 1.
In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > UMTS.
3.
Choose Display Option from the shortcut menu.
4.
In the displayed dialog box, set the mode and colors for displaying neighboring relationships in the map window. For details about the parameters, see 6.13.3 Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of Neighboring Cells.
5.
Click OK.
Export the other vendors' neighboring cell planning results. 1.
In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > GSM.
3.
Right-click and choose Export Other Vendor's Neighbor Relations > file export format from the shortcut menu. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
437
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning NOTE
The file can be saved in .xls or .xlsx format. For the other vendors' neighboring cell planning results, U-Net exports one file for each vendor to the specified directory.
After the neighboring cell planning is complete, You can check and optimize neighboring cell configuration. For details, see6.9.6 Checking and Optimizing Neighboring Cell Configuration.
6.9.4 Neighboring Cell Replanning for a Partially Expanded Network This section describes how to replan neighboring cells for an expanded network. The capacity of a network may reach a limit after the network works for a long period of time. Therefore, the network needs to be expanded. The neighboring cells in the expanded areas and adjacent areas need to be replanned.
Prerequisites Base station information has been created or imported, including network information before the expansion and added site information after the expansion.
Procedure Step 1 Import neighboring cell relationships on the network before the expansion. 1.
In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > UMTS.
3.
Choose Import Neighbor Relations from the shortcut menu. The Import Neighbor Relations dialog box is displayed.
4.
Select the Update Blind Handover Flag check box as required. If Update Blind Handover Flag is selected, blind handover flags of cells are updated when neighboring cell relationships are being imported.
5.
Click Browse to select a neighboring cell relationship file. NOTE
l Select and import neighboring cell relationship files containing neighboring cell relationships that are in the Added and No Change status. l The values of CellName and NeighborCellName need to be the same as the names of cells and neighboring cells on NEs respectively. The names of intra-RAT cells on NEs must be unique.
6.
Click OK.
Step 2 Set neighboring cell replanning parameters. 1.
In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > UMTS.
3.
Choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu. See Figure 6-15.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
438
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Figure 6-15 Neighbor Automatic Allocation
4.
Set planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For details, see 6.13.2 Parameters for Planning Neighboring UMTS Cells.
5.
Click Run.
After the planning is complete, the planning results are displayed in the lower pane of the U-Net main window.You can check and optimize neighboring cell configuration. For details, see6.9.6 Checking and Optimizing Neighboring Cell Configuration. ----End
6.9.5 Replanning of Neighboring Cells from 2G Network to 3G Network This section describes how to plan neighboring cells on a 3G network based on neighboring cell information on the 2G network after creating a 3G network.
Prerequisites l
A GSM/UMTS network has been created.
l
Base station information has been imported or created and the Cell Table files of 2G network and 3G network have been imported respectively.
Context The coverage area of 3G network is the same as that of the 2G network and the addresses of sites on the 3G network are the same as those on the 2G network. Therefore, neighboring cells on the 2G network are inherited on the 3G network. For the expansion of a 3G network, see 6.9.4 Neighboring Cell Replanning for a Partially Expanded Network.
Procedure Step 1 Import neighboring cell relationships on the 2G network. 1.
In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > GSM.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
439
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
3.
Choose Import Neighbor Relations from the shortcut menu. The Import Neighbor Relations dialog box is displayed.
4.
Click Browse to select a neighboring cell relationship file.
5.
Click OK.
Step 2 Set planning parameters. 1.
In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > UMTS.
3.
Choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu. See Figure 6-16. Figure 6-16 Neighbor Automatic Allocation
4.
Set planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For details, see 6.13.2 Parameters for Planning Neighboring UMTS Cells.
5.
Click Run.
After the planning is complete, the planning results are displayed in the lower pane of the U-Net main window.You can check and optimize neighboring cell configuration. For details, see6.9.6 Checking and Optimizing Neighboring Cell Configuration. ----End
6.9.6 Checking and Optimizing Neighboring Cell Configuration This section describes how to check and optimize neighboring cell configuration. When the neighboring cell planning in a scenario is complete, you can view, modify, export, filter, and collect the neighboring cell planning data. Based on the result of neighboring cell planning, you can create neighboring cell planning scripts and check missing neighboring cell relationships.
Prerequisites The neighboring cell planning is complete.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
440
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose neighbor planning > RAT. NOTE
You need to select RAT in the navigation tree so that neighboring cell relationships can be displayed in the map window, as shown in Figure 6-17.
Figure 6-17 Selecting the RAT
Step 3 Choose Open Neighbor Relations from the shortcut menu. Step 4 Perform the following operations as required. If you need to...
Then...
View neighboring cell relationships
In the main window of the U-Net, click a cell in the Cell Name area. Alternatively, click a certain cell in the map window, as shown in Figure 6-18. The neighboring cell relationships of the selected cell are displayed in the table in the Cell Name area and in the map window simultaneously.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
441
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
If you need to...
Then...
Manually adjust neighboring cell relationships
1. Select a source cell on the map. 2. Hold down Ctrl and click the cells except the source cell to add or delete unidirectional neighboring cell relationships. 3. Hold down Shift and click the cells except the source cell to add or delete bidirectional neighboring cell relationships. NOTE l If an added or deleted neighboring cell relationship is the same as an existing one, the check box in the Confirm column of the neighboring cell list is automatically selected or cleared. l If an added neighboring cell relationship is different from the existing ones, the neighboring cell relationship is added to the neighboring cell list and force is displayed in the Cause column. l If the number of neighboring cells for a cell reaches the maximum number, a confirmation dialog box is displayed when more neighboring cells are added. You can click Yes to add these neighboring cells, or click No to cancel the operation.
Export the result of neighboring cell planning
1. In the Cell Name area of the main window, Choose Export from the shortcut menu.. 2. In the displayed Export Neighbor dialog box, select an export mode. l Incremental Export: Export only the changed neighboring cell relationships. l Full Export: Export all neighboring cell relationships. 3. Click Export.
Delete neighboring cell relationships
1. In the Cell Name area of the main window, select a cell whose neighboring cell relationships need to be adjusted. 2. Clear the check boxes in the Confirm column for the selected cells in the table in the right pane.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
442
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
If you need to...
Then...
Filter neighboring cell relationships
1. In the Cell Name area of the main window, Choose Filter from the shortcut menu.. 2. Set filter criteria in the displayed dialog box. For details, see 6.13.4 Parameters for Setting the Audit and Filter Conditions Based on Neighboring Relations. 3. Click OK. The filtered cells are displayed in green in the map window, as shown in Figure 6-19. NOTE If you select the None option in the Filter dialog box, the color of filtered cells in the map window is cleared.
Remove the filter effect on neighboring cells
Right-click in the Cell Name area of the main window and choose Remove Filter from the shortcut menu. The table in the right pane switches back to the state when no filter criterion is used, and the color of filtered cells in the map window is cleared. NOTE Remove Filter is available only after filter criteria are used.
Audit neighboring cell relationships
1. In the Cell Name area of the main window, right-click the table and choose Statistic from the shortcut menu. 2. Set audit conditions in the displayed dialog box. For details, see Parameters for Setting Conditions for Checking Neighbor Relationships and Filtering Neighboring Cells. 3. Click OK. The neighboring cell relationship check report is exported to an XLS file. The exported file contains multiple sheets, and each sheet shows the result that meets certain audit conditions.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
443
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
If you need to...
Then...
Check missing neighboring cell relationships
1. In the Cell Name area of the main window, Choose Export from the shortcut menu.. 2. In the displayed Export Neighbor dialog box, select Incremental Export. l Incremental Export: Export only the changed neighboring cell relationships. 3. Click Export. Check the status of exported neighboring cell relationships. The neighboring cell relationships in the Added state are missing neighboring cell relationships.
Clear the neighboring cell planning result
1. Right-click in the Cell Name area of the main window and choose Clear Existed Neighbors from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 6-20. 2. In the displayed U-Net dialog box, click Y. The existing neighboring cell relationships are cleared. NOTE You can clear the existing result of neighboring cell planning so that the planning of neighboring cells next time will not be affected.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
444
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Figure 6-18 Clicking a cell in the map window
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
445
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Figure 6-19 Filter
Figure 6-20 clear existed neighbors
NOTE
You can create neighboring cell planning scripts based on the result of neighboring cell planning. The UNet is applicable to the planning of intra-frequency and inter-frequency neighboring cells under different RNCs. If inter-RNC neighboring cells are involved in the planning, type the RNC ID of each cell in the RNCID column in the table in the Cell area.
----End
6.10 UMTS Scrambling Code Planning This section describes UMTS scrambling code planning. Scrambling codes used for differentiating cells and users are important resources in the UMTS system. Scrambling code Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
446
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
planning of the U-Net supports multiple grouping functions such as horizontal grouping and vertical grouping. In addition, the scrambling code planning is applicable to multiple scenarios such as scrambling code check and network deployment.
6.10.1 Basic Knowledge of Scrambling Code Planning This section describes basic knowledge of scrambling code planning. The scrambling code planning is performed to allocate a primary scrambling code for each cell and different scrambling codes for the cells adjacent to this cell. The scrambling code planning ensures that no interference is generated between downlink signals of cells that are allocated the same frequency and scrambling code. Scrambling codes in the UMTS system are classified into uplink scrambling codes and downlink scrambling codes. Uplink scrambling codes are classified into long scrambling codes and short scrambling codes. The uplink scrambling codes are allocated randomly by the RNC for differentiating users. Therefore, the planning of uplink scrambling codes is not required. Downlink scrambling codes are used on UEs. Only long scrambling codes are used for differentiating cells. Downlink scrambling codes are divided into 512 groups. Each group consists of 16 scrambling codes. The first scrambling code in each group is the primary scrambling code. The other 15 scrambling codes in the same group are secondary scrambling codes. Secondary scrambling codes must be used together with the primary scrambling code. Figure 6-21 shows the procedure for scrambling code planning.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
447
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Figure 6-21 Procedure for scrambling code planning
The planning and optimization of UMTS scrambling codes are applicable to the following scenarios. Figure 6-22 shows the operation procedure. l
6.10.2 Scrambling Code Planning for a New or Expanded Network
l
6.10.3 Checking and Optimizing Scrambling Code Configuration
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
448
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Figure 6-22 Operation procedure for scenario-based scrambling code planning and optimization
6.10.2 Scrambling Code Planning for a New or Expanded Network This section describes how to use the U-Net to plan scrambling codes for a simple new network by setting the rules of reusing scrambling codes.
Context On the UMTS network, the U-Net supports the allocation of scrambling codes based on tier reuse, distance reuse, and maximum-usage or average allocation principles. The U-Net also provides multiple grouping functions such as horizontal grouping, vertical grouping, and customized grouping. Users can use the U-Net to allocate scrambling code groups based on cell types.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
449
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning NOTE
l Scrambling code planning based on tier reuse is available after neighboring cell planning is complete. l Maximum-usage allocation maximizes the reuse of scrambling code resources to increase the usage of scrambling codes. l Average allocation ensures that all scrambling codes are equally used.
Procedure Step 1 Optional: Check the allocation of scrambling codes in the existing cells. 1.
In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose UMTS Scrambling Code Planning.
3.
Choose Open Scrambling Codes. The Scrambling Code Display dialog box is displayed.View the scrambling codes of existing cells.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose UMTS Scrambling Code Planning. Step 3 Choose Set Scrambling Code Resource from the shortcut menu. See Figure 6-23. Figure 6-23 Set Scrambling Code Resource
Step 4 Set scrambling code resource in the displayed dialog box. For details, see 6.13.6 Parameters for Planning UMTS Scrambling Codes. Step 5 Click OK. Step 6 In the navigation tree, choose UMTS Scrambling Code Planning. Step 7 Choose Automatic Identify High-Site from the shortcut menu. Step 8 After the Height of High-Site is set, click Identify. The U-Net automatically selects the cells that meet the height requirement from the Normal cells and High_Site cells. The Scene of selected cells is set to High_Site, and the Scene of the other cells is set to Normal. Cells in the two scenarios are displayed in the Cell area. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
450
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
The Scene parameter in cell properties indicates the scenario of a cell. Step 9 Click OK. Step 10 Repeat Step 2. Step 11 Choose Scanning from the shortcut menu to check the usage of any scrambling code in cells of the entire network. Step 12 In the displayed dialog box, set the value of Scrambing Code from the drop-down list box. The value range is from 0 to 511. Step 13 Repeat Step 2. Step 14 Choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu. Step 15 Set parameters in the displayed Scrambling Code Plan dialog box. For details, see 6.13.6 Parameters for Planning UMTS Scrambling Codes. Step 16 Click Run. After the planning is complete, the planning results are displayed in the lower pane of the U-Net main window.. For details, see 6.13.7 Parameters for Viewing Planning Results of UMTS Scrambling Codes . NOTE
You can right-click UMTS Scrambling Code Planning and choose Stop Scrambling Codes Planning from the shortcut menu to stop the current scrambling code planning.
----End
6.10.3 Checking and Optimizing Scrambling Code Configuration After UMTS scrambling codes are planned, you can view, manually adjust, export, filter, and collect statistics about the planning results.
Prerequisites UMTS scrambling codes have been planned.
Context The scrambling code plan changes frequently on the live network due to causes such as network expansion. Therefore, the distribution of the current scrambling codes needs to be checked periodically to ensure that scrambling codes are properly distributed. The scrambling code planning is a process of checking whether scrambling codes are reused based on preset reuse tier and distance. The requirements of reuse tier and distance vary based on scenarios. Suburbs and rural areas require more reuse tiers and longer reuse distance.
Procedure Step 1 If the Scrambling Code Display window has been opened, go to Step 5. Otherwise, proceed to Step 2. Step 2 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Step 3 In the navigation tree, choose UMTS Scrambling Code Planning. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
451
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Step 4 Choose Open Scrambling Codes. The Scrambling Code Display dialog box is displayed. Step 5 Perform the following operations as required. If you need to...
Then...
Enable geographic display of scrambling codes
1. In the Explorer window, click the Network tab. 2. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver. 3. Choose Display Setting from the shortcut menu. The Display Field dialog box is displayed. 4. On the Label Display tab page, add Scrambling Code to the Selected Fields area.
Enable the cells using the same scrambling code as that of the selected cell in the planning result table to be displayed on the map
1. In the navigation tree, select UMTS Scrambling Code Planning. 2. Choose Display Option from the shortcut menu. 3. In the displayed Scrambling Code Display Option dialog box, set the mode and color for geographic display of scrambling codes. l Co Scrambling Code Cell: sets the color for the cells that use the same scrambling code with that of the selected cell. l Selected Cell Color: sets a color for the selected cell. l Link: identifies the scrambling code planning results by lines. l Cell: sets the color of the line corresponding to the scrambling code planning results. 4. Click OK. 5. Select a cell on the map or click a row heading in the planning result table. The cells that use the same scrambling code as that of the selected cell are displayed on the map at the same time.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Manually adjust scrambling codes
In the result window, change the values of Confirm Code.
Export the planning file of scrambling codes
Right-click in the result window and choose Export from the shortcut menu to export the scrambling code planning results as a file. For details about the parameters, see Parameters in the Data Export Dialog Box.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
452
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
If you need to...
Then...
Export MML script planning file for the scrambling codes
Export the scrambling code planning result data for generating the MML script file.
Collect statistics about the usage of scrambling codes
1. Right-click in the result window and choose Graphic Result from the shortcut menu. 2. In the Graphic Result window, set parameters. For details about the parameters, see Table 6-18. graphic and data areas display the statistical results. You can double-click a column heading in the table in the data area to sort the results.
Filter scrambling code planning results
1. Right-click in the result window and choose Filter from the shortcut menu. 2. Specify a cell range from the Filter Target drop-down list in the displayed dialog box. All indicates all the cells on the entire network, and Planning indicates the cells in the planning area. 3. Select filter parameters. For details about the parameters, see 6.13.8 Parameters for Filtering and Auditing Scrambling Code Planning Results. 4. Set ARFCN, which indicates the downlink ARFCN. NOTE If ARFCN is unavailable, you do not need to set it.
5. Click OK. The filtered cells are displayed green on the map. NOTE If you set the filtering criterion to None in the Filter dialog box, the color of the filtered cells on the map is cleared.
Remove the filter effect
Right-click in the result window and choose Remove Filter from the shortcut menu. The Scrambling Code Display window switches back to the status when no filter criterion was used in Filter, and the color of cells is cleared. NOTE Remove Filter is available only after filter criteria are set in Filter.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
453
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
If you need to...
Then...
Check the scrambling code planning results
1. Right-click in the result window and choose Audit from the shortcut menu. 2. Specify a cell range from the Audit Target drop-down list in the displayed dialog box. All indicates all the cells on the entire network, and Planning indicates the cells in the planning area. 3. Select one or more statistical parameters. For details about the parameters, see 6.13.8 Parameters for Filtering and Auditing Scrambling Code Planning Results. 4. Set ARFCN, which indicates the downlink ARFCN. NOTE If ARFCN is unavailable, you do not need to set it.
Clear the scrambling code planning results
1. Right-click in the result window and choose Clear Existed Scrambling Code from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 6-24. 2. In the displayed confirmation dialog box, click Yes (Y). The existing scrambling code planning results on NEs are cleared. NOTE After the planned scrambling codes are cleared, the new scrambling code planning will not be affected.
Table 6-18 Parameters in the Graphic Result window
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Parameter
Description
Main ARFCN
Sets the downlink ARFCN.
Use Times
Collects statistics based on the number of times scrambling codes are reused.
Min Reuse Distance(km)
Collects statistics based on the reuse distances of scrambling codes.
Min Reuse Tier
Collects statistics based on the reuse tiers of scrambling codes.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
454
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Parameter
Description
Cell Type
Sets the cell type. l Indicates the type of a cell (All, Indoor, High_Site, High_Speed_Way, Normal, Special, Outdoor, and Boundary). l This parameter is available only when Use times is selected.
Figure 6-24 Clear Existed Scrambling Code
----End
6.11 UMTS Measurement Reports Analysis This chapter describes how to analyze UMTS measurement reports by creating measurement report analysis groups. The U-Net geographically displays each counter, helping users analyze the live network.
6.11.1 Creating a Measurement Report Analysis Group This section describes how to create a measurement report analysis group and modify the group attributes. The U-Net can analyze measurement report analysis groups. Each measurement report analysis group contains one or multiple analysis items.
Prerequisites l
You have imported geographic data.
l
NodeBs are available.
l
The calculation area is created. For details about calculation area knowledge and the method for creating a calculation area, see 3.3.9 Creating Vector Objects.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
455
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Procedure Step 1 Click the Operation tab in the Explorer window. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose UMTS Measure Report. Step 3 Right-click UMTS Measure Report and choose New from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 6-25. Figure 6-25 New
Step 4 In the displayed UMTS Measure Report dialog box, select a computation area and set the data source for measurement report analysis. For details about these parameters, see 6.13.10 Parameters for Creating a Measurement Report Analysis Group. Step 5 Click OK to create a new measurement report analysis group. ----End
Follow-up Procedure l
Right-click the created task node and choose Calculate from the shortcut menu to calculate the measurement report analysis group.
l
Right-click the created task node and choose Stop from the shortcut menu to stop calculating the measurement report analysis group.
6.11.2 Geographically Displaying Measurement Report Analysis Results After calculating a measurement report analysis group, you can create network counters in the measurement report analysis group to view the live network analysis results displayed in color rendering mode in the map window.
Prerequisites l
You have created a measurement report analysis group.
l
You have calculated the measurement report analysis group.
Procedure Step 1 Click the Operation tab in the Explorer window. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
456
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose UMTS Measure Report > existing measurement report analysis group. Step 3 Right-click existing measurement report analysis group and choose New from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 6-26. Figure 6-26 New
Step 4 In the displayed Measure Report Study Types dialog box, select counters to be analyzed, as shown in Figure 6-27. For details about these counters, see 6.13.11 Parameters for Geographically Displaying Measurement Report Analysis Results.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
457
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Figure 6-27 Measure Report Study Types
Step 5 Click Next. Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, click OK or Apply to create measurement report analysis counters. NOTE
After measurement report analysis counters are created, the live network data analysis results of the counters are geographically displayed in the map window.
----End
6.12 UMTS Network Capacity Expansion Analysis Using the policy of network capacity expansion by splitting sectors, the U-Net can expand the UMTS network capacity to meet increasing capacity requirements.
6.12.1 UMTS Network Capacity Expansion Basics This section describes how to use the U-Net to perform network capacity expansion analysis. Before expanding the network capacity, you can use the U-Net to analyze the impacts of network capacity expansion on coverage and capacity and then adopt a proper expansion policy and determine the number of required resources. NOTE
The U-Net supports only UMTS network capacity expansion by splitting sectors.
Figure 6-28 shows the flow chart for analyzing network capacity expansion through the U-Net.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
458
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Figure 6-28 Flow chart
6.12.2 Creating a Capacity Expansion Analysis Group This section describes how to create a capacity expansion analysis group and modify the group attributes. The U-Net performs network capacity expansion analysis based on analysis groups. Each analysis group contains one or more analysis items.
Prerequisites l
The geographic data has been imported.
l
NodeBs are available.
l
The calculation area is created. For details about calculation area knowledge and the method for creating a calculation area, see 3.3.9 Creating Vector Objects.
Procedure Step 1 Click the Operation tab in the Explorer window. Step 2 Choose UMTS Network Expansion from the navigation tree. Step 3 Right-click UMTS Network Expansion and choose New from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 6-29. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
459
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Figure 6-29 New
Step 4 In the displayed Network Expansion Analysis dialog box, select a computation area, set a data source and policy for expansion analysis, and set algorithm parameters for soft handovers and MR-based traffic evaluation. For details about these parameters, see 6.13.12 Parameters for Creating a Capacity Expansion Analysis Group. Step 5 Click OK or Apply to create a network capacity expansion analysis group. ----End
Follow-up Procedure l
Right-click the created task node and choose Calculate from the shortcut menu to calculate the capacity expansion analysis group.
l
Right-click the created task node and choose Stop from the shortcut menu to stop calculating the capacity expansion analysis group. NOTE
l The time required for the calculation depends on the selected MR data size, computation area, and the selected expansion policy. The required calculation time is directly proportional to the MR data size, computation area, and expansion policy complexity.
6.12.3 Geographically Displaying Capacity Expansion Analysis Results After calculating a capacity expansion analysis group, you can create network counters in the capacity expansion analysis group to view the analysis results displayed in color rendering mode in the map window.
Prerequisites l
You have created a capacity expansion analysis group.
l
You have calculated the capacity expansion analysis group.
Procedure Step 1 Click the Operation tab in the Explorer window. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose UMTS Network Expansion > existing expansion analysis group. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
460
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Step 3 Right-click existing expansion analysis group and choose New from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 6-30. Figure 6-30 New
Step 4 In the displayed Expansion Study Types dialog box, select counters to be analyzed, as shown in Figure 6-31. For details about these counters, see 6.13.13 Parameters for Geographically Displaying Capacity Expansion Analysis Results.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
461
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Figure 6-31 Expansion Study Types
NOTE
You can check Initial, Final, and Variation analysis results for each counter.
Step 5 Click Next. Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, click OK or Apply to create capacity expansion counter analysis items. NOTE
After the analysis items are created, the expansion analysis results of the counters are geographically displayed in the map window.
----End
6.12.4 Checking Network Capacity Expansion Results This section describes how to check network capacity expansion results after calculating a capacity expansion analysis group. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
462
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Prerequisites l
You have created a capacity expansion analysis group.
l
You have calculated the capacity expansion analysis group.
Procedure Step 1 Click the Operation tab in the Explorer window. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose UMTS Network Expansion > existing expansion analysis group. Step 3 Right-click existing expansion analysis group and choose Result from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 6-32. Figure 6-32 Result
Step 4 In the displayed Result dialog box, check the network capacity expansion results. For details about these parameters, see 6.13.14 Parameters for Viewing Network Capacity Expansion Results. ----End
6.13 Interface Reference to UMTS Network Planning This section describes the interfaces and parameters for UMTS network planning by using the U-Net.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
463
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
6.13.1 Parameters for Creating UMTS Prediction Groups This section describes the parameters for creating a prediction group and setting the properties of a prediction group. You can refer to this section when creating a prediction group in the New Prediction Group dialog box or setting the properties of a prediction group in the Group Properties dialog box.
Parameters in the New Prediction Group Dialog Box Parameter
Description
Group Name
Name of a prediction group. This parameter uniquely identifies a prediction group. The U-Net provides a default name for each created prediction group in this parameter field.
Prediction Type
Prediction type.
Study Selected
Prediction counter.
Calculate Now
Whether to calculate each prediction counter immediately.
Parameters in the UMTS Group Properties Dialog Box Table 6-19 Parameters on the General tab page
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Parameter
Description
Name
Indicates the name of a prediction group.
Resolution(m)
Indicates the prediction precision.
Polygon
Indicates the area calculated in prediction.
Cell Edge Coverage Probability
Indicates the probability of cell edge coverage, that is, the probability that the receive signal strength is stronger than the specified threshold at the edge of a cell.
With Shadow
Indicates whether shadow fading is considered in the calculation.
Indoor Coverage
Indicates whether penetration loss is considered in the calculation.
DLFrequencyBand
Indicates the downlink frequency band.
ARFCN
Indicates the absolute radio frequency channel number (ARFCN).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
464
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Table 6-20 Parameters on the Condition tab page Parameter
Description
Signal Level(dBm)
Indicates the receive threshold of the downlink reference signal.
Terminal
Indicates a terminal type.
Service
Indicates a service type.
Mobility
Indicates a mobility type.
Table 6-21 Parameters on the Advance tab page Parameter
Description
DLDivGain
Indicates the downlink diversity gain.
MacroDivGain
Indicates the macro diversity gain.
MaxSpatialMultiplexingFactor
Indicates the maximum spatial diversity gain.
MinCPICHEcIo
Indicates the threshold of the minimum signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR).
OrthoFactor
Indicates the orthogonal factor.
PilotEcIoMargin
Indicates the minimum SINR of the pilot signal.
PilotPollutionMargin
Indicates the threshold of pilot pollution.
SHOThreshold
Indicates the threshold of the soft handover.
SpatialMultiplexingFactor
Indicates the spatial diversity gain.
TopNSignalLevel
Indicates the number of top receive levels to be ranked.
ULDivGain
Indicates the uplink diversity gain.
6.13.2 Parameters for Planning Neighboring UMTS Cells This section describes the parameters for planning neighboring UMTS cells.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
465
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Table 6-22 Parameters on the General tab page Parameter
Description
Methods Select
Selects a network planning scenario. l Topology: Plans neighboring cells based on network topology. l Prediction: Plans neighboring cells based on prediction results. This method applies only to outdoor base stations. l Topology + Prediction: Plans neighboring cells based on both the network topology and the prediction results.
Max Neighbor Distance(km)
Indicates the maximum neighboring cell distance. If the distance between two cells exceeds the specified value, the two cells cannot be planned as neighboring cells.
Planning Neighbor based on existed Neighbors
Plan neighboring cells based on the existing neighboring relationships. If this option is not selected, the existing neighboring relationships are deleted and neighboring cells are replanned.
Force Co-Site As Neighbor
Forcibly configures internal cells as bidirectional neighboring cells.
Co-Site Distance(m)
Configures two cells as bidirectional neighboring cells when the distance between the two cells is less than the value of this parameter.
Reference Existed Neighbors
Whether to reference the neighbor relationships of existing cells.
Reference Rules
Click Reference Rules and configure reference rules in the displayed window. l Source Cell Frequency Band: Indicates the frequency band to be planned. l Neighbor Cell Frequency Band: Indicates the frequency band of the neighboring cell. l Referenced Cell Frequency Band: Indicates the frequency band of the referenced cell. l Reference Neighbor Cell Frequency Band: Indicates the frequency band of the neighboring cell of the referenced cell.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Azimuth Difference (°)
Sets the azimuth difference between the cell to be planned and the cell used for reference.
Reference Site Distance(m)
Indicates the distance difference between the site of the cells to be planned and the site of the cells used for reference.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
466
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Parameter
Description
Consider Handover Statistics
Indicates whether to consider the handover data and the path for saving the handover data.
Planning Weight
Indicates the weight of the planning result upon neighboring cell ranking.
Handover Statistics Weight
Indicates the weight of the handover data upon neighboring cell ranking.
Resolution(m)
Indicates the precision for the calculation. You can set this parameter in the Prediction Parameter Setting window after you click Setting when the network planning scenario is set to Prediction or Topology + Prediction.
Handover Area Percent(%)
Indicates the proportion of the handover area. You can set this parameter in the Prediction Parameter Setting window after you click Setting when the network planning scenario is set to Prediction or Topology + Prediction.
Compute Shadowing
Indicates whether to calculate shadow fading. You can set this parameter in the Prediction Parameter Setting window after you click Setting when the network planning scenario is set to Prediction or Topology + Prediction.
Cell Edge Coverage Probability(%)
Indicates the probability of the cell edge coverage. This parameter is valid only when shadow fading is calculated. The value of this parameter is directly proportional to the value of shadowing fading. You can set this parameter in the Prediction Parameter Setting window after you click Setting when the network planning scenario is set to Prediction or Topology + Prediction. NOTE This parameter is valid when you select Compute Shadowing.
Compute Indoor Loss
Indicates whether to calculate penetration loss. You can set this parameter in the Prediction Parameter Setting window after you click Setting when the network planning scenario is set to Prediction or Topology + Prediction.
Min Signal Level(dBm)
Sets the minimum signal receive level. You can set this parameter in the Prediction Parameter Setting window after you click Setting when the network planning scenario is set to Prediction or Topology + Prediction.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
467
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Parameter
Description
Handover Threshold(dB)
Sets the handover area threshold. You can set this parameter in the Prediction Parameter Setting window after you click Setting when the network planning scenario is set to Prediction or Topology + Prediction.
Automatic generate Planning Cells
Automatically generates cells to be planned. NOTE You can select new cells and related cells as cells to be planned.
Area
Sets the planning area. l You can select all the cells in an area or click Filter to select only the cells to be planned in the area. By default, the full map is planned. l In the Filter dialog box, you can specify the contents to be found, set the search direction, and set whether to match cases. l Comments: You can filter cells based on the information defined in Comments.
Table 6-23 Parameters on the Intra-Frequency tab page Parameter
Description
Force Symmetry
Indicates whether to forcibly configure unidirectional neighboring cells as bidirectional neighboring cells. If this option is selected during network capacity expansion, the unidirectional neighboring cells are configured as bidirectional neighboring cells to adjust the original neighboring relationship table.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
New Cell-Indoor Cell-Max Outdoor Neighbor Number
Indicates the maximum number of outdoor neighboring cells planned for a newly established indoor cell.
New Cell-Indoor Cell-Max Indoor Neighbor Number
Indicates the maximum number of indoor neighboring cells planned for a newly established indoor cell.
New Cell-Outdoor Cell-Max Outdoor Neighbor Number
Indicates the maximum number of outdoor neighboring cells planned for a newly established outdoor cell.
New Cell-Outdoor Cell-Max Indoor Neighbor Number
Indicates the maximum number of indoor neighboring cells planned for a newly established outdoor cell.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
468
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Parameter
Description
Existed Cell-Indoor Cell-Max Outdoor Neighbor Number
Indicates the maximum number of outdoor neighboring cells planned for an existing indoor cell.
Existed Cell-Indoor Cell-Max Indoor Neighbor Number
Indicates the maximum number of indoor neighboring cells planned for an existing indoor cell.
Existed Cell-Outdoor Cell-Max Outdoor Neighbor Number
Indicates the maximum number of outdoor neighboring cells planned for an existing outdoor cell.
Existed Cell-Outdoor Cell-Max Indoor Neighbor Number
Indicates the maximum number of indoor neighboring cells planned for an existing outdoor cell.
Table 6-24 Parameters on the Inter-Frequency tab page Parameter
Description
Inter-Frequency Config
Sets frequency band parameters and handover modes.
From
Sets the frequency of the source cell.
To
Sets the handover frequency.
Handover Type
Indicates the handover type. l Co_Sector: indicates the co-sector handover. l Inter_Sector: indicates the inter-sector handover.
The priority of coverage based inter- Indicates the priority of the coverage-based interfrequency handover frequency handover. Blind Handover
Indicates the blind handover.
Blind Handover Condition
Indicates the quality condition that triggers a blind handover. This parameter is valid when Blind Handover is set to True.
DRD ECNO Threshold(dB)
Indicates the Ec/No threshold of the directed retry. This parameter is valid when Blind Handover is set to True.
SIB11
Indicates whether to send commands in system information block 11 (SIB11).
IdleQoffset1sn(dB)
Indicates the cell offset used for the CPICH RSCP measurement value in cell selection or reselection when the UE is in idle mode. This parameter is valid when SIB11 is set to True.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
469
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Parameter
Description
IdleQoffset2sn(dB)
Indicates the cell offset used for the CPICH Ec/No measurement value in cell selection or reselection when the UE is in idle mode. This parameter is valid when SIB11 is set to True.
SIB12
Indicates whether to send commands in SIB12.
ConnQoffset1sn(dB)
Indicates the cell offset used for the CPICH RSCP measurement value in cell selection or reselection when the UE is connected. This parameter is valid when SIB12 is set to True.
ConnQoffset2sn(dB)
Indicates the cell offset used for the CPICH Ec/No measurement value in cell selection or reselection when the UE is connected. This parameter is valid when SIB12 is set to True.
New Cell-Indoor Cell-Max Outdoor Neighbor Number
Indicates the maximum number of outdoor neighboring cells planned for a newly established indoor cell.
New Cell-Indoor Cel-Max Indoor Neighbor Number
Indicates the maximum number of indoor neighboring cells planned for a newly established indoor cell.
New Cell-Outdoor Cell-Max Outdoor Neighbor Number
Indicates the maximum number of outdoor neighboring cells planned for a newly established outdoor cell.
New Cell-Outdoor Cell-Max Indoor Neighbor Number
Indicates the maximum number of indoor neighboring cells planned for a newly established outdoor cell.
Existed Cell-Indoor Cell-Max Outdoor Neighbor Number
Indicates the maximum number of outdoor neighboring cells planned for an existing indoor cell.
Existed Cell-Indoor Cel-Max Indoor Neighbor Number
Indicates the maximum number of indoor neighboring cells planned for an existing indoor cell.
Existed Cell-Outdoor Cell-Max Outdoor Neighbor Number
Indicates the maximum number of outdoor neighboring cells planned for an existing outdoor cell.
Existed Cell-Outdoor Cell-Max Indoor Neighbor Number
Indicates the maximum number of indoor neighboring cells planned for an existing outdoor cell.
Table 6-25 Parameters on the Inter-RAT tab page (available only in multi-mode neighboring cell planning)
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Parameter
Description
Total Max Number
Indicates the maximum number of neighboring cells.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
470
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Parameter
Description
Frequency Band
Indicates the frequency band to be handed over when the RAT is switched to GSM.
Min Signal Level(dBm)
Sets the minimum signal receive level.
Handover Threshold(dB)
Sets the handover area threshold.
6.13.3 Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of Neighboring Cells This section describes the parameters for setting the display properties of neighboring cells. Table 6-26 Parameters on the General tab page Parameter
Description
Display Links
Identifies neighbor relationships by using lines.
Display Cell Color
Identifies neighbor relationships in cell colors.
Fit Neighbor Cell Visible
Displays the neighbor relationships of a cell on the map after you select the cell in the neighbor relationship table.
Display Deleted Existed Neighbor
Displays the neighboring cells that are available on the live network but are currently deleted from the U-Net.
Selected Cell Color
Sets the color of the source cell.
Intra Frequency Neighbors
Displays intra-frequency neighboring cells.
Inter Frequency Neighbors
Displays inter-frequency neighboring cells.
Inter-RAT Neighbors
Displays inter-RAT neighboring cells.
Intra Technology Neighbors
Displays intra-RAT neighboring cells.
Table 6-27 Parameters on the Neighbor Display Color tab page
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Legend
Description
Confirm Intra Frequency
Sets the display color of unidirectional intra-frequency neighboring cells on the map.
Confirm Inter Frequency
Sets the display color of unidirectional inter-frequency neighboring cells on the map.
Confirm Inter-RAT
Sets the display color of unidirectional inter-RAT neighboring cells on the map.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
471
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Legend
Description
Deleted Intra Frequency
Sets the display color of unidirectional intra-frequency neighboring cells that are deleted from the live network on the map.
Deleted Inter Frequency
Sets the display color of unidirectional inter-frequency neighboring cells that are deleted from the live network on the map.
Deleted Iner-RAT
Sets the display color of unidirectional inter-RAT neighboring cells that are deleted from the live network on the map.
Add To Legend
Displays the neighbor relationships on the map.
Transparency
Sets the transparency of the color.
NOTE
The neighboring cell types displayed on the U-Net may be different in different network systems. You can view the meaning of the displayed neighboring cell type.
6.13.4 Parameters for Setting the Audit and Filter Conditions Based on Neighboring Relations This section describes the parameters for setting the conditions for checking neighbor relationships and filtering neighboring cells. Table 6-28 Parameter for setting the conditions for checking neighbor relationships and filtering neighboring cells
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Parameter
Description
Source Cell
Selects the source cell.
Intra-Frequency
Filters the intra-frequency neighboring cells.
Inter-Frequency
Filters the inter-frequency neighboring cells.
Intra-Technology
Filters the intra-RAT neighboring cells.
Inter-RAT
Filters the inter-RAT neighboring cells.
Average No. of Neighbors
Indicates the average number of neighboring cells.
Empty List
Filters the unconfigured neighboring cells.
Missing Co-Site
Filters the neighboring cells that belong to different sites.
Missing Symmetry
Filters the unconfigured bidirectional neighboring cells.
List > No:
Filters the neighboring cells whose number of neighboring cells is greater than the specified number.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
472
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Parameter
Description
Percentage of Reference Neighbors
Indicates the percentage of UMTS cells that share neighbor relationships with the GSM cells at the same site as the UMTS cells.
Same PCI
Filters the neighboring cells that use the same PCI. This parameter is available only for the LTE network.
With Deleted Existed Neighbor
Collects cells whose existing neighboring cells have been deleted.
None
Sets no filter criterion.
Highlighted on Geographic Interface
Determines whether to highlight filtered cells on the map.
This table provides all the parameters for checking neighbor relationships and filtering neighboring cells in each network system. Some parameters may be available only in a specific network system. Check the parameter description based on site conditions.
6.13.5 Parameters for Viewing Neighboring Cell Planning Results This section describes the parameters for viewing neighbor relationships. You can refer to this section when viewing neighboring cell planning results after the neighboring cell planning is complete. Table 6-29 Tab page description Parameter
Description
Intra-Frequency
Indicates intra-frequency neighboring cells.
Inter-Frequency
Indicates inter-frequency neighboring cells.
Inter-RAT
Indicates inter-RAT neighboring cells.
The tab page name varies according to the network technology. Read the description on the actual tab page. Table 6-30 Parameter description
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Parameter
Description
Neighbor Name
Indicates the name of a neighboring cell.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
473
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Parameter
Description
Cause
Indicates the reason for configuring a cell as the neighboring cell of the serving cell. l existed: Indicates the existing neighbor relationships on the network. l planned: Indicates the planned neighbor relationships. l force: Indicates the neighbor relationships manually added by users. l inherited: Indicates the inherited neighbor relationships. Indicates whether a cell is configured as the neighboring cell of the serving cell.
Confirm
If the option is selected, the cell is configured as the neighboring cell of the serving cell. If the option is not selected, the cell is not configured as the neighboring cell of the serving cell. Blind Handover
Indicates a neighboring cell for blind handover.
6.13.6 Parameters for Planning UMTS Scrambling Codes This section describes the parameters for planning UMTS scrambling codes. Table 6-31 Parameters on the Group Strategy tab page Parameter
Description
Vertical(64 codes per group)
Indicates that vertical grouping is used. Each group consists of 64 scrambling codes and there are a total of 8 groups.
Horizontal(8 codes per group)
Indicates that horizontal grouping is used. Each group consists of 8 scrambling codes and there are a total of 64 groups.
512 Codes(512 codes per group)
Indicates that all the 512 scrambling codes are in one group.
Customize
Indicates that the grouping mode can be customized. You can customize the grouping mode on the Group Strategy tab page.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Reserved The Last [] Groups
Reserves the last N scrambling code groups.
Reserved The Last [] Codes Per Group
Reserves the last N scrambling codes of each group.
Reserved The Last [] Codes
Reserves the last N scrambling codes.
Available Scrambling Codes
Available scrambling codes.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
474
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Parameter
Description
Reserved Scrambling Codes
Reserved scrambling codes.
Table 6-32 Parameters on the Cell Strategy tab page Parameter
Description
Cell Type
Indicates the type of a cell (Indoor, Outdoor, High_Site, High_Speed_Way, Boundary, Normal, Special).
Select Usable Group
Indicates the scrambling code groups used by the same type of cell.
Scrambling Code Reuse Tier
Indicates the number of layers for scrambling code reuse for the same type of cell.
Scrambling Code Reuse Distance
Indicates the scrambling code reuse distance for the same type of cells.
Table 6-33 Parameters on the General tab page Parameter
Description
Reuse Rule
Sets the rules for reusing scrambling codes. The value can be Distance, Tier, or Distance +Tier. The default value is Tier.
Allocate Rule
Sets the rules for allocating scrambling codes. The value can be Average or MaxUsage. The default value is MaxUsage.
Consecutive Allocate
Sets whether scrambling codes under one base station are allocated consecutively. If this option is selected, scrambling codes are allocated consecutively. This parameter is selected by default.
Group Different From Neighbor Site
Sets whether different scrambling code groups are allocated to neighboring base stations. If this option is selected, different scrambling code groups are allocated to neighboring base stations. This parameter is selected by default.
Allocate Different Scrambling Code for Cells in the Same Transceiver
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
If this option is selected, different scrambling codes are allocated to inter-frequency cells sharing sectors.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
475
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Parameter
Description
Delete Scrambling Code
Sets whether to delete the existing scrambling codes of cells. If this option is selected, the existing scrambling codes of cells are deleted.
Iteratively Generate Scrambling Code
Sets whether to generate scrambling codes by iterations. If scrambling codes fail to be allocated to cells when this parameter is selected, you can reduce the reuse distance by iteration based on the step defined by Distance Decending Percentage(%) to allocate scrambling codes until the allocation is successful.
Distance Decending Percentage(%)
Sets the percentage of the step for reducing the scrambling code reuse distance.
Area
Selects the area where scrambling codes need to be planned. l You can select all the cells in an area or click Cell Filter to select only the cells to be planned in the area. l If you select certain cells to plan the scrambling codes, the U-Net plans the scrambling codes for the selected cells by taking into account the existing scrambling codes allocation of other cells. l In the Filter dialog box, you can specify the contents to be found, set the search direction, and set whether to match cases. l Comments: Users can filter cells based on the information defined in Comments.
6.13.7 Parameters for Viewing Planning Results of UMTS Scrambling Codes This section describes the parameters for viewing the planning results of UMTS scrambling codes. You can refer to this section when viewing the planning results of UMTS scrambling codes in the Scrambling Code Display dialog box.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Parameter
Description
Cell Name
Indicates the name of a cell.
Existing Code
Indicates the existing scrambling code.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
476
GENEX U-Net User Guide
6 UMTS Network Planning
Parameter
Description
Suggest Code
Indicates the scrambling codes that are recommended for setting.
Confirm Code
Indicates the scrambling codes whose settings are confirmed.
Use Times
Indicates that the statistical information is collected by the number of times a scrambling code is reused.
Min Reuse Distance(km)
Indicates that the statistical information is collected by scrambling code reuse distance.
Min Reuse Tier
Indicates that the statistical information is collected by the number of layers a scrambling code is reused.
6.13.8 Parameters for Filtering and Auditing Scrambling Code Planning Results This section describes the parameters for filtering and auditing scrambling code planning results. Table 6-34 Parameters for filtering or auditing scrambling code planning results
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Parameter
Description
None
Indicates that no filter criterion is applied.
Allocation Failed Cells
Indicates the cells for which scrambling code allocation fails.
No Allocation Cells
Indicates the cells that are not allocated with scrambling codes.
Reuse Tier Open to open an existing .ipl project file. NOTE
Alternatively, double-click an .ipl project file to start and open the project.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
491
GENEX U-Net User Guide
7 CDMA Network Planning
7.3 Importing Geographic Data You can import geographic data in various vector and grid formats and set coordinate systems. You can also add points, lines, or polygons to create vector objects.The method for importing geographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is the same.
Context The method for importing geographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is the same. For details, see 3.3 Importing Geographic Data.
7.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands The U-Net enables you to calculate path loss between a transmitter and a receiver based on a propagation model. Then you can use the calculated path loss matrix to perform prediction.The method for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systems on the U-Net is the same.
Context The method for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systems on the U-Net is the same. For details, see 3.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands. For details about the parameters for setting the frequency band information, see Parameters for Setting Bands.
7.5 Adding a Device You can import or create antennas, create TMAs, feeders, or site equipment.The method for creating site equipment for different network systems on the U-Net is the same.
Context The method for creating site equipment for different network systems on the U-Net is the same. For details, see 3.5 Adding a Device.
7.6 Setting CDMA NE Parameters You can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station template to automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeaters separately.
7.6.1 Importing Base Station Information You can import a data file of base station to the U-Net. After that, the system automatically creates sites, cells, and transceivers according to the base station data. You can also export base station data in a project for easy viewing of site information, cell information, and transceiver information. For networks with different modes, the U-Net imports base station information in the same way. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
492
GENEX U-Net User Guide
7 CDMA Network Planning
Context For networks with different modes, the U-Net imports site information in the same way. For details, see 3.7.1 Importing Base Station Information.
7.6.2 Creating a Single Site This section describes how to create a single site. You can create a site or modify the properties of an existing site to obtain a new one. For networks using different radio access technologies (RATs), you can use the U-Net to create a single site in the same way.
Context For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a single site in the same way. For details, see 3.7.2 Creating a Single Site.
7.6.3 Setting a CDMA Base Station Template This section describes how to manage base station templates. You can create base stations by using the predefined templates of the U-Net. If the predefined templates do not meet your requirements, you can customize a base station template.
Procedure l
View base station templates. 1.
Select Template Management from the base station template drop-down list on the toolbar and open the Station Template Properties dialog box.
2.
The Available Templates area displays the currently available base station templates. Select the default template from the drop-down list next to Default. The name of the default base station template will be displayed on the toolbar of the U-Net main window. The names of other base station templates are available in the drop-down list. For example,
l
.
Create a base station template. 1.
Click Add. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed. Alternatively, click Duplicate to duplicate the selected base station template. Then, a new base station template is generated on the basis of the selected template.
l
2.
Set the properties in the base station template. For details, see Parameter for Setting CDMA Base Station Templates.
3.
Click OK.
View and modify properties of the base station template. 1.
Select a base station template in the Available Templates area.
2.
Click Properties. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed.
3.
View and modify the properties in the base station template. For details, see Parameter for Setting CDMA Base Station Templates.
4.
Click OK.
----End Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
493
GENEX U-Net User Guide
7 CDMA Network Planning
Follow-up Procedure You can create base stations based on a predefined base station template or a customized base station template. When a base station template is not required, you can select the template in the Station Template Properties dialog box and then click Delete to delete it. You cannot delete the last base station template.
7.6.4 Creating Base Stations in Batches The system supports creating a single site automatically or creating a series of base stations with the same property in batches. For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a base station automatically in the same way.
Context For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a base station automatically in the same way. For details, see 3.7.4 Creating Base Stations in Batches.
7.6.5 Creating Repeaters This section describes how to create repeaters. A repeater receives, amplifies, and forwards the RF carriers launched or transmitted in the uplink and downlink. A repeater includes two sides, that is, the donor side and the serving cell side. The donor side of a repeater receives signals from the donor transmitter. The signals may be carried by links of different types, such as radio links or microwave links. The serving cell side forwards the received signals. For networks of different types, the U-Net creates a repeater in the same way.
Context For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a repeater in the same way. For details, see 3.7.5 Creating Repeaters.
7.6.6 Creating a Transceiver This section describes how to create a transceiver. The U-Net combines the transceiver with cells. Before setting a cell, you must set the transceiver parameters. A transceiver supports a multi-mode network, that is, a transceiver can cover multiple cells. For networks using different radio access technologies (RATs), you can use the U-Net to create a transceiver in the same way.
Context For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a transceiver in the same way. For details, see 3.7.6 Creating a Transceiver.
7.6.7 Setting CDMA Cell Parameters This section describes how to set LTE-FDD cell parameters. After a transceiver is set, the UNet automatically assigns a cell to the transceiver. After setting transceiver parameters, you can set cell parameters. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
494
GENEX U-Net User Guide
7 CDMA Network Planning
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver > Sitex_x. Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. Step 4 On the CDMACell tab page of the displayed dialog box, set the properties of the CDMA cell. For parameter description, see Parameters for Setting the Parameters of CDMA Cells. Step 5 Click OK. ----End
7.6.8 Interface Reference for Setting CDMA NE Parameters This section describes the parameters for setting CDMA NE parameters by using the U-Net.
Parameter for Setting CDMA Base Station Templates This section describes the parameters for creating base station templates or modifying the properties of base station templates. You can refer to this section when managing base station templates in the Station Template Properties dialog box.
Site Tab Page Parameter
Description
Name
Indicates the name of a base station template.
Support Type
Indicates the base station type. Macro indicates a macro base station, and Micro indicates a micro base station.
Use Altitude For Calculation
Indicates whether to manually enter the altitude of a site for calculation. If this option is selected, you manually enter the altitude of a site for calculation.
Hexagon Radius
Indicates the radius of a cell.
Comments
Description.
Transceiver Area on the CDMA Tab Page
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Parameter
Description
Transceivers
Indicates the number of transceivers in a site.
Comments
Description.
Model
Indicates the type of the antenna on the transceiver.
Site Equipment
Indicates the site equipment.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
495
GENEX U-Net User Guide
7 CDMA Network Planning
Parameter
Description
First Sector Azimuth
Indicates the azimuth of the first antenna.
Mechanical Downtilt
Indicates the mechanical downtilt.
Electrical Downtilt
Indicates the electrical downtilt.
Height/Ground(m)
Indicates the height of an antenna.
Total Loss(DL)
Indicates the total downlink loss.
Total Loss(UL)
Indicates the total uplink loss.
Cell Area on the CDMA Tab Page Parameter
Description
Frequency Band
Indicates a frequency band.
Parameters for Setting the Parameters of CDMA Cells This section describes the parameters for creating or modifying the properties of a CDMA cell. Table 7-2 Parameters on the CDMACell tab page
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Parameter
Description
Name
Indicates the name of a cell.
Active
Indicates whether to activate the current cell.
Frequency Band
Indicates a frequency band.
Channel Index
Indicates a channel index.
MSC ID
Indicates the number of a mobile switching center (MSC) on the live network.
BSC ID
Indicates the number of a base station controller (BSC) on the live network.
BTS ID
Indicates the number of a base station on the live network.
Cell ID
Indicates the number of a cell on the live network.
Sector ID
Indicates the number of an antenna.
PN
Indicates the PN code assigned to a cell.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
496
GENEX U-Net User Guide
7 CDMA Network Planning
Parameter
Description
N*PN INC
Indicates the base of a PN code. The number of assigned PN codes is the multiple of the base.
PN GROUP
Indicates a PN code group.
Scene
Indicates the scenario of a cell.
Neighbors list
Sets the list of neighboring cells by clicking this button. Intra-frequency Neighbors indicates a list of intrafrequency neighboring cells.
Comment
Remarks.
Table 7-3 Parameters on the General tab page Parameter
Description
Name
Name of a transceiver. This parameter uniquely identifies a transceiver.
Site
Name of the site that a transceiver belongs to. You can click New to create a site.
Hexagon Radius(m)
Radius of the hexagon indicating the cell coverage. The value ranges from 1 to 100000. l If a transceiver is directly added in the main window, the radius of the hexagon is the value of Hexagon Radius (m) in the current site template by default. l If a transceiver is added under the Transceiver node in the navigation tree, the value of this parameter is empty by default.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Transmission in the Number of Antennas area
Number of transmission antennas on a base station.
Reception in the Number of Antennas area
Number of receive antennas on a base station.
Transmission in the Number of Antenna Ports area
Number of transmission antenna ports.
Comments
Comments on a transceiver.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
497
GENEX U-Net User Guide
7 CDMA Network Planning
Table 7-4 Parameters on the Antenna Config tab page Parameter
Description
Antenna ID
ID of an antenna for a transceiver. The ID of each antenna must be unique for a transceiver.
Power Ratio
Power allocation ratio. The value ranges from 0 to 1.
Sector ID
ID of a sector. This parameter uniquely identifies an antenna.
Dx(m)
Offset of the antenna relative to the site that the antenna belongs to in the X direction. The unit is meter.
Dy(m)
Offset of the antenna relative to the site that the antenna belongs to in the Y direction. The unit is meter.
Longitude
Longitude of an antenna.
Latitude
Latitude of an antenna.
Main Antenna
Main antenna of a transceiver. Each cell has only one main antenna.
Azimuth
Antenna azimuth. The value ranges from 0 to 360. The unit is degree.
Antenna
Type of an antenna. The default value is determined based on the configuration of the system antennas. In normal cases, the default antenna type is the type of the first antenna.
Mechanical Downtilt
Mechanical downtilt of an antenna. The unit is degree.
Electrical Downtilt
Electrical downtilt of an antenna. The unit is degree.
Height(m)
Height of an antenna. The unit is meter.
RRU ID
l ID of a remote radio unit (RRU). l The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 0. l If the value of RRU ID differs among the antennas for a transceiver, the cell served by the transceiver is a single frequency network (SFN) cell. In this case, you can configure only one cell for this transceiver.
Equipment
Equipment properties. For details, see Table 7-5.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
498
GENEX U-Net User Guide
7 CDMA Network Planning
Table 7-5 Parameters in the Equipment Configuration dialog box Parameter
Description
Input Total Loss
l If you select the check box, you need to manually type the total loss. l If you clear the check box, the U-Net calculates the total loss.
Site Equipment TMA
Indicates the site equipment. Tower-mounted amplifier (TMA). You can click modify its properties.
Feeder
Antenna feeder. You can click
to
to modify its properties.
Feeder Length(m)
Length of a feeder. You need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
Miscellaneous Loss(dB)
Miscellaneous loss. You need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
JumpLoss Ant-TMA(dB)
Jumper loss between the TMA and the antenna port. You need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
JumpLoss Ant-BS(dB)
Jumper loss between the top of cabinet and the antenna port. You need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
JumpLoss TMA-BS(dB)
Jumper loss between the TMA and the top of cabinet. You need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
Total Loss(dB)
Total loss, including the TMA, feeder, jumper, and miscellaneous loss. You need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
7.7 CDMA Neighboring Cells Planning After creating NodeBs, you need to plan neighboring cells for the cells on the CDMA network. You can automatically plan neighboring cells in batches or manually plan neighboring cells for each cell one by one.
7.7.1 Basic Knowledge of Neighboring Cell Planning This section describes basic knowledge of neighboring cell planning. Proper neighbor relationships ensure that a UE at the edge of a serving cell can be handed over in time and that the handover gain is obtained. This helps to reduce intra-RAT interference, improve the QoS of the network, and ensure stable network performance. The purpose of neighboring cell planning is to properly configure neighbor relationships during the construction or expansion of a network. Planning neighboring cells is mandatory during initial construction of a network. Whether neighboring cells are properly planned has direct impacts on the network performance. Traditionally, neighboring cells are manually planned, which features low work efficiency. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
499
GENEX U-Net User Guide
7 CDMA Network Planning
Currently, neighboring cells are automatically planned, which greatly improves work efficiency, reduces network construction cost, and accelerates network construction. Manual adjustments to the results of automatic planning can be made based on the actual situation. The U-Net provides the function of automatically planning neighboring cells. It supports neighboring cell planning for special scenarios that require repeaters or remote RF units. These features of U-Net ensure reliable planning results. The U-Net determines the neighbor relationships of a serving cell from the following aspects: l
If a cell is covered by the same base station as the serving cell, it is considered as a neighboring cell of the serving cell.
l
If a cell in the candidate neighboring cells has the highest score, it is considered as a neighboring cell of the serving cell.
l
The existing neighboring cell relationships are not changed.
l
Whether a cell is configured as a neighboring cell of the serving cell to ensure bidirectional neighbor relationship.
The U-Net provides the following neighboring cell planning algorithms: l
Topology: algorithm based on topology
l
Prediction: algorithm based on coverage prediction
l
Topology + Prediction: algorithm based on topology and coverage prediction The U-Net determines neighboring cells using the algorithm based on coverage prediction. If the neighbor relationships between the serving cell and some cells cannot be determined according to the algorithm based on coverage prediction, the U-Net determines neighboring cells using the algorithm based on topology.
Take UMTS as an example, neighboring cell planning and optimization of U-Net applies to the following scenarios: l
6.9.3 Initial Neighboring Cell Planning for a New Network
l
6.9.4 Neighboring Cell Replanning for a Partially Expanded Network
l
6.9.5 Replanning of Neighboring Cells from 2G Network to 3G Network
l
6.9.6 Checking and Optimizing Neighboring Cell Configuration NOTE
For CDMA networks, the U-Net supports only the algorithm based on topology for planning neighboring cells.
7.7.2 Importing Neighboring Relations This section describes how to import neighbor relationships. The U-Net provides the function of importing neighbor relationships, through which the existing neighbor relationships on the network can be imported into the U-Net. This helps to plan neighboring cells according to the actual situation of the network.
Prerequisites l
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Base station information has been created or imported, including sites, transceivers, and cells. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
500
GENEX U-Net User Guide
7 CDMA Network Planning
l
The neighbor relationships to be imported must be collected into a neighbor relationship template. You can obtain the neighbor relationship template by exporting neighbor relationships.
l
Neighbor relationships of an LTE-FDD or LTE-TDD network are matched by the cell name.
l
Neighbor relationships of a GSM network are matched by cell name, LAC, and CI.
l
Neighbor relationships of a UMTS network are matched by cell name, RNC ID, and CI.
l
Neighbor relationships of a CDMA network are matched by MSC ID, BSC ID, BTS ID, Cell ID, Sector ID, ARFCN, and BNDCLS.
l
Neighbor relationships of a multi-mode network must be imported separately by network technology.
Context
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose neighbor planning > RAT. Step 3 Choose Import Neighbor Relations from the shortcut menu. The Import Neighbor Relations dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Select Update Blind Handover Flag as required. If Update Blind Handover Flag is selected, blind handover flags of cells are updated when the neighbor relationships are imported. NOTE
Update Blind Handover Flag is unavailable in GSM/CDMA, and therefore you do not need to select it.
Step 5 Click Browse to choose a neighbor relationship file. Step 6 Click OK. ----End
7.7.3 Planning CDMA Neighboring Cells The U-Net provides the function of automatically planning neighboring cells. You can enable the U-Net to configure neighboring relationships for each cell automatically to reduce handover problems resulting from inappropriate neighboring cell configuration.
Prerequisites l
Base station information has been created or imported, including sites, transceivers, and cells.
l
In the case of capacity expansion, the existing neighboring relationships have been imported into the U-Net.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
501
GENEX U-Net User Guide
7 CDMA Network Planning
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > CDMA. Step 3 Choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu. Step 4 Set planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For detailed description of parameters, see 7.9.4 Parameters for Planning CDMA Neighboring Cells. Step 5 Click Run. After the planning is complete, the planning results are displayed in the lower pane of the U-Net main window. For detailed description of parameters, see Parameters for Viewing Neighboring Cell Planning Results. ----End
Follow-up Procedure l
l
Set the mode and colors for displaying neighboring relationships in the map window. 1.
In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > CDMA.
3.
Choose Display Option from the shortcut menu.
4.
In the displayed dialog box, set the mode and colors for displaying neighboring relationships in the map window. For details about the parameters, see 5.10.3 Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of Neighboring Cells.
5.
Click OK.
You can also view, filter, check, and export neighboring cell planning results. For details, see Managing the Result of Neighboring Cell Planning.
7.7.4 Viewing the Planning Result of Neighbor Cells This section describes how to manage the result of neighboring cell planning. After the planning is complete, you can view, filter, remove the filter effect on, audit, export, and modify neighboring cell relationships of all the cells in the network.
Prerequisites The neighboring cell planning is complete.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose neighbor planning > RAT. NOTE
You need to select the check box of RAT in the navigation tree so that neighboring cell relationships can be displayed in the map window.
Step 3 Choose Open Neighbor Relations from the shortcut menu. Step 4 Perform the following operations as required. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
502
GENEX U-Net User Guide
7 CDMA Network Planning
If you need to...
Then...
View neighboring cell relationships
In the main window of the U-Net, click a cell in the Cell area. Alternatively, click a certain cell in the map window, as shown in Figure 7-3. The neighboring cell relationships of the selected cell are displayed in the table in the Cell area and in the map window simultaneously.
Filter neighboring cells
1. In the Cell area of the main window, Choose Filter from the shortcut menu.. 2. Set filter criteria in the displayed dialog box. For details, see Parameters for Setting Conditions for Checking Neighbor Relationships and Filtering Neighboring Cells. 3. Select the box in front of Highlighted on Geographic. The filtered cells are displayed in green in the map window, as shown in Figure 7-4. NOTE If you select the None option in the Filter dialog box, the color of filtered cells in the map window is cleared.
Remove the filter effect on neighboring cells
Right-click in the Cell area of the main window and choose Remove Filter from the shortcut menu. The table in the Cell area switches back to the state when no filter criterion is used, and the color of filtered cells in the map window is cleared. NOTE Remove Filter is available only after filter criteria are used.
Audit neighboring cell relationships
1. In the Cell area of the main window, right-click the table and choose Statistic from the shortcut menu. 2. Set audit conditions in the displayed dialog box. For details, see Parameters for Setting Conditions for Checking Neighbor Relationships and Filtering Neighboring Cells. 3. Click OK. The check report is exported to an XLS file. The exported file contains multiple sheets, and each sheet shows the result that meets certain audit conditions.
Export the result of neighboring cell planning
1. In the Cell area of the main window, Choose Export from the shortcut menu.. 2. In the displayed Export Neighbor dialog box, select an export mode. l Incremental Export: Export only the changed neighboring cell relationships. l Full Export: Export all neighboring cell relationships. 3. Click Export. NOTE In the exported file of neighboring cell relationships, you can refer to the values in the CellPCI and NeighborCellPCI columns for the LTE network when creating MML scripts.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
503
GENEX U-Net User Guide
7 CDMA Network Planning
If you need to...
Then...
Delete neighboring cell relationships
1. In the Cell area of the main window, select a cell whose neighboring cell relationships need to be adjusted. 2. Clear the check box for the selected cell in the Confirm column of the table in the right pane.
Modify neighboring cell relationships
1. Select a source cell on the map. 2. Hold down Ctrl and click the cells except the source cell to add or delete unidirectional neighboring cell relationships. 3. Hold down Shift and click the cells except the source cell to add or delete bidirectional neighboring cell relationships. NOTE l If an added or deleted neighboring cell relationship is the same as an existing one, the check box for the selected cell in the Confirm column of the table in the right pane is automatically selected or cleared. l If an added neighboring cell relationship is different from the existing ones, the neighboring cell relationship is added to the neighboring cell list and the value of Cause for the cell is force in the Cause column. l If the number of neighboring cells for a cell reaches the maximum number, a confirmation dialog box is displayed when more neighboring cells are added. You can click Yes to add these neighboring cells, or click No to cancel the operation.
Export the X2 interface relationship data
This function is available only for the LTE-FDD network. The X2 interface relationship data can be exported only after the planning result is applied to each cell. 1. In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > LTE. 2. Right-click and choose Export X2 Relations from the shortcut menu. The Export X2 Relations dialog box is displayed. 3. In the Area area, set the area whose X2 interface relationship data needs to be exported. 4. Specify an export path. 5. Click OK.
Clear the result of neighboring cell planning
1. Right-click in the Cell area of the main window and choose Clear Existed Neighbors from the shortcut menu. 2. In the displayed U-Net dialog box, click Y. The existing result of neighboring cell planning is cleared. NOTE You can clear the existing result of neighboring cell planning so that the planning of neighboring cells next time will not be affected.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
504
GENEX U-Net User Guide
7 CDMA Network Planning
Figure 7-3 Clicking a cell in the map window
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
505
GENEX U-Net User Guide
7 CDMA Network Planning
Figure 7-4 Filter
----End
7.8 CDMA PN Code Planning The CDMA system adopts the spread spectrum communication technology to spread the spectrum of signals on forward and reverse links through PN codes. Therefore, proper PN code planning is of great importance for improving CDMA network quality.
7.8.1 Basic Knowledge of PN Codes Similar to the noise sequence, the pseudo-random number (or PN code) is a type of periodical binary sequence that seems to be random but actually is regular.
Significance of PN Code Planning In the CDMA system, the sectors are differentiated by PN code phase offset. The PN code offset phases are limited, and a maximum of 512 phases can be used. Therefore, PN code offset needs to be planned. If the reuse distance of PN code offset is too short or the propagation delay is too long, the propagation of the pilot signals in the air is delayed, compared with the terminal. If the transmission delay of pilot signals between two cells just compensates for the PN code time offset, errors occur when the terminal traces pilot signals. If an error occurs during the call process when the terminal identifies the system, the terminal will be handed over to incorrect cells, and call drop may occur.
PN Code Planning Scenarios The CDMA PN codes can be planned on the basis of network topology and in the following scenarios: co-PN RRU networking, co-deployment of outdoor macro base stations, indoor micro base stations, and remote RRUs, and repeater networking. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
506
GENEX U-Net User Guide
7 CDMA Network Planning
The PN code planning is applicable to expanded networks or new networks.
7.8.2 Planning PN Codes This section describes how to use the U-Net to plan PN codes. You must import a PN group before using this function.
Prerequisites PN group data has been obtained from customer representatives.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose PN Planning. Step 3 Right-click and choose Open PN Group from the shortcut menu. The PN Group dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Right-click in the dialog box, and choose Import from the shortcut menu. Step 5 Select a PN group file and import it to the U-Net. Step 6 Repeat Step 1 to Step 2. Step 7 Choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu. Step 8 In the displayed dialog box, set planned PN code parameters. For details about the parameters, see 7.9.1 Parameters for Planning PN Codes. Step 9 Click Run. After PN codes are planned, the PN Display dialog box is displayed. For details about the parameters, see 7.9.2 Parameters for Viewing PN Code Planning Results. ----End
Follow-up Procedure l
Show PN code relationships for sectors on the GIS. 1.
In the navigation tree, select the box in front of PN Planning.
2.
On the map, select a sector or click the head of a row in the planning result table. The system displays the sectors having the same PN code as the selected sector.
7.8.3 Checking PN Code Planning Results You can filter PN code planning results by specifying a threshold. This helps you to easily locate the base stations and cells that do not meet the specified thresholds.
Prerequisites PN code planning is complete. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
507
GENEX U-Net User Guide
7 CDMA Network Planning
Procedure l
Set criteria for checking PN code planning results. 1.
In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose PN Planning.
3.
Right-click and choose Open PN Table from the shortcut menu. The PN Display dialog box is displayed.
4.
In the dialog box, right-click and choose Audit from the shortcut menu. The Audit Form dialog box is displayed.
5.
Set the check criteria by referring to Table 7-6. The U-Net allows you to select multiple check criteria at a time. Table 7-6 Conditions for checking PN codes Parameter
Description
Data Source
Indicates the data source. l Existing: The PN codes already exist. l Suggest: The data after PN code planning is not applied to NEs.
6. l
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Min Distance
Indicates the minimum reuse distance.
Min Layer
Indicates the minimum number of reuse layers.
Min Score
Indicates the minimum reuse score.
Distance Scope (km)
Indicates the reuse distance scope.
Layer Scope
Indicates the reuse layer scope.
Score Scope
Indicates the reuse score scope.
Neighbour sectors used the same PN code
Indicates that the same PN codes exist between neighboring cells.
Click OK to export a check report.
Perform a 1way-2way check. 1.
In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose PN Planning.
3.
Right-click and choose 1Way-2Way > Check from the shortcut menu. The 1Way-2Way Check dialog box is displayed.
4.
Set the check criteria by referring to Table 7-7.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
508
GENEX U-Net User Guide
7 CDMA Network Planning
Table 7-7 1way-2way check criteria
5. l
Parameter
Description
ARFCN
Indicates the absolute radio frequency channel number (ARFCN).
Check 1-way Problem
Indicates that the 1-way check is performed.
Check 2-way Problem
Indicates that the 2-way check is performed.
Base on Existed Neighbor and PN
Indicates that the check is based on the data on the existing network.
Base on Planned Neighbor and PN
Indicates that the check is based on the planning results.
Click OK to export a check report. For details about the parameters, see 7.9.8 Parameters for Viewing 1way-2way Checking Results.
Filter 1way-2way redundant neighbor relationships. 1.
In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose PN Planning.
3.
Right-click and choose 1Way-2Way > Open from the shortcut menu.
4.
On the One way result or Two way result tab page of the displayed Check Result dialog box, right-click and choose Filter Redundant Neighbor Relation from the shortcut menu. The Filter Redundant Neighbor Relation dialog box is displayed.
5.
Set the filter conditions by referring to Table 7-8. Table 7-8 Conditions for filtering 1way-2way redundant neighbor relationships
6. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Parameter
Description
Distance threshold between source cell and its neighbor cell(km) >=:
Indicates that the distance between the source cell and its neighboring cell exceeds the predefined value.
Angle threshold of its neighbor cell relative to source cell >=:
Indicates that the angle between the source cell and its neighboring cell exceeds the predefined value.
Angle threshold of source cell relative to its neighbor cell >=:
Indicates that the angle between the neighboring cell and the source cell exceeds the predefined value.
Layer threshold between source cell and its neighbor cell >=:
Indicates that the number of layers between the source cell and its neighboring cell exceeds the predefined value.
Click OK. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
509
GENEX U-Net User Guide
7 CDMA Network Planning NOTE
In the displayed Neighbor Relation dialog box, filtered 1way-2way redundant neighbor relationships are displayed.
----End
Follow-up Procedure In the displayed Neighbor Relation dialog box, right-click an item and you can delete the corresponding data item.
7.8.4 Setting the Display Properties of PN Codes This section describes how to set the display properties of PN codes on the U-Net. You can set to display cells with identical or adjacent PN codes or set colors and contrast for the cells with identical or adjacent PN codes, helping you view the planning result of PN codes.
Prerequisites PN code planning is complete.
Procedure Step 1 Click the Operation tab in the Explorer window. Step 2 In the navigation tree, right-click PN Planning and choose Display Option from the shortcut menu. See Figure 7-5. Figure 7-5 Display Option
Step 3 In the displayed Display Options dialog box, set the parameters for setting the display properties of PN codes. For details about the parameters, see 7.9.3 Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of PN Codes. ----End Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
510
GENEX U-Net User Guide
7 CDMA Network Planning
7.9 Interface Reference to CDMA Network Planning This section describes the interfaces and parameters for CDMA network planning by using the U-Net.
7.9.1 Parameters for Planning PN Codes This section describes the parameters for planning PN codes. You can refer to this section when viewing PN code planning results in the CDMA PN Plan Setting dialog box. Parameter
Description
Delete Existed PN
Indicates whether to delete the existing PN codes.
Rhombus AngleA:
Indicates the rhombus angle used for calculating the number of layers. The distance between base stations is less than 5 km.
Rhombus AngleB:
Indicates the rhombus angle used for calculating the number of layers. The distance between base stations is not less than 5 km but less than 10 km.
Rhombus AngleC:
Indicates the rhombus angle used for calculating the number of layers. The distance between base stations is not less than 10 km but less than 20 km.
Rhombus AngleD:
Indicates the rhombus angle used for calculating the number of layers. The distance between base stations is not less than 20 km.
POI
Indicates whether indoor and outdoor cells use the same PN group. TRUE: The same PN group is used. FALSE: Different PN groups are used.
PM
TRUE: PN codes in the same PN group can be allocated to only the cells with the same geographic location (within the distance specified by MAXDIST_ALLOWED) under the same base station. FALSE: PN codes in the same PN group can be allocated regardless of geographic locations.
MaxDistance
Indicates the maximum distance (km) between cells that the same PN group is allocated to.
Area
Indicates the area whose PN codes need to be planned. You can select all the cells in an area or click Filter to select only the cells to be planned in the area.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
511
GENEX U-Net User Guide
7 CDMA Network Planning
7.9.2 Parameters for Viewing PN Code Planning Results This section describes the parameters for viewing PN code planning results. You can refer to this section when viewing PN code planning results in the PN Display dialog box. Parameter
Description
MSC_BSC_BTS_Sector
Indicates the combination of the MSC ID, BSC ID, BTS ID, and sector ID.
Existed PNG
Indicates the existing PN code group of the NE.
Existed PN
Indicates the existing PN codes of the NE.
Suggest PNG
Indicates the PN groups after the planning.
Suggest PN
Indicates the PN codes after the planning.
Sector Name
Indicates the name of a sector.
Scene
Indicates a scenario.
Score
Indicates the PN code reuse score. This parameter measures the PN code reuse quality.
Distance
Indicates the PN code reuse distance.
Layer
Indicates the number of layers involved in the PN code reuse.
Co-Sector
Indicates a sector that shares the PN code with the source sector.
7.9.3 Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of PN Codes This section describes the parameters for setting the display properties of PN codes. You can refer to this section when viewing and setting PN code display properties in the Display Options dialog box. Table 7-9 Parameters on the General tab page
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Parameter
Description
Suggest
Displays PN codes in the planning result.
Existed
Displays PN codes delivered to the NE.
PN INC
Intervals between adjacent PN codes.
Same PN
Displays cells with identical PN codes.
Neighborhood PN
Displays cells with adjacent PN codes.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
512
GENEX U-Net User Guide
7 CDMA Network Planning
Table 7-10 Parameters on the Same PN tab page Parameter
Description
Indoor
Sets the color for indoor cells with identical PN codes.
Outdoor
Sets the color for outdoor cells with identical PN codes.
Special
Sets the color for special cells with identical PN codes.
Add To Legend
Displays neighbor relationships on the map or not.
Transparency
Sets the transparency of the color.
Table 7-11 Parameters on the Neighborhood PN tab page Parameter
Description
Indoor
Sets the color for indoor cells with identical PN codes.
Outdoor
Sets the color for outdoor cells with identical PN codes.
Special
Sets the color for special cells with identical PN codes.
Add To Legend
Displays neighbor relationships on the map or not.
Transparency
Sets the transparency of the color.
7.9.4 Parameters for Planning CDMA Neighboring Cells This section describes the parameters for planning CDMA neighboring cells. Table 7-12 Parameters on the General tab page Parameter
Description
Methods Select
Selects a network planning scenario. In the CDMA network, the neighboring cells can be planned only on the basis of network topology.
Max Neighbor Distance(km)
Indicates the maximum neighboring cell distance. If the distance between two cells exceeds the specified value, the two cells cannot be planned as neighboring cells.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
513
GENEX U-Net User Guide
7 CDMA Network Planning
Parameter
Description
Planning Neighbor based on existed Neighbors
Plan neighboring cells based on the existing neighboring relationships. If this option is not selected, the existing neighboring relationships are deleted and neighboring cells are replanned.
Force Co-site Distance
Configures internal cells as bidirectional neighboring cells.
Area
Indicates the planning area. l You can select all the cells in an area or click Filter to select only the cells to be planned in the area. l In the Filter dialog box, you can specify the contents to be found, set the search direction, and set whether to match cases.
Table 7-13 Parameters on the Intra-Frequency tab page Parameter
Description
Force Symmetry
Indicates whether to forcibly configure unidirectional neighboring cells as bidirectional neighboring cells. If this option is selected during network capacity expansion, the unidirectional neighboring cells are configured as bidirectional neighboring cells to adjust the original neighboring relationship table.
Main Frequency
Indicates the main ARFCN.
Base on Main Frequency
Indicates that the non-main-ARFCN neighboring cells are configured based on the configured main-ARFCN neighboring cell relationships. If this option is selected, the non-main-ARFCN neighboring relationship can be configured only if the main-ARFCN neighboring relationship has been configured.
Base on Topology
Indicates that the non-main-ARFCN intra-frequency neighboring cell is planned based on the topology. If this option is selected, the neighboring cell relationship can be configured regardless of whether main-ARFCN neighboring cell relationship has been configured.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
New Cell-Indoor Cell-Max Outdoor Neighbor Number
Indicates the maximum number of outdoor neighboring cells planned for a newly established indoor cell.
New Cell-Indoor Cell-Max Indoor Neighbor Number
Indicates the maximum number of indoor neighboring cells planned for a newly established indoor cell.
New Cell-Outdoor Cell-Max Outdoor Neighbor Number
Indicates the maximum number of outdoor neighboring cells planned for a newly established outdoor cell.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
514
GENEX U-Net User Guide
7 CDMA Network Planning
Parameter
Description
New Cell-Outdoor Cell-Max Indoor Neighbor Number
Indicates the maximum number of indoor neighboring cells planned for a newly established outdoor cell.
Existed Cell-Indoor Cell-Max Outdoor Neighbor Number
Indicates the maximum number of outdoor neighboring cells planned for an existing indoor cell.
Existed Cell-Indoor Cell-Max Indoor Neighbor Number
Indicates the maximum number of indoor neighboring cells planned for an existing indoor cell.
Existed Cell-Outdoor CellMax Outdoor Neighbor Number
Indicates the maximum number of outdoor neighboring cells planned for an existing outdoor cell.
Existed Cell-Outdoor CellMax Indoor Neighbor Number
Indicates the maximum number of indoor neighboring cells planned for an existing outdoor cell.
7.9.5 Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of Neighboring Cells This section describes the parameters for setting the display properties of neighboring cells. Table 7-14 Parameters on the General tab page
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Parameter
Description
Display Links
Identifies neighbor relationships by using lines.
Display Cell Color
Identifies neighbor relationships in cell colors.
Fit Neighbor Cell Visible
Displays the neighbor relationships of a cell on the map after you select the cell in the neighbor relationship table.
Display Deleted Existed Neighbor
Displays the neighboring cells that are available on the live network but are currently deleted from the U-Net.
Selected Cell Color
Sets the color of the source cell.
Intra Frequency Neighbors
Displays intra-frequency neighboring cells.
Inter Frequency Neighbors
Displays inter-frequency neighboring cells.
Inter-RAT Neighbors
Displays inter-RAT neighboring cells.
Intra Technology Neighbors
Displays intra-RAT neighboring cells.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
515
GENEX U-Net User Guide
7 CDMA Network Planning
Table 7-15 Parameters on the Neighbor Display Color tab page Legend
Description
Confirm Intra Frequency
Sets the display color of unidirectional intra-frequency neighboring cells on the map.
Confirm Inter Frequency
Sets the display color of unidirectional inter-frequency neighboring cells on the map.
Confirm Inter-RAT
Sets the display color of unidirectional inter-RAT neighboring cells on the map.
Deleted Intra Frequency
Sets the display color of unidirectional intra-frequency neighboring cells that are deleted from the live network on the map.
Deleted Inter Frequency
Sets the display color of unidirectional inter-frequency neighboring cells that are deleted from the live network on the map.
Deleted Iner-RAT
Sets the display color of unidirectional inter-RAT neighboring cells that are deleted from the live network on the map.
Add To Legend
Displays the neighbor relationships on the map.
Transparency
Sets the transparency of the color.
NOTE
The neighboring cell types displayed on the U-Net may be different in different network systems. You can view the meaning of the displayed neighboring cell type.
7.9.6 Parameters for Setting the Audit and Filter Conditions Based on Neighboring Relations This section describes the parameters for setting the conditions for checking neighbor relationships and filtering neighboring cells. Table 7-16 Parameter for setting the conditions for checking neighbor relationships and filtering neighboring cells
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Parameter
Description
Source Cell
Selects the source cell.
Intra-Frequency
Filters the intra-frequency neighboring cells.
Inter-Frequency
Filters the inter-frequency neighboring cells.
Intra-Technology
Filters the intra-RAT neighboring cells.
Inter-RAT
Filters the inter-RAT neighboring cells.
Average No. of Neighbors
Indicates the average number of neighboring cells.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
516
GENEX U-Net User Guide
7 CDMA Network Planning
Parameter
Description
Empty List
Filters the unconfigured neighboring cells.
Missing Co-Site
Filters the neighboring cells that belong to different sites.
Missing Symmetry
Filters the unconfigured bidirectional neighboring cells.
List > No:
Filters the neighboring cells whose number of neighboring cells is greater than the specified number.
Percentage of Reference Neighbors
Indicates the percentage of UMTS cells that share neighbor relationships with the GSM cells at the same site as the UMTS cells.
Same PCI
Filters the neighboring cells that use the same PCI. This parameter is available only for the LTE network.
With Deleted Existed Neighbor
Collects cells whose existing neighboring cells have been deleted.
None
Sets no filter criterion.
Highlighted on Geographic Interface
Determines whether to highlight filtered cells on the map.
This table provides all the parameters for checking neighbor relationships and filtering neighboring cells in each network system. Some parameters may be available only in a specific network system. Check the parameter description based on site conditions.
7.9.7 Parameters for Viewing Neighboring Cell Planning Results This section describes the parameters for viewing neighbor relationships. You can refer to this section when viewing neighboring cell planning results after the neighboring cell planning is complete. Table 7-17 Tab page description Parameter
Description
Intra-Frequency
Indicates intra-frequency neighboring cells.
Inter-Frequency
Indicates inter-frequency neighboring cells.
Inter-RAT
Indicates inter-RAT neighboring cells.
The tab page name varies according to the network technology. Read the description on the actual tab page.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
517
GENEX U-Net User Guide
7 CDMA Network Planning
Table 7-18 Parameter description Parameter
Description
Neighbor Name
Indicates the name of a neighboring cell.
Cause
Indicates the reason for configuring a cell as the neighboring cell of the serving cell. l existed: Indicates the existing neighbor relationships on the network. l planned: Indicates the planned neighbor relationships. l force: Indicates the neighbor relationships manually added by users. l inherited: Indicates the inherited neighbor relationships. Indicates whether a cell is configured as the neighboring cell of the serving cell.
Confirm
If the option is selected, the cell is configured as the neighboring cell of the serving cell. If the option is not selected, the cell is not configured as the neighboring cell of the serving cell. Blind Handover
Indicates a neighboring cell for blind handover.
7.9.8 Parameters for Viewing 1way-2way Checking Results This section describes the parameters for viewing results of 1way-2way checking Table 7-19 Parameters on the One way resulttab page Parameter
Description
PN
Indicates the PN codes.
SectorASectorBSectorC
Indicates the three sectors with One way relations.
DistanceAB
Indicates the distance between sector A and sector B.
DistanceBC
Indicates the distance between sector B and sector C.
Table 7-20 Parameters on the Two way resulttab page
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Parameter
Description
PN
Indicates the PN codes.
SectorASectorBSectorCSectorD
Indicates the four sectors with Two way relations.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
518
GENEX U-Net User Guide
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
7 CDMA Network Planning
Parameter
Description
DistanceAB
Indicates the distance between sector A and sector B.
DistanceBC
Indicates the distance between sector B and sector C.
DistanceCD
Indicates the distance between sector C and sector D.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
519
GENEX U-Net User Guide
8 Multi-Mode Network Planning
8
Multi-Mode Network Planning
About This Chapter The U-Net supports the planning of the multi-mode network. You can model the actual network environment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creating base stations based on the imported geographic data. Then you can plan neighboring cells on the hybrid network consisting of the GSM, UMTS, and LTE-FDD, and predict both GSM and UMTS network coverage range to meet your network planning requirements. 8.1 Process of Multi-Mode Network Planning This section describes the process of multi-mode network planning. You can refer to this section when planning a multi-mode network by using the U-Net. 8.2 Creating a Project This section describes how to create a project. You can select different project templates for different network systems. The U-Net creates the project based on the selected template. Currently, the U-Net provides project templates for the following network systems: GSM, UMTS, CDMA, LTE-FDD, and LTE-TDD. 8.3 Importing Geographic Data You can import geographic data in various vector and grid formats and set coordinate systems. You can also add points, lines, or polygons to create vector objects.The method for importing geographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is the same. 8.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands The U-Net enables you to calculate path loss between a transmitter and a receiver based on a propagation model. Then you can use the calculated path loss matrix to perform prediction.The method for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systems on the U-Net is the same. 8.5 Adding a Device You can import or create antennas, create TMAs, feeders, or site equipment.The method for creating site equipment for different network systems on the U-Net is the same. 8.6 Managing Traffic Parameters in a Multi-Mode Network The U-Net obtains the average load of the network based on the simulation calculation of the detailed user distribution and thus calculates various counters of the radio network. You need to define the traffic parameters before performing prediction and capacity simulation. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
520
GENEX U-Net User Guide
8 Multi-Mode Network Planning
8.7 Setting Multi-Mode NE Parameters You can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station template to automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeaters separately. 8.8 Prediction of a GSM/UMTS Dual-Mode Network By calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage and channel quality. 8.9 Neighboring Cell Planning in a Multi-Mode Network After creating NodeBs, you must plan neighboring cells for the cells on the multi-mode network. The U-Net supports the function of performing neighboring cell planning separately based on different networks. UMTS network planning can be performed after considering the co-site GSM network neighboring relationships. LTE-FDD neighboring cell planning can be performed after considering the co-site GSM and UMTS network neighboring relationships.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
521
GENEX U-Net User Guide
8 Multi-Mode Network Planning
8.1 Process of Multi-Mode Network Planning This section describes the process of multi-mode network planning. You can refer to this section when planning a multi-mode network by using the U-Net. Figure 8-1 shows the process of multi-mode network planning. Figure 8-1 Process of multi-mode network planning
Table 8-1 describes the detailed information about Figure 8-1.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
522
GENEX U-Net User Guide
8 Multi-Mode Network Planning
Table 8-1 Process of multi-mode network planning No.
Procedure
Description
1
Creating a project
For details, see 3.2 Creating a Project.
2
Importing geographic data
You can import geographic data in various vector and grid formats and set coordinate systems. You can also add points, lines, or polygons to create vector objects.The method for importing geographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is the same.For details, see 3.3 Importing Geographic Data.
3
Managing propagation models and bands
The U-Net enables you to calculate path loss between a transmitter and a receiver based on a propagation model. Then you can use the calculated path loss matrix to perform prediction.The method for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systems on the U-Net is the same.For details, see 3.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands.
4
Adding a device
You can import or create antennas, create TMAs, feeders, or site equipment.The method for creating site equipment for different network systems on the U-Net is the same.For details, see 3.5 Adding a Device.
5
Setting traffic parameters
Set traffic parameters related to terminals and services, which are to be used during prediction.For details, see 8.6 Managing Traffic Parameters in a Multi-Mode Network.
6
Setting NE parameters
You can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station template to automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeaters separately.For details, see 8.7 Setting Multi-Mode NE Parameters.
7
Calculating the path loss
For details, see 3.8.2 Calculating Path Loss.
8
Planning neighboring cells
For details, see 8.9 Neighboring Cell Planning in a Multi-Mode Network. The planning results can be applied to NEs.
9
Predicting network performance
For details, see 8.8 Prediction of a GSM/UMTS DualMode Network.
10
Exporting network planning results
For details, see Prediction and Neighboring Cell Planning.
8.2 Creating a Project This section describes how to create a project. You can select different project templates for different network systems. The U-Net creates the project based on the selected template. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
523
GENEX U-Net User Guide
8 Multi-Mode Network Planning
Currently, the U-Net provides project templates for the following network systems: GSM, UMTS, CDMA, LTE-FDD, and LTE-TDD.
Context l
Only one project can run on the U-Net at a time. In normal cases, one project corresponds to the network planning for an area or a city.
l
One U-Net project may correspond to the network planning of multiple network systems. For example, a U-Net project can be created for the planning of a GSM/UMTS hybrid network.
Procedure Step 1 Choose File > New. The Project Templates dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-2. Figure 8-2 Project Templates
Step 2 Select a project template. l Different network systems correspond to different project templates. You need to select an appropriate project template based on the actual network system. l If multiple network systems are involved, you need to select the required templates. For example, If you need to create a project for a GSM/UMTS hybrid network, you need to select project templates for both the GSM and the UMTS networks. l LTE-TDD and CDMA do not support hybrid networking with other network systems. Step 3 Click OK. ----End
Follow-up Procedure l
Save a project file. Choose File > Save or click file.
to save all the information about the project in a project
You can save project files in .ipl format: .ipl or .ipl (with all data). In the former format, only NE's parameter planning configuration for the project is saved; in the latter format, all the planning calculation results are saved. The former format is selected by default. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
524
GENEX U-Net User Guide
8 Multi-Mode Network Planning
The U-Net automatically creates an .ipl project file and a project name.losses folder for saving the information about the path loss matrix and calculation results of capacity simulation, coverage prediction, and neighboring cell planning in the specified save path. NOTE
Based on the save format, the U-Net determines whether to add the calculation result data in the project name.losses path to the project file in .ipl format.
l
Open an existing project file. Choose File > Open to open an existing .ipl project file. NOTE
Alternatively, double-click an .ipl project file to start and open the project.
8.3 Importing Geographic Data You can import geographic data in various vector and grid formats and set coordinate systems. You can also add points, lines, or polygons to create vector objects.The method for importing geographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is the same.
Context The method for importing geographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is the same. For details, see 3.3 Importing Geographic Data.
8.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands The U-Net enables you to calculate path loss between a transmitter and a receiver based on a propagation model. Then you can use the calculated path loss matrix to perform prediction.The method for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systems on the U-Net is the same.
Context The method for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systems on the U-Net is the same. For details, see 3.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands. For details about the parameters for setting the frequency band information, see Parameters for Setting Bands.
8.5 Adding a Device You can import or create antennas, create TMAs, feeders, or site equipment.The method for creating site equipment for different network systems on the U-Net is the same.
Context The method for creating site equipment for different network systems on the U-Net is the same. For details, see 3.5 Adding a Device. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
525
GENEX U-Net User Guide
8 Multi-Mode Network Planning
8.6 Managing Traffic Parameters in a Multi-Mode Network The U-Net obtains the average load of the network based on the simulation calculation of the detailed user distribution and thus calculates various counters of the radio network. You need to define the traffic parameters before performing prediction and capacity simulation.
8.6.1 Setting Environment Types This section describes how to set environment types. You can modify the parameters of existing environment types, such as user, mobility type, and user density. If the existing environment types do not meet the requirements, you can create environment types.
Context For networks with different modes, the U-Net sets environment types in the same way. For details, see 3.6.5 Setting Environment Types.
8.6.2 Setting User Types You can modify the parameters of existing user types, such as user priority, service type, and user type. If the existing user types do not meet the requirements, you can create user types.
Context For networks with different modes, the U-Net sets user types in the same way. For details, see 3.6.6 Setting User Types.
8.6.3 Setting Mobility Types This section describes how to set mobility types for terminals. You can modify the parameters of existing mobility types, such as the velocity. If the existing mobility types do not meet the requirements, you can create mobility types.
Context For networks with different modes, the U-Net sets mobility types in the same way. For details, see 3.6.7 Setting Mobility Types.
8.6.4 Setting Multi-Mode Service Types Set the service type such as the voice service and data service. You can modify the parameters of existing service types. If the existing service types do not meet the requirements, you can create service types.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 Set service type parameters. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
526
GENEX U-Net User Guide
8 Multi-Mode Network Planning
If you need to...
Then...
Create a service type
1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > RAT. 2. Choose New from the shortcut menu. 3. Set new service type parameters. l For GSM networks, see Parameters for Setting the GSM Services. l For UMTS networks, see Parameters for Setting the UMTS Services. l For LTE-FDD networks, see Parameters for Setting the LTE-FDD Services. l UnionService: see Table 8-2.
Modify an existing service type
1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > Network system > An existing service type. 2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. 3. Modify service type parameters.
Table 8-2 Parameters for setting the multi-mode services Parameter
Meaning
Name
Indicates the name of a service type.
Type
Indicates a service type. l CSServie: voice services. l PSServie: data services.
AMR Rate(kbit/s)
Indicates the rate of a voice service. The unit is kbit/s. The values are 4.75, 5.15, 5.9, 6.7, 7.4, 7.95, 10.2, and 12.2.
Activity
Indicates the uplink/downlink activation factor. This parameter is required for only voice services. l Uplink: uplink activation factor. The value ranges from 0 to 1. l Uplink: downlink activation factor. The value ranges from 0 to 1.
Max Throughput(kbit/s)
Indicates the maximum uplink/downlink throughput. l Uplink: maximum uplink throughput. The value ranges from 0 to 107. l Downlink: maximum downlink throughput. The value ranges from 0 to 107. NOTE Minimum throughput ≤ Average throughput ≤ Maximum throughput
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
527
GENEX U-Net User Guide
8 Multi-Mode Network Planning
Parameter
Meaning
Min Throughput(kbit/s)
Indicates the minimum uplink/downlink throughput. l Uplink: minimum uplink throughput. The value ranges from 0 to 107. l Downlink: minimum downlink throughput. The value ranges from 0 to 107. NOTE Minimum throughput ≤ Average throughput ≤ Maximum throughput
Average Throughput(kbit/s)
Indicates the average uplink/downlink throughput. l Uplink: average uplink throughput. l Downlink: average downlink throughput. NOTE Minimum throughput ≤ Average throughput ≤ Maximum throughput
Transmission Efficiency
Indicates the uplink/downlink transmission rate. l Uplink: uplink transmission rate. The value ranges from 0 to 1. l Downlink: downlink transmission rate. The value ranges from 0 to 1.
Select Service
Indicates the type of a service that processes on a specific network.
----End
8.6.5 Setting Multi-Mode Terminal Types This section describes how to create a new multi-mode terminal type for planning and analysis on multi-mode networks.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 Set parameters of the terminal type.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
528
GENEX U-Net User Guide
8 Multi-Mode Network Planning
If you need to...
Then...
Create a terminal 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > RAT. type 2. Choose New from the shortcut menu. 3. Set parameters of the new terminal type. l For GSM networks, see Parameters for setting GSM terminal types. l For UMTS networks, seeParameters for setting UMTS terminal types. l For LTE-FDD networks, see Parameters for setting LTE-FDD terminal types. l UnionTerminal: For example, if a multi-mode terminal supports both GSM and UMTS, set GSM and UMTS in Select Terminal. 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > Modify an existing terminal Network system > An existing terminal type. type 2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. 3. Modify parameters of the existing terminal type. Step 3 Click OK. ----End
8.7 Setting Multi-Mode NE Parameters You can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station template to automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeaters separately.
8.7.1 Importing Base Station Information You can import a data file of base station to the U-Net. After that, the system automatically creates sites, cells, and transceivers according to the base station data. You can also export base station data in a project for easy viewing of site information, cell information, and transceiver information. For networks with different modes, the U-Net imports base station information in the same way.
Context For networks with different modes, the U-Net imports site information in the same way. For details, see 3.7.1 Importing Base Station Information.
8.7.2 Creating a Single Site This section describes how to create a single site. You can create a site or modify the properties of an existing site to obtain a new one. For networks using different radio access technologies (RATs), you can use the U-Net to create a single site in the same way. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
529
GENEX U-Net User Guide
8 Multi-Mode Network Planning
Context For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a single site in the same way. For details, see 3.7.2 Creating a Single Site.
8.7.3 Setting a Multi-Mode Base Station Template This section describes how to manage base station templates. You can create base stations by using the predefined templates of the U-Net. If the predefined templates do not meet your requirements, you can customize a base station template.
Procedure l
View base station templates. 1.
On the toolbar, select Template Management from the dropdown list. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-3.
Figure 8-3 Station Template Properties
2.
The Available Templates area displays the currently available base station templates. Select the default template from the drop-down list next to Default. The name of the default base station template will be displayed on the toolbar of the U-Net main window. The names of other base station templates are available in the drop-down list.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
530
GENEX U-Net User Guide
8 Multi-Mode Network Planning
Such as l
.
Create a base station template. 1.
Click Add. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed. Alternatively, click Duplicate to duplicate the selected base station template. Then, a new base station template is generated on the basis of the selected template.
2.
Set properties of the BTS template. – For details about setting the properties of an LTE-FDD base station template, see Parameters for Setting LTE-FDD Base Station Templates. – For details about setting the properties of an GSM base station template, see Parameter for Setting GSM Base Station Templates. – For details about setting the properties of an UMTS base station template, see Parameter for Setting UMTS Base Station Templates.
3. l
Click OK.
View and modify properties of the base station template. 1.
Select a base station template in the Available Templates area.
2.
Click Properties. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed.
3.
Query and modify properties of the base station template. – For details about querying and modifying the properties of an LTE-FDD base station template, see Parameters for Setting LTE-FDD Base Station Templates. – For details about querying and modifying the properties of an GSM base station template, see Parameter for Setting GSM Base Station Templates. – For details about querying and modifying the properties of an UMTS base station template, see Parameter for Setting UMTS Base Station Templates.
4.
Click OK.
----End
Follow-up Procedure You can create base stations based on a predefined base station template or a customized base station template. When a base station template is not required, you can select the template in the Station Template Properties dialog box and then click Delete to delete it. You cannot delete the last base station template.
8.7.4 Creating Repeaters This section describes how to create repeaters. A repeater receives, amplifies, and forwards the RF carriers launched or transmitted in the uplink and downlink. A repeater includes two sides, that is, the donor side and the serving cell side. The donor side of a repeater receives signals from the donor transmitter. The signals may be carried by links of different types, such as radio links or microwave links. The serving cell side forwards the received signals. For networks of different types, the U-Net creates a repeater in the same way. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
531
GENEX U-Net User Guide
8 Multi-Mode Network Planning
Context For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a repeater in the same way. For details, see 3.7.5 Creating Repeaters.
8.7.5 Creating a Transceiver This section describes how to create a transceiver. The U-Net combines the transceiver with cells. Before setting a cell, you must set the transceiver parameters. A transceiver supports a multi-mode network, that is, a transceiver can cover multiple cells. For networks using different radio access technologies (RATs), you can use the U-Net to create a transceiver in the same way.
Context For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a transceiver in the same way. For details, see 3.7.6 Creating a Transceiver.
8.7.6 Setting Multi-Mode Cell Parameters This section describes how to set LTE-FDD cell parameters. After a transceiver is set, the UNet automatically assigns a cell to the transceiver. You must set parameters for multi-mode cells if the transceiver is a multi-mode transceiver.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver > Sitex_x. Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, set properties of cells on the Network system tab page. l For details about setting the properties of an LTE-FDD cell, see Parameters for Setting the Parameters of LTE-FDD Cells. l For details about setting the properties of a GSM cell, see Parameters for Setting the Parameters of GSM Cells. l For details about setting the properties of a UMTS cell, see Parameters for Setting the Parameters of UMTS Cells. Step 5 Click OK. ----End
8.8 Prediction of a GSM/UMTS Dual-Mode Network By calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage and channel quality.
8.8.1 Basic Knowledge of Prediction in a GSM/UMTS Dual-Mode Network This chapter describes the basic knowledge of prediction, including the formula for calculating link loss, method for determining the calculation area, meaning of prediction counters, and Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
532
GENEX U-Net User Guide
8 Multi-Mode Network Planning
prediction algorithm. You can develop a better understanding of the prediction function by learning the basic knowledge.
Basic Knowledge of Coverage Prediction Counters in a GSM/UMTS Dual-Mode Network This section describes the meaning of each coverage prediction counter. The coverage prediction counters in a GSM/UMTS dual-mode network are as follows: l
CoverageBySignelLevel: valid coverage area (where the signal chip power is greater than the sensitivity of the receiver) of a cell.
l
CoverageByCirLevel: valid coverage area (where the signal CIR is greater than the specified threshold) of a cell.
Procedure for Performing Coverage Prediction This section describes the procedure for performing prediction through the U-Net. Figure 8-4 shows the procedure for performing prediction through the U-Net. Figure 8-4 Procedure of prediction
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
533
GENEX U-Net User Guide
8 Multi-Mode Network Planning
Prediction Algorithm in a GSM/UMTS Dual-Mode Network In a GSM/UMTS dual-mode network, the prediction is performed separately in the GSM network and the UMTS network. Therefore, for details about the prediction algorithm, see GSM Prediction Algorithm and UMTS Prediction Algorithm.
Basic Knowledge of Link Loss Link loss refers to the loss on the entire link from the transmitter to the receiver. When calculating link loss, the U-Net considers various loss factors such as path loss, equipment loss, and shadow fading. Loss factors of the uplink are different from loss factors of the downlink. The formulas for calculating uplink loss and downlink loss are as follows: l
Uplink loss = Loss caused by the human body + Feeder loss of the terminal - Antenna gain of the terminal + Antenna attenuation of the terminal + Path loss + Shadow fading + Penetration loss - Antenna gain of the base station + Total loss of the base station
l
Downlink loss = Loss caused by the human body + Feeder loss of the terminal - Antenna gain of the terminal + Antenna attenuation of the terminal + Path loss + Shadow fading + Penetration loss - Antenna gain of the base station + Total loss of the base station
The difference between the two formulas are as follows: The uplink has TMA gains which are included into the antenna gain of the base station in calculation. The downlink has TMA loss which is included into the total loss of the base station. Table 8-3 describes the meanings of factors in the formulas. Table 8-3 Meanings of factors in the formulas Factor
Meaning
Loss caused by the human body
Loss of transmit or receive power of the mobile station (MS) due to the shielding or absorption of the human body.
Feeder loss of a terminal
Loss of the feeder on a terminal.
Antenna gain of a terminal
Gain of the antenna on a terminal.
Antenna fading of a terminal
Fading of the antenna on a terminal.
Path loss
Loss on the path between the transmit antenna and the receive antenna, which excludes the antenna gain and shadow fading.
Shadow fading
When an electromagnetic wave is blocked by fluctuant terrains, buildings, or vegetation areas in the propagation path, the shadow of the magnetic field exits. When an MS travels through the shadow of different barriers, the received signal strength decreases, and the field strength at the receiving antenna changes. In this case, fading is generated. This fading is called shadow fading.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
534
GENEX U-Net User Guide
8 Multi-Mode Network Planning
Factor
Meaning
Penetration loss
Loss that is caused when signals travel through buildings, vehicles, and leaves.
Antenna gain of a base station
Gain of the antenna on a base station.
Total loss of the base station
Power loss that is caused when signals travel through all the TMAs, feeders (including the main feeder, jumpers, and lightning arresters), and connectors
8.8.2 Calculating Path Loss The path loss refers to the loss of strength of signals transmitted from a TX end to an RX end. You must calculate the path loss because it is an input required for prediction. The U-Net automatically calculates the path loss and generates a .loss file for each cell. Alternatively, you can manually calculate the path loss before performing the prediction. This section describes how to manually calculate the path loss.
Prerequisites l
Base stations (sites and cells) are available.
l
Propagation models are assigned to cells.
Context You can manually calculate the path loss in calculation or force calculation mode. l
Calculation – If you calculate the path loss for the first time, that is, if no path loss matrix file is available, the U-Net calculates the path loss matrix of each cell. Afterwards, the U-Net checks the validity of calculation results and updates the results. – If path loss matrices are available but the parameters related to radio data and calculation area are modified, the path loss matrices of some cells may become invalid. In this case, the U-Net calculates only these invalid path loss matrices again.
l
Force calculation If path loss matrices are available, the U-Net deletes all the matrices regardless of the validity and calculates the path loss matrix of each cell again. Afterwards, the U-Net checks the validity of calculation results and updates the results.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver. Step 3 Select a calculation mode to calculate the path loss of all cells on the Transceiver node.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
535
GENEX U-Net User Guide
8 Multi-Mode Network Planning
If you need to...
Then...
Calculate
Right-click and choose Calculation > Calculate Path Loss Matrices from the shortcut menu.
Calculate forcibly
Right-click and choose Calculation > Force Calculate Path Loss Matrices from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 If you have not saved the project file, save it as prompted. The U-Net automatically creates a Project Name.losses folder that saves the information about the path loss matrix and an .ipl project file in the specified save path. Afterwards, the U-Net starts calculating the path loss. Step 5 Query the calculation results After the calculation is complete, the calculation results will be automatically saved in the Project Name.losses folder that saves the project file. Click
to stop ongoing calculations.
Step 6 Optional: Check the progress of path loss calculation In the Event Viewer docked window, query the start time and end time of path loss on the Event Viewer tab page and the progress of the path loss calculation on the Task tab page, as shown in Figure 8-5. Figure 8-5 Event Viewer
----End
Follow-up Procedure The MCL with the default value of 70 dB indicates the minimum path loss between the base station and the terminal or between one terminal and another terminal. If you want to change the default value of the MCL, modify the LinkLossConfig.xml file in the U-Net installation directory. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
536
GENEX U-Net User Guide
8 Multi-Mode Network Planning
8.8.3 Creating a Prediction Group in a GSM/UMTS Dual-Mode Network The U-Net calculates the prediction as per prediction group. Each prediction group consists of one or more prediction items. You can create prediction groups and modify the properties.
Procedure Step 1 Optional: Setting common properties for prediction groups. Before creating coverage prediction groups, you need to set common properties for prediction groups so that new prediction groups have the common properties. 1.
In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Predictions.
3.
Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
4.
In the displayed dialog box, set the precision of prediction on the Predictions tab page. You are advised to set the precision of prediction to be the same as that of the propagation model.
5.
Set the height of receiver on the Receiver tab page.
6.
Click OK.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Predictions. Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu. See Figure 8-6. Figure 8-6 New
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, set prediction group name, whether to calculate immediately, and select prediction counters. For counter descriptions, see Basic Knowledge of GSM Prediction Counters and Basic Knowledge of UMTS Prediction Counters. Step 5 Click Next. Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, set the prediction group properties. For detailed description of parameters, see 8.8.7 Parameters for Creating a Prediction Group in a GSM/UMTS DualMode Network. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
537
GENEX U-Net User Guide
8 Multi-Mode Network Planning
Step 7 Click OK. Step 8 Optional: If you deselect Calculate Now in creating prediction groups, right-click the prediction group, and then choose Calculate from the shortcut menu after creating a prediction group. ----End
Follow-up Procedure After the prediction calculation is complete, you can recalculate KPIs, add or delete KPIs, and view detailed KPI result reports. For details, see 3.8.6 Managing the Prediction Result.
8.8.4 Viewing Coverage Prediction Results You can view the prediction result in the map window or view the statistics on various indicators by using the PDF or CDF diagram.
Procedure l
View a prediction result in the map window. For details, see Querying Prediction Statistical Results (on a Map).
l
View a prediction result by using the PDF or CDF diagram. For details, see Viewing Coverage Prediction Statistical Results (in a PDF/CDF Chart).
----End
8.8.5 Analyzing Prediction Results The U-Net supports the function of comparing similar predictions to identify the differences. This helps you to quickly know the impact of changes on the network.
Procedure Step 1 Create and calculate a prediction group. Step 2 View the prediction result and check whether any counter needs to be optimized. Step 3 Adjust the setting of the counter that needs to be optimized to improve the coverage. Step 4 Duplicate the prediction group. 1.
In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > first prediction group.
3.
Choose Duplicate from the shortcut menu.
Step 5 Calculate the duplicate prediction group. 1.
In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > copied prediction group.
2.
Choose Calculate from the shortcut menu.
Step 6 Compare the original prediction result and the new prediction result. 1.
In the navigation tree, choose Predictions.
2.
Choose Compare from the shortcut menu. The CDF Compare window is displayed.
3.
Select the counters from the drop-down list on the left.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
538
GENEX U-Net User Guide
8 Multi-Mode Network Planning NOTE
l Coverage Area: The area that is actually covered by the counters. It is the area rendered by colors on the map window. l Calculate Area: The Polygon area that you select when creating a new prediction group
4.
Select the prediction groups from the pane on the left and the corresponding display colors.
5.
View the CDF comparison chart in the pane on the right.
----End
Example This section takes the antenna downtilt as an example to describe the function of comparison. The coverage of a cell in a prediction group is not good. Based on the analysis, the antenna downtilt may be improperly set. Perform the following steps to adjust the antenna downtilt. 1.
In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver > Sitex_x.
3.
Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
4.
Click Antenna Config tab Page.
5.
Modify the value of Mechanical Downtilt or Electrical Downtilt.
After the downtilt is adjusted, you can recalculate the prediction group but cannot compare the two coverage predictions, that is, the prediction before and the prediction after the adjustment. Therefore, duplicate the existing prediction group before the recalculation. After the recalculation, you can view the coverage change in the map window. To know the detailed change, compare the change of counters by referring to Step 6.
Follow-up Procedure l
To save the CDF comparison chart, right-click the chart and choose Save Image As from the shortcut menu. The chart can be saved in .emf, .png, .gif, .jpg, .tif, or .bmp format.
l
To print the CDF comparison chart, right-click the chart and choose Print from the shortcut menu.
l
To copy the CDF comparison chart, right-click the chart and choose Copy from the shortcut menu.
8.8.6 Exporting Planning Results You can export and print prediction results in batches or export the detailed prediction result by Bin point.
Exporting Coverage Prediction Statistical Results in Batches After the prediction calculation is complete, you can select one or more counters and then export a statistical report on the prediction as a .csv file and a prediction map in .mif or .jpg format.
Context The method for exporting statistics for prediction results in batches for different network systems from the U-Net is the same. For details, see Exporting Prediction Results in Batches. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
539
GENEX U-Net User Guide
8 Multi-Mode Network Planning
Exporting Detailed Prediction Results by Bin Points After the prediction calculation is complete, you can export detailed prediction results of the Bin points in a specified area.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Step 2 Select the objects to be exported. If you need to...
Then...
Export the detailed prediction results of a prediction group
In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx.
Export the detailed prediction results of a single counter in a prediction group
In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx > counter item.
Step 3 Choose Export BIN By > Polygon from the shortcut menu. Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select the area to be exported. The U-Net only exports the detailed prediction results of the Bin points in the selected area. Step 5 Click Export. ----End
Printing Coverage Prediction Results in Batches After the prediction calculation is complete, you can print the prediction results of counters in batches. The results include prediction chart, geographic data, and base station data.
Context The method for printing prediction results in batches for different network systems on the UNet is the same. For details, see Printing Prediction Results in Batches.
8.8.7 Parameters for Creating a Prediction Group in a GSM/UMTS Dual-Mode Network This section describes the parameters for creating a prediction group and setting its properties. You can refer to this section when creating a prediction group in the New Prediction Group dialog box or setting the properties of a prediction group in the Group Properties dialog box.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
540
GENEX U-Net User Guide
8 Multi-Mode Network Planning
Parameters in the New Prediction Group Dialog Box Parameter
Meaning
Group Name
Indicates the name of a prediction group, which uniquely identifies a prediction group. The U-Net enters the default name of each new prediction group.
Prediction Type
Selects the prediction of the GSM/UMTS dual-mode network.
Study Selected
Indicates the prediction counter.
Calculate Now
Indicates whether to calculate the prediction counter immediately.
Parameters in the Group Properties dialog box Table 8-4 Parameters on the General tab Page Parameter
Meaning
Name
Indicates the name of a prediction group.
Resolution(m)
Indicates the prediction precision.
Cell Edge Coverage Probability
Indicates the probability of cell edge coverage, that is, the probability that the receive signal strength is stronger than the specified threshold at the edge of a cell.
Polygon
Selects the area calculated in prediction.
Technology
Selects both GSM and UMTS.
With Shadow
Indicates whether shadow fading is considered in the calculation.
Indoor Coverage
Indicates whether penetration loss is considered in the calculation.
Table 8-5 Parameters on the GSM tab Page
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Parameter
Meaning
CIRGate(dB)
Indicates the C/I threshold, which is used to determine the GSM coverage area based on CIR.
Sensitivity(dBm)
Indicates the sensitivity of a receiver.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
541
GENEX U-Net User Guide
8 Multi-Mode Network Planning
Parameter
Meaning
Terminal
Indicates the type of a terminal.
Service
Indicates the service type.
Table 8-6 Parameters on the UMTS tab Page Parameter
Meaning
CIRGate(dB)
Indicates the C/I threshold, which is used to determine the UMTS coverage area based on CIR.
Sensitivity(dBm)
Indicates the sensitivity of a receiver.
Terminal
Indicates the type of a terminal.
Service
Indicates the service type.
8.9 Neighboring Cell Planning in a Multi-Mode Network After creating NodeBs, you must plan neighboring cells for the cells on the multi-mode network. The U-Net supports the function of performing neighboring cell planning separately based on different networks. UMTS network planning can be performed after considering the co-site GSM network neighboring relationships. LTE-FDD neighboring cell planning can be performed after considering the co-site GSM and UMTS network neighboring relationships.
8.9.1 Basic Knowledge of Neighboring Cell Planning This section describes basic knowledge of neighboring cell planning. Proper neighbor relationships ensure that a UE at the edge of a serving cell can be handed over in time and that the handover gain is obtained. This helps to reduce intra-RAT interference, improve the QoS of the network, and ensure stable network performance. The purpose of neighboring cell planning is to properly configure neighbor relationships during the construction or expansion of a network. Planning neighboring cells is mandatory during initial construction of a network. Whether neighboring cells are properly planned has direct impacts on the network performance. Traditionally, neighboring cells are manually planned, which features low work efficiency. Currently, neighboring cells are automatically planned, which greatly improves work efficiency, reduces network construction cost, and accelerates network construction. Manual adjustments to the results of automatic planning can be made based on the actual situation. The U-Net provides the function of automatically planning neighboring cells. It supports neighboring cell planning for special scenarios that require repeaters or remote RF units. These features of U-Net ensure reliable planning results. The U-Net determines the neighbor relationships of a serving cell from the following aspects: l
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
If a cell is covered by the same base station as the serving cell, it is considered as a neighboring cell of the serving cell. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
542
GENEX U-Net User Guide
8 Multi-Mode Network Planning
l
If a cell in the candidate neighboring cells has the highest score, it is considered as a neighboring cell of the serving cell.
l
The existing neighboring cell relationships are not changed.
l
Whether a cell is configured as a neighboring cell of the serving cell to ensure bidirectional neighbor relationship.
The U-Net provides the following neighboring cell planning algorithms: l
Topology: algorithm based on topology
l
Prediction: algorithm based on coverage prediction
l
Topology + Prediction: algorithm based on topology and coverage prediction The U-Net determines neighboring cells using the algorithm based on coverage prediction. If the neighbor relationships between the serving cell and some cells cannot be determined according to the algorithm based on coverage prediction, the U-Net determines neighboring cells using the algorithm based on topology.
Take UMTS as an example, neighboring cell planning and optimization of U-Net applies to the following scenarios: l
6.9.3 Initial Neighboring Cell Planning for a New Network
l
6.9.4 Neighboring Cell Replanning for a Partially Expanded Network
l
6.9.5 Replanning of Neighboring Cells from 2G Network to 3G Network
l
6.9.6 Checking and Optimizing Neighboring Cell Configuration NOTE
For CDMA networks, the U-Net supports only the algorithm based on topology for planning neighboring cells.
8.9.2 Importing Neighboring Relations This section describes how to import neighbor relationships. The U-Net provides the function of importing neighbor relationships, through which the existing neighbor relationships on the network can be imported into the U-Net. This helps to plan neighboring cells according to the actual situation of the network.
Prerequisites l
Base station information has been created or imported, including sites, transceivers, and cells.
l
The neighbor relationships to be imported must be collected into a neighbor relationship template. You can obtain the neighbor relationship template by exporting neighbor relationships.
l
Neighbor relationships of an LTE-FDD or LTE-TDD network are matched by the cell name.
l
Neighbor relationships of a GSM network are matched by cell name, LAC, and CI.
l
Neighbor relationships of a UMTS network are matched by cell name, RNC ID, and CI.
l
Neighbor relationships of a CDMA network are matched by MSC ID, BSC ID, BTS ID, Cell ID, Sector ID, ARFCN, and BNDCLS.
Context
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
543
GENEX U-Net User Guide
8 Multi-Mode Network Planning
l
Neighbor relationships of a multi-mode network must be imported separately by network technology.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose neighbor planning > RAT. Step 3 Choose Import Neighbor Relations from the shortcut menu. The Import Neighbor Relations dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Select Update Blind Handover Flag as required. If Update Blind Handover Flag is selected, blind handover flags of cells are updated when the neighbor relationships are imported. NOTE
Update Blind Handover Flag is unavailable in GSM/CDMA, and therefore you do not need to select it.
Step 5 Click Browse to choose a neighbor relationship file. Step 6 Click OK. ----End
8.9.3 Planning Neighboring Cells in a Multi-Mode Network The U-Net provides the function of automatically planning neighboring cells. With this function enabled, the neighboring cell relationships for each cell can be planned automatically. This reduces the number of handovers due to improper neighboring cell configuration. For a hybrid network supporting LTE-FDD, the U-Net plans a GSM/UMTS neighboring cell for blind handover from a LTE-FDD cell.
Context l
The U-Net supports cell planning in GSM/UMTS/LTE-FDD dual-mode or multi-mode networks.
l
The U-Net performs automatic neighboring cell planning on a per RAT basis. For example, in a GSM/UMTS dual-mode network, automatic neighboring cell planning must be performed separately in the GSM network and the UMTS network.
l
In a GSM/UMTS dual-mode network, UMTS neighboring cell planning can be performed in reference to the neighboring cell planning of the co-sited GSM cell.
l
On a GSM/UMTS/LTE-FDD multi-mode network, LTE-FDD neighboring cell planning can be performed in reference to the neighboring cell planning of the co-site GSM or UMTS cell.
l
This section describes the neighboring cell planning on a GSM/UMTS/LTE-FDD multimode network.
Procedure Step 1 For neighboring cell planning of a GSM network, see 5.9.3 Planning GSM Neighboring Cells. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
544
GENEX U-Net User Guide
8 Multi-Mode Network Planning
Step 2 For neighboring cell planning of a UMTS network, see 6.9.3 Initial Neighboring Cell Planning for a New Network. Step 3 For neighboring cell planning of an LTE-FDD network, see Planning LTE-FDD Neighboring Cells. ----End
8.9.4 Viewing the Planning Result of Neighbor Cells This section describes how to manage the result of neighboring cell planning. After the planning is complete, you can view, filter, remove the filter effect on, audit, export, and modify neighboring cell relationships of all the cells in the network.
Prerequisites The neighboring cell planning is complete.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose neighbor planning > RAT. NOTE
You need to select the check box of RAT in the navigation tree so that neighboring cell relationships can be displayed in the map window.
Step 3 Choose Open Neighbor Relations from the shortcut menu. Step 4 Perform the following operations as required. If you need to...
Then...
View neighboring cell relationships
In the main window of the U-Net, click a cell in the Cell area. Alternatively, click a certain cell in the map window, as shown in Figure 8-7. The neighboring cell relationships of the selected cell are displayed in the table in the Cell area and in the map window simultaneously.
Filter neighboring cells
1. In the Cell area of the main window, Choose Filter from the shortcut menu.. 2. Set filter criteria in the displayed dialog box. For details, see Parameters for Setting Conditions for Checking Neighbor Relationships and Filtering Neighboring Cells. 3. Select the box in front of Highlighted on Geographic. The filtered cells are displayed in green in the map window, as shown in Figure 8-8. NOTE If you select the None option in the Filter dialog box, the color of filtered cells in the map window is cleared.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
545
GENEX U-Net User Guide
8 Multi-Mode Network Planning
If you need to...
Then...
Remove the filter effect on neighboring cells
Right-click in the Cell area of the main window and choose Remove Filter from the shortcut menu. The table in the Cell area switches back to the state when no filter criterion is used, and the color of filtered cells in the map window is cleared. NOTE Remove Filter is available only after filter criteria are used.
Audit neighboring cell relationships
1. In the Cell area of the main window, right-click the table and choose Statistic from the shortcut menu. 2. Set audit conditions in the displayed dialog box. For details, see Parameters for Setting Conditions for Checking Neighbor Relationships and Filtering Neighboring Cells. 3. Click OK. The check report is exported to an XLS file. The exported file contains multiple sheets, and each sheet shows the result that meets certain audit conditions.
Export the result of neighboring cell planning
1. In the Cell area of the main window, Choose Export from the shortcut menu.. 2. In the displayed Export Neighbor dialog box, select an export mode. l Incremental Export: Export only the changed neighboring cell relationships. l Full Export: Export all neighboring cell relationships. 3. Click Export. NOTE In the exported file of neighboring cell relationships, you can refer to the values in the CellPCI and NeighborCellPCI columns for the LTE network when creating MML scripts.
Delete neighboring cell relationships
1. In the Cell area of the main window, select a cell whose neighboring cell relationships need to be adjusted. 2. Clear the check box for the selected cell in the Confirm column of the table in the right pane.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
546
GENEX U-Net User Guide
8 Multi-Mode Network Planning
If you need to...
Then...
Modify neighboring cell relationships
1. Select a source cell on the map. 2. Hold down Ctrl and click the cells except the source cell to add or delete unidirectional neighboring cell relationships. 3. Hold down Shift and click the cells except the source cell to add or delete bidirectional neighboring cell relationships. NOTE l If an added or deleted neighboring cell relationship is the same as an existing one, the check box for the selected cell in the Confirm column of the table in the right pane is automatically selected or cleared. l If an added neighboring cell relationship is different from the existing ones, the neighboring cell relationship is added to the neighboring cell list and the value of Cause for the cell is force in the Cause column. l If the number of neighboring cells for a cell reaches the maximum number, a confirmation dialog box is displayed when more neighboring cells are added. You can click Yes to add these neighboring cells, or click No to cancel the operation.
Export the X2 interface relationship data
This function is available only for the LTE-FDD network. The X2 interface relationship data can be exported only after the planning result is applied to each cell. 1. In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > LTE. 2. Right-click and choose Export X2 Relations from the shortcut menu. The Export X2 Relations dialog box is displayed. 3. In the Area area, set the area whose X2 interface relationship data needs to be exported. 4. Specify an export path. 5. Click OK.
Clear the result of neighboring cell planning
1. Right-click in the Cell area of the main window and choose Clear Existed Neighbors from the shortcut menu. 2. In the displayed U-Net dialog box, click Y. The existing result of neighboring cell planning is cleared. NOTE You can clear the existing result of neighboring cell planning so that the planning of neighboring cells next time will not be affected.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
547
GENEX U-Net User Guide
8 Multi-Mode Network Planning
Figure 8-7 Clicking a cell in the map window
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
548
GENEX U-Net User Guide
8 Multi-Mode Network Planning
Figure 8-8 Filter
----End
8.9.5 Parameters for Viewing Neighboring Cell Planning Results This section describes the parameters for viewing neighbor relationships. You can refer to this section when viewing neighboring cell planning results after the neighboring cell planning is complete. Table 8-7 Tab page description Parameter
Description
Intra-Frequency
Indicates intra-frequency neighboring cells.
Inter-Frequency
Indicates inter-frequency neighboring cells.
Inter-RAT
Indicates inter-RAT neighboring cells.
The tab page name varies according to the network technology. Read the description on the actual tab page. Table 8-8 Parameter description
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Parameter
Description
Neighbor Name
Indicates the name of a neighboring cell.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
549
GENEX U-Net User Guide
8 Multi-Mode Network Planning
Parameter
Description
Cause
Indicates the reason for configuring a cell as the neighboring cell of the serving cell. l existed: Indicates the existing neighbor relationships on the network. l planned: Indicates the planned neighbor relationships. l force: Indicates the neighbor relationships manually added by users. l inherited: Indicates the inherited neighbor relationships. Indicates whether a cell is configured as the neighboring cell of the serving cell.
Confirm
If the option is selected, the cell is configured as the neighboring cell of the serving cell. If the option is not selected, the cell is not configured as the neighboring cell of the serving cell. Blind Handover
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Indicates a neighboring cell for blind handover.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
550
GENEX U-Net User Guide
9 FAQ
9
FAQ
About This Chapter This section provides the frequently asked questions (FAQs) related to the U-Net. 9.1 How Do I Select the Required Software Before Installing the U-Net This section describes how to select the required software before installing the U-Net to ensure that the U-Net runs properly. Refer to the following information before you install the U-Net. 9.2 How Do I Select The GENEX U-Net Software Installation Packages At Huawei Support Website This section describes how to select the proper GENEX U-Net software installation packages at huawei support website. Four GENEX U-Net software installation packages are available at huawei support website. You need to select the GENEX U-Net software installation packages based on the configurations of PCs. Refer to the following information before you download installation packages from huawei support website. 9.3 How Do I Check Field Matching in the Field Mapping Area In the Field Mapping area, you can check whether the fields in the file to be imported match those in the U-Net system. When you import a file to the U-Net and the system already displays the Data Import or Import File dialog box, you can refer to the information provided in this section. 9.4 How Do I Use the U-Net to Import Data Into or Export Data From an XLS File in Microsoft Office 2007 This section describes how to use the U-Net to import data into or export data from an XLS file in Microsoft Office 2007. Refer to the following information if you cannot use the U-Net to import data into or export data from an XLS file after the Microsoft Office 2007 has been installed. 9.5 How Do I Import a Map in an English Windows 7 Operating System When the Directory of the Map Contains Chinese Characters This section describes how to import a map in an English Windows 7 operating system when the directory of the map contains Chinese characters. Refer to the following information when the directory of an imported map contains Chinese characters in an English Windows 7 operating system. 9.6 How Do I Use the EarthView Function Properly This section describes how to solve the problems that occur when the EarthView function is used, such as failure to load the Google Earth, garbled images, and other abnormal display. Refer Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
551
GENEX U-Net User Guide
9 FAQ
to the following information if the preceding problems occur when you are using the EarthView function. 9.7 How Do I Configure the Default Printer to Enable the Progress Bar for Creating a Project to Display Properly This section describes how to configure the default printer to enable the progress bar for creating a project to display properly. Refer to the following information if the progress bar for creating a project remains unchanged for a long period of time but the new project runs properly after the printer is disconnected from the network. 9.8 How Do I Draw a Polygon in the Windows XP 64-bit Operating System This section describes how to solve the problem that the system displays an error message when the U-Net is used to draw a polygon in the Windows XP 64-bit operating system. Refer to the following information if the preceding problem occurs. 9.9 How Do I Rectify the ODBC Drive Fault That Results in Project Creation Failure This section describes how to solve the problem when a project fails to be created due to damaged or missing information in the regsvr32 msjetoledb40.dll file of JET 4.0 in the registry. You can refer to this section when a project fails to be created.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
552
GENEX U-Net User Guide
9 FAQ
9.1 How Do I Select the Required Software Before Installing the U-Net This section describes how to select the required software before installing the U-Net to ensure that the U-Net runs properly. Refer to the following information before you install the U-Net.
Question How do I select the required software before installing the U-Net?
Answer The software to be installed in advance varies according to the U-Net version. Select the software to be installed based on the U-Net version. If...
Then...
The U-Net 3.5 is to be installed
l Install the Microsoft Office 2003. l Log in to http://www.microsoft.com, and download the .NET Framework2.0.
The U-Net 3.6 or U-Net 3.7 is to be installed
Log in to http://www.microsoft.com, and download the .NET Framework3.5.
The U-Net 3.8 is to be installed
Log in to http://www.microsoft.com, and download the .NET Framework4.0.
The Volcano propagation model is required
Contact Siradel to purchase Volcano 3.1.2 or a later version.
----End
9.2 How Do I Select The GENEX U-Net Software Installation Packages At Huawei Support Website This section describes how to select the proper GENEX U-Net software installation packages at huawei support website. Four GENEX U-Net software installation packages are available at huawei support website. You need to select the GENEX U-Net software installation packages based on the configurations of PCs. Refer to the following information before you download installation packages from huawei support website.
Question How to select the GENEX U-Net software installation packages at Huawei support website?
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
553
GENEX U-Net User Guide
9 FAQ
Answer Step 1 View the four GENEX U-Net software installation packages at http://support.huawei.com, as shown in Figure 9-1. Figure 9-1 GENEX U-Net V300R008C00
l Huawei.UNet32(exclude framework) Supports 32-bit operating system, excluding the .net framework. l Huawei.UNet64 Supports 64-bit operating system, including the .net framework. l Huawei.UNet64(exclude framework) Supports 64-bit operating system, excluding the .net framework. l Huawei.UNet32 Supports 32-bit operating system, including the .net framework. NOTE
l Normally, Windows XP is a 32-bit operating system. l Windows 7 operating system falls into 32-bit and 64-bit operating systems. Right-click My Computer and choose Properties from the shortcut menu to view bits of the operating system and select corresponding installation packages.
Step 2 Check whether the .net framework is installed in Add/Remove Programs and select installation packages based on the actual situation. If...
Then...
The .net framework has been installed.
Download the installation package excluding the .net framework.
The .net framework is not installed.
Download the installation package including the .net framework.
----End
9.3 How Do I Check Field Matching in the Field Mapping Area In the Field Mapping area, you can check whether the fields in the file to be imported match those in the U-Net system. When you import a file to the U-Net and the system already displays the Data Import or Import File dialog box, you can refer to the information provided in this section. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
554
GENEX U-Net User Guide
9 FAQ
Question How to check field matching in the Field Mapping area?
Answer Step 1 In the Field Mapping area, check the display result of each cell in the Source row, as shown in Figure 9-2. Figure 9-2 Field Mapping area
l The Source row displays the column fields of the file to be imported. l If the Source row cannot display field names correctly, you need to modify the file to be imported. l The U-Net has requirements on the format of the file to be imported. Therefore, it is recommended that you export the existing data in the system to a file, which is used as a template. After that, you modify data based on the template and then import the file to the U-Net. Step 2 In the Field Mapping area, check the display result of each cell in the Destination row. If...
Then...
Display IGNORE.
l It indicates that the fields in the file to be imported do not match those in the system. Therefore, the data of this column cannot be imported to the U-Net. l If the fields in the file to be imported match some existing fields in the system. You can click match them.
next to the cell to manually
NOTE l Among the fields in the system, there are one or more fields that must be matched. These fields must match those in the file to be imported. Otherwise, you cannot click Import or the system prompts an error message when you click Import. l For example, when you import a site file, Site Name is a field that must be matched.
Display existing field names in the system.
It indicates that the fields in the file to be imported match those in the system. Therefore, the data of this column can be imported to the U-Net.
----End Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
555
GENEX U-Net User Guide
9 FAQ
9.4 How Do I Use the U-Net to Import Data Into or Export Data From an XLS File in Microsoft Office 2007 This section describes how to use the U-Net to import data into or export data from an XLS file in Microsoft Office 2007. Refer to the following information if you cannot use the U-Net to import data into or export data from an XLS file after the Microsoft Office 2007 has been installed.
Question When data is being imported into or exported from an XLS file, a dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-3. How can I solve the problem? The following takes exporting neighboring cell relationships for example. Figure 9-3 Export neighbor relation
Answer Set regional language of the operating system to be the same as the language of the current version of Microsoft Office 2007 by referring to workaround measures provided by the Microsoft. If the language of the current version of Microsoft Office 2007 is English, set regional language of the operating system to English (United States) on the Regional Options tab page, as shown in Figure 9-4.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
556
GENEX U-Net User Guide
9 FAQ
Figure 9-4 Regional and Language Options
----End
9.5 How Do I Import a Map in an English Windows 7 Operating System When the Directory of the Map Contains Chinese Characters This section describes how to import a map in an English Windows 7 operating system when the directory of the map contains Chinese characters. Refer to the following information when the directory of an imported map contains Chinese characters in an English Windows 7 operating system.
Question How to solve the problem if a map fails to be imported and displayed in an English Windows 7 operating system because the directory of the map contains Chinese characters?
Answer Step 1 Choose Control Panel > Region and Language > Administrative, as shown in Figure 9-5. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
557
GENEX U-Net User Guide
9 FAQ
Figure 9-5 Region and Language
Step 2 Click Change system locale. Step 3 In the displayed dialog box, select Chinese (Simplified,PRC) from the Current system locale drop-down list box, as shown in Figure 9-6.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
558
GENEX U-Net User Guide
9 FAQ
Figure 9-6 Region and Language Settings
Step 4 Restart the PC. ----End
9.6 How Do I Use the EarthView Function Properly This section describes how to solve the problems that occur when the EarthView function is used, such as failure to load the Google Earth, garbled images, and other abnormal display. Refer to the following information if the preceding problems occur when you are using the EarthView function.
Question How do I solve the problems that occur when the EarthView function is used, such as failure to load the Google Earth, garbled images, abnormal display during remote connection attempts, and other abnormal display events?
Answer Step 1 Ensure that the Google Earth client in 6.0.3.2197 or later is installed. Step 2 You are advised to select DirectX in the Graphics Mode area, as shown in Figure 9-7.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
559
GENEX U-Net User Guide
9 FAQ
Figure 9-7 Google Earth Options
----End
9.7 How Do I Configure the Default Printer to Enable the Progress Bar for Creating a Project to Display Properly This section describes how to configure the default printer to enable the progress bar for creating a project to display properly. Refer to the following information if the progress bar for creating a project remains unchanged for a long period of time but the new project runs properly after the printer is disconnected from the network.
Question The progress bar for creating a project remains unchanged for a long period of time but the new project runs properly after the printer is disconnected from the network. How can I solve the problem?
Answer If you set a remote printer as a default printer, the access to a local printer takes a long period of time or fails. In this case, the system runs slowly or the progress bar for creating a project remains unchanged when you obtain printer parameters to create a project. Set a local printer that is accessible as the default printer or delete all printers. ----End Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
560
GENEX U-Net User Guide
9 FAQ
9.8 How Do I Draw a Polygon in the Windows XP 64-bit Operating System This section describes how to solve the problem that the system displays an error message when the U-Net is used to draw a polygon in the Windows XP 64-bit operating system. Refer to the following information if the preceding problem occurs.
Question How to solve the problem that the system displays an error message when the U-Net is used to draw a polygon in the Windows XP 64-bit operating system?
Answer The MSVCR71.DLL system library file needs to be invoked when you are using the U-Net to draw a graph. This system library file is delivered with all Windows operating systems by default except the Windows XP 64-bit operating system. In a Windows XP 32-bit operating system, search the MSVCR71.DLL system library file in the System32 directory. Then copy the file to the SysWOW64 directory in the Windows XP 64-bit operating system. ----End
9.9 How Do I Rectify the ODBC Drive Fault That Results in Project Creation Failure This section describes how to solve the problem when a project fails to be created due to damaged or missing information in the regsvr32 msjetoledb40.dll file of JET 4.0 in the registry. You can refer to this section when a project fails to be created.
Question How do I solve the problem when a project fails to be created and the dialog box in Figure 9-8 is displayed? Figure 9-8 Creating project failed
Answer Step 1 Choose Start > Run. The Run dialog box is displayed. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
561
GENEX U-Net User Guide
9 FAQ
Step 2 Type regsvr32 msjetoledb40.dll in the dialog box. Step 3 Click OK. Step 4 Restart the computer. ----End
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
562
GENEX U-Net User Guide
10 U-Net Auxiliary Functions
10
U-Net Auxiliary Functions
About This Chapter The U-Net provides functions in addition to network planning, such as moving a map, zooming in or out a map, measuring distances on a map, and setting NE display. 10.1 Moving, Centering, and Zooming In/Out on a Map This section describes how to adjust a map. You can magnify a certain area on a map, change the scaling of a map, center a map based on a selected object, and move a map up, down, left, or right. When you center a map based a certain object or move a map, the existing scaling does not change. 10.2 Measuring Distance on the Map This section describes how to measure the linear distance and the folding line distance between two points on the map by using the distance measurement tool. 10.3 Querying the Terrain Profile Between Two Points You can query the terrain profile between any two points to understand and analyze the terrain information about the two points. 10.4 Querying the Legend Information This section describes how to query the legend information about each object in the map window. You can query the legend information about the geographic data, DT data, prediction results, and capacity simulation results in the map window. 10.5 Exporting a Map to the Google Earth The U-Net enables you to display the map elements (such as base stations, cells, and polygons) and planning results (such as prediction results and capacity simulation results) on the Google Earth and export them as .kmz files. In this way, a two-dimensional map can be displayed in three-dimensional mode, which enables you to easily query the network planning results and reduces the workload of field survey. 10.6 Setting Layer Display Properties This section describes how to set layer display properties. After the geographic data is imported, the data is displayed on different layers in the map window based on the data types. You can select a layer to be displayed and adjust its position to ensure that the data on this layer is accurately and clearly displayed. In addition, you can adjust the display sequence of layers so that you can check the display and print effect of multiple layers. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
563
GENEX U-Net User Guide
10 U-Net Auxiliary Functions
10.7 Saving Display Effect of Map Layers You can export the display effect of overlapped layers in the map window as images in .bmp, .png or .jpg format. The resolution of the exported images is consistent with the resolution of the actual geographic data. 10.8 Managing Table Windows You can open table windows with various contents (such as NE parameters and traffic parameters) in a U-Net project. When performing common operations (such as closing or switching tables) or using shortcut menus in a table window, you can refer to the information provided in this section. 10.9 Managing Docked Windows The U-Net provides multiple types of docked windows, such as explorer window, point analysis window, event window, and resource usage window. You can customize the display style of docked windows. 10.10 Managing the Explorer Window The Explorer window is a docked window, which plays an important role in the U-Net. In the Explorer window, data items and objects are arranged in the form of nodes. You can manage each node by right-clicking it and then choosing an option from the shortcut menu. You can modify the contents under a node or edit a subnode under a node. In addition, the data corresponding to most nodes can be managed in tables. This helps you to easily manage a large amount of data. 10.11 Setting the Display Properties of NEs This section describes how to set the display properties of NEs. The U-Net supports several modes to display the information about base stations. You can select the information about base stations to be displayed and set the display style of base stations. In this way, you can quickly identify a base station. 10.12 Searching Sites and Cells This section describes how to search sites and cells. The U-Net provides the function of searching sites, transceivers, cells, and repeaters. To search a site, transceiver, cell, or repeater, you need to type only its name. Then, the U-Net directly locates the corresponding site, transceiver, cell, or repeater in the map window. 10.13 Grouping Sites and Cells This section describes how to group sites and cells. You can group sites and cells based on the grouping modes predefined by the U-Net. Sites and cells can be grouped based on their existing attributes. If the predefined grouping modes do not meet your requirements, you can customize a grouping mode. 10.14 Displaying the Cell Hexagon Display the hexagon cellular grid for cell coverage. Users can accurately stitch the cellular grid based on the cell coverage radius of the selected site during site deployment. This reduces adjustment workload and coverage hole and improve site deployment efficiency. 10.15 Importing BCP Data The U-Net allows you to import basic call process (BCP) data. By importing such data, you can obtain configuration data on the live network, such as neighbor relationships and frequencies. 10.16 Printing Planning Results You can print the U-Net planning results to facilitate file storing and subsequent network construction. 10.17 Calibrating Propagation Models
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
564
GENEX U-Net User Guide
10 U-Net Auxiliary Functions
You can calibrate propagation models based on the CW data. After the calibration, the path loss matrix calculated based on the propagation model is close to the actual measurement value. 10.18 Interface Description: U-Net Auxiliary Functions This section describes the interfaces and parameters for U-Net auxiliary functions.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
565
GENEX U-Net User Guide
10 U-Net Auxiliary Functions
10.1 Moving, Centering, and Zooming In/Out on a Map This section describes how to adjust a map. You can magnify a certain area on a map, change the scaling of a map, center a map based on a selected object, and move a map up, down, left, or right. When you center a map based a certain object or move a map, the existing scaling does not change.
Procedure l
Zoom in on or zoom out on a map. You can zoom in on and zoom out on a map by changing the position of the mouse pointer. 1.
Click
on the toolbar to zoom in on or zoom out on a map.
2.
Click on the map. – Click in the map window to zoom in on the map. – Right-click in the map window to zoom out on the map. TIP
l You can scroll the mouse wheel forward or backward to zoom in on or zoom out on the map. l Alternatively, you can right-click in the map window and choose Zoom In or Zoom Out to zoom in on or zoom out on the map.
l
Magnify an area on a map. 1.
Click on the toolbar. Alternatively, right-click in the map window and choose Define a Zoom Area from the shortcut menu.
2.
Click a corner of the area to be magnified on the map.
3.
Hold and drag the mouse pointer to the diagonal corner of the area. Release the mouse button. Then, the selected area is magnified.
l
Select a scaling. on the toolbar.
1.
Click
2.
Select a scaling from the drop-down list box. If the required scaling is not available in the list, you can click , type the required scaling in the box, and press Enter. The UNet zooms in on or zooms out on the map based on the specified scaling.
l
l
Move a map. 1.
Click
2.
Move the mouse pointer to the map and drag the map to the required direction.
on the toolbar.
Center the map. – To enable the map to center on the map, click
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
on the toolbar. 566
GENEX U-Net User Guide
10 U-Net Auxiliary Functions
– To enable the map to center on an object in the map window, right-click an object in the Explorer window and choose Center in The Map from the shortcut menu. ----End
10.2 Measuring Distance on the Map This section describes how to measure the linear distance and the folding line distance between two points on the map by using the distance measurement tool.
Procedure Step 1 Click on the toolbar. Alternatively, right-click in the map window and choose Distance Measurement from the shortcut menu. Step 2 Click a point on the map and use it as the starting point for measuring the distance. Then, the starting point is fixed. When the pointer moves away from the starting point, a red dotted line appears between the pointer and the starting point. The distance between the pointer and the starting point is displayed in the status bar in real time. Step 3 Click another point on the map and use it as the second point for measuring the distance. Then, the red dotted line between the starting point and the second line becomes a red continuous line. Step 4 Repeat Step 3 to add several points to form a folding line. Then, the following information is displayed in the status bar: Distance: Distance between the second-to-last point and the last point/Distance between the first point and the last point Step 5 Double-click the line or right-click in the map window to complete the distance measurement. ----End
10.3 Querying the Terrain Profile Between Two Points You can query the terrain profile between any two points to understand and analyze the terrain information about the two points.
Procedure Step 1 Click
on the toolbar in the U-Net main interface.
The Terrain View window is displayed in the U-Net main interface. Step 2 Click in the map window to determine the start point of the terrain analysis line. After determining the start point, move the cursor. A dotted line appears between the cursor and the start point. Right-click to exit the drawing of the terrain analysis line. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
567
GENEX U-Net User Guide
10 U-Net Auxiliary Functions
Step 3 Click in another place in the map window to determine the end point of the terrain analysis line. After the end point is determined, a continuous line appears between the two points. The terrain profile of the two points is displayed in the Terrain View window. NOTE
l The system allows you to draw only one terrain analysis line. l After a terrain analysis line is drawn, click in any place in the map window. The original terrain analysis line disappears and the system begins to draw a new terrain analysis line.
Step 4 As shown in Figure 10-1, set the following parameters in the Terrain View window: l Transceiver height: Indicates the height of a transmitter. l Receiver height: Indicates the height of a receiver. l Show building: Indicates whether to show the buildings. l Frequency: Indicates the frequency of a transmitter. After the parameters are set, the Terrain View window will automatically update and display the terrain profile. Figure 10-1 Terrain View window
----End
10.4 Querying the Legend Information This section describes how to query the legend information about each object in the map window. You can query the legend information about the geographic data, DT data, prediction results, and capacity simulation results in the map window.
Context You can select legend objects for display based on the service analysis requirement. For example, during the prediction, the map displays multiple prediction results and you may find it difficult to query the required prediction result. In this case, you can select or clear a legend object to display or hide certain prediction results. Therefore, you can focus on the key services. Then, only the selected legend object is displayed in the legend window. This section describes how to query the legend information about the prediction results. The procedure for querying other legend information is similar to the procedure for querying the legend information about the prediction results. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
568
GENEX U-Net User Guide
10 U-Net Auxiliary Functions
Procedure Step 1 Select a legend object. 1.
In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx > counter item.
3.
Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
4.
Click the Display tab.
5.
In the last column of the object list, select legend objects as required. NOTE
The non-selected object will not be displayed in the legend window.
If the default legend objects cannot meet your analysis requirements, you can define new objects. For example, to add a new legend object before an existing legend object, you can select the existing legend object and choose Actions > Insert Before; then, the system creates the new legend object automatically. 6.
Select Add to legend. The legend of prediction is displayed in the Legend window.
7.
Optional: Select Show Statistic. The statistics on the selected ranges are displayed in the Legend window.
Step 2 Set the display parameters of the legend. You can set the color, description, and value range of a legend in the object list. Step 3 Query the legend information. Choose Window > Legend. The Legend window is displayed. After the prediction calculation is complete, the description information and color of all the selected legend objects in the project are displayed in the legend window. ----End
10.5 Exporting a Map to the Google Earth The U-Net enables you to display the map elements (such as base stations, cells, and polygons) and planning results (such as prediction results and capacity simulation results) on the Google Earth and export them as .kmz files. In this way, a two-dimensional map can be displayed in three-dimensional mode, which enables you to easily query the network planning results and reduces the workload of field survey.
Prerequisites l
A coordinate system is available.
l
The PC is connected to the Internet.
Procedure Step 1 Click
on the toolbar. The Earth View dialog box is displayed.
You must set a coordinate system. For detailed description of parameters, see 3.3.7 Configuring the Projection Mode and Spheroid Data. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
569
GENEX U-Net User Guide
10 U-Net Auxiliary Functions
Step 2 Select the object to be displayed on the Google Earth. For detailed description of parameters, see 10.18.1 Parameters for Exporting Maps to the Google Earth. Step 3 Click View to connect the U-Net to the Google Earth. Step 4 Optional: Click Save to save the selected U-Net data to a .kmz file. By default, the .kmz file is saved on the desktop of the PC and the file name is UNet_Generated.kmz. You can also click
to reset the path to save the file and the file name.
----End
Follow-up Procedure l
After the U-Net is connected to the Google Earth, you can query objects displayed in threedimensional mode on the Google Earth. See Figure 10-2.
l
After the U-Net is connected to the Google Earth, you can select or clear the objects described in Step 2 in the navigation tree in the Explorer window of the U-Net. In this way, the objects can be displayed or hidden on the Google Earth.
l
After the U-Net is connected to the Google Earth, you can modify the objects described in Step 2, such as creating or deleting a prediction group or a polygon. Upon completion of the modification, perform Step 1 to Step 4 again to refresh the display status of the Google Earth.
Figure 10-2 Three-dimensional display of objects on the Google Earth
10.6 Setting Layer Display Properties This section describes how to set layer display properties. After the geographic data is imported, the data is displayed on different layers in the map window based on the data types. You can Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
570
GENEX U-Net User Guide
10 U-Net Auxiliary Functions
select a layer to be displayed and adjust its position to ensure that the data on this layer is accurately and clearly displayed. In addition, you can adjust the display sequence of layers so that you can check the display and print effect of multiple layers.
Prerequisites The geographic data is imported.
Context A map consists of a series of layers. The top layer can be clearly viewed in the map. It can also be clearly viewed after the map is printed. The visibility of the bottom layer depends on the definition and transparency of the upper layers. On the U-Net, the display sequence of the layers is determined by the sequence of the nodes under the Map node on the Geo tab page in the Explorer window. You can adjust the sequence of each node under the Map node to adjust the display sequence of each layer. You can use the U-Net to adjust the display sequence of the layers Satellitic, Geometry, Text, Vector, Buildings, Clutter, and Heights and the display sequence of the sublayers of these layers. In addition, you can adjust the display sequence of the prediction counters in the map window.
Procedure l
Select the layer objects to be displayed. In the Explorer window, you can select or clear the check box of a layer object to display or hide the layer object. For example, if you select the check box of Map on the Geo tab page, all the layers corresponding to the nodes under the Map node are displayed in the map window. If you clear the check box of a node under the Map node, the layer corresponding to the node is hidden in the map window. NOTE
The hidden object in the map window is still taken into account during calculation.
l
Adjust the position of a layer. During network planning, the U-Net supports the offset of the layers Satellitic, Geometry, Text, Vector, Buildings, Clutter, and Heights. This enables users to adjust the map and positions of the sites.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
1.
In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Map.
3.
Choose Adjust Map from the shortcut menu. The Adjust Map dialog box is displayed.. See Figure 10-3.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
571
GENEX U-Net User Guide
10 U-Net Auxiliary Functions
Figure 10-3 Adjust Map
4.
Select the layer to be adjusted from the Map Layer drop-down list. If only one layer is selected after the layer is selected, its geodetic coordinates at the northern boundary are displayed in the Top of Layer field and its geodetic coordinates at the western boundary is displayed in the Left of Layer field. The vertical offset of the layer is displayed in the Y Offset text box and the horizontal offset of the layer is displayed in the X Offset text box. If two or more layers are selected or no layer is selected, no value is displayed for Top of Layer, Left of Layer, Y Offset, and X Offset. NOTE
For the offset of the layers Geometry, Text, and Vector, The values of Top of Layer and Left of Layer are not displayed. For the offset of the layers Satellitic, Buildings, Clutter, and Heights, The values of Top of Layer and Left of Layer indicate the geodetic coordinates of corresponding layers.
5.
Type the layer offset in the text box in the middle and set the offset direction by clicking Up, Down, Left, or Right. The offset of a layer ranges from 10 meters to 10,000 meters.
6.
Click Close. The layer position adjustment is complete. The positions of layers are refreshed in the map window accordingly.
l
Adjust the display sequence of layers. 1.
On the Geo tab page of the Explorer window, select the nodes corresponding to the target layer objects under the Map node. The layer objects include the layers Satellitic, Geometry, Text, Vector, Buildings, Clutter, and Heights.
2.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Click a layer object and drag it to the new position.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
572
GENEX U-Net User Guide
10 U-Net Auxiliary Functions
The horizontal black line indicates the position where the object is to be placed when you release the mouse. After you drag the object, the U-Net automatically refreshes the display effect of the map based on the adjusted sequence. ----End
10.7 Saving Display Effect of Map Layers You can export the display effect of overlapped layers in the map window as images in .bmp, .png or .jpg format. The resolution of the exported images is consistent with the resolution of the actual geographic data.
Prerequisites The geographic data is imported.
Procedure Step 1 Select the objects to be exported. If you need to...
Then...
Export 1. Under the Geo tab in the Explorer window, select the layers to be overlapped layers exported under the Map node. 2. In the navigation tree, choose Map. Export a single layer
1. In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab. 2. In the navigation tree, choose Map > sub map layer.
Step 2 Choose Save As from the shortcut menu. The Export Map Layer dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Set the area for export. l Full Map: exports the entire map. l A polygon: exports the external rectangular area of a polygon. Step 4 Set the resolution for export. l Origin Map Scale: exports images according to the original resolution of the geographic data. l Current Map Scale: exports images according to the display resolution of the geographic data in the map window. Step 5 Set the save path, file name, and file format of the exported file. TIP
The higher the resolution is, the larger the map size is. Before exporting a map, ensure that the save path has sufficient free disk space.
Step 6 Click Save. ----End Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
573
GENEX U-Net User Guide
10 U-Net Auxiliary Functions
10.8 Managing Table Windows You can open table windows with various contents (such as NE parameters and traffic parameters) in a U-Net project. When performing common operations (such as closing or switching tables) or using shortcut menus in a table window, you can refer to the information provided in this section.
Procedure l
Table 10-1 lists the common operations provided in a table window. Table 10-1 Common operations provided in a table window If...
Then...
Close a table window.
Click
Display a table window at the very front.
Double-click the title of the table window.
Switch a table window.
Click the tab title. Alternatively, you can click on the right and then select the required table window from the drop-down list.
Drag a column in a table window.
Click the column name to select it. Then, click the column name again, hold the left mouse button, and drag the column to the required position when the mouse arrow
.
Usually, table windows are displayed as tabs in the working area of the U-Net main window.
changes to
.
Not all the table windows support this function. l
Table 10-2 describes the shortcut menus provided in a table window. NOTE
If a shortcut menu item in a table window grays out, it indicates that the function is not supported in the table window or the function is currently unavailable.
Table 10-2 Shortcut menus provided in a table window Name
Description
Import
Imports a file in the .txt, .csv, .xls, or .xlsx format. NOTE l If a file fails to be imported, check whether the parameter names in the file to be imported match those in the table window. l You can right-click in a table window and then choose Display Columns from the shortcut menu to display all the parameter names of the current table.
Export
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Exports the data of all the available columns in a table. The file exported is in the .txt, .csv, or .xls format. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
574
GENEX U-Net User Guide
10 U-Net Auxiliary Functions
Name
Description
Record Properties
Displays the property panel of the NE corresponding to the selected cell.
Table Fields
Opens the window for customizing table fields. The window is used for setting customized fields and supports the Site, Transceiver, and Cell tables. You can click Add, Delete, or Properties to add, delete, or modify a customized field. For parameter description, see 10.18.2 Parameters for Setting Custom Fields.
Display Columns
Opens the Columns to be displayed window, which is used to show or hide table columns.
Hide Columns
Hides the currently selected column. After performing this operation, you can use the Display Columns function to show the column again. TIP You can click a column title to select the column.
Freeze Columns
Freezes the currently selected column. A frozen column is displayed as the first column in a table. When you view table data, the frozen column is displayed in the window all the time for viewing.
Unfreeze all Columns
Unfreezes a frozen column. l This function is available after you perform the Freeze Columns operation. l Before performing this operation, you must select a table column.
Copy
Copies selected data.
Paste
Pastes data.
Delete
Deletes data in the selected row.
Filter by Selection
Filters data according to the selected cell. Compare the data of other cells in the column with the data of the selected cell. If the data is consistent, the system displays the data record corresponding to the selected cell. TIP You can also select multiple cells in a same column and then perform data filtering. If the data of any cell is the same as that of other cells in the column, the data remains to be displayed.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
575
GENEX U-Net User Guide
10 U-Net Auxiliary Functions
Name
Description
Filter Excluding Selection
Filters data reversely according to the selected cell. l Compare the data of other cells in the column with the data of the selected cell. If the data is different, the system displays the data record corresponding to the selected cell. l You can also select multiple cells in a same column and then perform data reverse filtering. If the data is not the same as that of other cells in the column, the data remains to be displayed.
Remove Filter
Removes all the filter conditions. This function is available after you perform the Filter by Selection or Filter Excluding Selection operation.
Sort Ascending
Sorts table data in the selected column in ascending order.
Sort Descending
Sorts table data in the selected column in descending order.
NOTE
The system saves the current table settings while saving the project, for example, display order of columns, row height, and column width.
----End
10.9 Managing Docked Windows The U-Net provides multiple types of docked windows, such as explorer window, point analysis window, event window, and resource usage window. You can customize the display style of docked windows.
Procedure l
Display a docked window. – If you want to display a docked window, select Window > Name of the docked window. – If you do not want to display a docked window, deselect Window > Name of the docked window.
l
Hide a docked window. When a docked window is not active, you can click at the upper right corner of the window to hide it at the window border. When you place the pointer at the corresponding position of the window border, the system automatically displays the docked window. When you move the pointer away, the system automatically hides the docked window. at the upper right To undo the operation of hiding a docked window, you can click corner of the window. Then, the hidden docked window is displayed.
l
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Float a docked window.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
576
GENEX U-Net User Guide
10 U-Net Auxiliary Functions
Double-click the title bar of the docked window. The docked window moves away from the dock area and floats over the workspace. If you double-click the title bar again, the docked window returns to the previous dock area. You can move a docked window by clicking or moving the title bar. ----End
10.10 Managing the Explorer Window The Explorer window is a docked window, which plays an important role in the U-Net. In the Explorer window, data items and objects are arranged in the form of nodes. You can manage each node by right-clicking it and then choosing an option from the shortcut menu. You can modify the contents under a node or edit a subnode under a node. In addition, the data corresponding to most nodes can be managed in tables. This helps you to easily manage a large amount of data.
Context The Explorer window provides the following sections: l
GEO (
l
Data (
l
Network (
l
Operation (
), which provides entries to geographic data management ), which provides entries to radio data management and calculation ), which provides entries to engineering parameter management ), which provides entries to prediction, simulation, and planning.
For details about each section, see 1.3 Main Window of the U-Net. This section describes only the basic operations of the Explorer window.
Procedure l
Switch to a specific section in the Explorer window. Click a tab in the Explorer window to switch to the corresponding section. For example, to display the Data section, click the Data tab.
l
Expand or collapse a section in the Explorer window. The objects are organized in the form of nodes in each section. Any section that contains one or more object nodes has an expand button ( ) or a collapse button ( ) next to the section name. To expand a section, click next to the section name.
l
Display or hide an object on the map by selecting or deselecting the corresponding node in the navigation tree of the Explorer window. You can display or hide an object on the map by selecting or deselecting the corresponding node in the navigation tree of the Explorer window. You can deselect the node corresponding to an object to hide this object on the map. In this way, another object can be clearly displayed on the map. For example, you can hide all the prediction results except one prediction result. In this way, the reserved prediction result can be clearly displayed. The following description takes the hiding of one object as an example to explain this operation. Click a tab in the Explorer window and then deselect an object under the tab. The deselected object is hidden and will not be displayed in the map window.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
577
GENEX U-Net User Guide
10 U-Net Auxiliary Functions NOTE
l The hidden object is not displayed in the map window, but is still considered during calculation. l You can hide all the contents under a node by deselecting the node name. If the check box next to a node is displayed as , it indicates that certain objects are displayed and certain objects are hidden under this node.
----End
10.11 Setting the Display Properties of NEs This section describes how to set the display properties of NEs. The U-Net supports several modes to display the information about base stations. You can select the information about base stations to be displayed and set the display style of base stations. In this way, you can quickly identify a base station.
Context The method for setting the display style of the Site is similar to that of the Transceiver. This section takes setting the display style of the Transceiver as an example.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver. Step 3 Choose Display Setting from the shortcut menu. The Display Field dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set the display style. For detailed description of parameters, see 10.18.4 Parameters for Setting NE Display Properties. Step 5 Click OK. ----End
Follow-up Procedure All the NEs in the project are displayed in the map window according to the preset display style.
10.12 Searching Sites and Cells This section describes how to search sites and cells. The U-Net provides the function of searching sites, transceivers, cells, and repeaters. To search a site, transceiver, cell, or repeater, you need to type only its name. Then, the U-Net directly locates the corresponding site, transceiver, cell, or repeater in the map window.
Procedure l
Search a site or a cell by using the toolbar. 1.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
On the toolbar, choose Edit > Find. Then, select an NE type from the Find drop-down list box, as shown in Figure 10-4. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
578
GENEX U-Net User Guide
10 U-Net Auxiliary Functions
Figure 10-4 Find
2.
Type the NE name in the Name text box, as shown in Figure 10-5. Figure 10-5 Name
3.
Click Enter. The U-Net automatically locates the NE in the map window.
l
Search a site or a cell in the corresponding search window. 1.
In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver.
3.
Choose Find from the shortcut menu. The Find Transceiver dialog box is displayed.
4.
Set search conditions. For details, see 10.18.3 Parameters for Searching for Base Stations.
5.
Click Find. The search result is displayed in the Result area and the statistical result is displayed in the lower part of the dialog box.
6.
Click Geometry to locate the selected cell in the map window.
----End
Follow-up Procedure l
Export base station data. In the Find Transceiver dialog box, click Export to export data of the located base station. For detailed operations, see 3.7.1 Importing Base Station Information.
l
Delete a transceiver. Select the transceiver to be deleted in the Result area and click Delete.
l
View transceiver data. Click Open in the Find Transceiver dialog box to view transceiver parameters.
10.13 Grouping Sites and Cells This section describes how to group sites and cells. You can group sites and cells based on the grouping modes predefined by the U-Net. Sites and cells can be grouped based on their existing attributes. If the predefined grouping modes do not meet your requirements, you can customize a grouping mode. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
579
GENEX U-Net User Guide
10 U-Net Auxiliary Functions
Procedure Step 1 Select a grouping mode. If...
Then...
The predefined grouping modes meet your requirements
Go to Step 3.
The predefined grouping modes do not meet your requirements
Customize a grouping mode. Go to Step 2.
Grouping modes are Go to Step 6 to set the grouping modes to be displayed. not displayed after you choose Group By from the shortcut menu Step 2 Customize a grouping mode. 1.
In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Site/Transceiver.
3.
Choose Open Table from the shortcut menu.
4.
Right-click the table and choose Table Fields from the shortcut menu. The Transceiver Table Fields dialog box is displayed.
5.
Click Add. The Field Define dialog box is displayed.
6.
Set a new grouping mode. l Group: name of the customized group. In normal cases, you do not need to set this parameter. l Legend: field name. If you type a new field name in the text box, the field name is displayed in the table. l Type: field type. You can select Text, Integer, Double, or True/False from the dropdown list box. l Size: length of the field name. The value of this parameter is valid only when Type is set to Text. l Default Value: You are advised to retain the default setting of this parameter. l Choice List: field value. The value of this parameter is valid only when Type is set to Text, Integer, or Double. You can type the value of each field in the Choice List text box and separate them by pressing Enter.
7.
Click OK. The new grouping mode takes effect.
Step 3 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab. Step 4 In the navigation tree, choose Site/Transceiver. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
580
GENEX U-Net User Guide
10 U-Net Auxiliary Functions
Step 5 Choose Group By > group dimension from the shortcut menu. The system automatically groups cells or sites based on the selected grouping mode. Step 6 Customize the grouping modes to be displayed. 1.
In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
2.
Select Site or Transceiver in the navigation tree.
3.
Right-click Site or Transceiver and choose Group By > More from the shortcut menu. The GroupBy Config dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-6. The following takes the Site node for example. Figure 10-6 GroupBy Config dialog box
4.
In the GroupBy Config dialog box, select the customized grouping mode that needs to be displayed when you choose Group By from the shortcut menu.
5.
Click OK. NOTE
You can right-click Site and choose Group By > Grouping Mode to set secondary grouping modes.
----End Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
581
GENEX U-Net User Guide
10 U-Net Auxiliary Functions
Follow-up Procedure After the grouping is complete, view the grouping result. Site groups are displayed based the grouping mode under the Site node in the navigation tree.
10.14 Displaying the Cell Hexagon Display the hexagon cellular grid for cell coverage. Users can accurately stitch the cellular grid based on the cell coverage radius of the selected site during site deployment. This reduces adjustment workload and coverage hole and improve site deployment efficiency.
Prerequisites The value of Hexagon Radius for the transmitter is not empty during site deployment or engineering parameter import.
Procedure on the toolbar. The cell cellular grid is displayed in the map window, as shown in Step 1 Click Figure 10-7. Figure 10-7 Show Cell Hexagon
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
582
GENEX U-Net User Guide
10 U-Net Auxiliary Functions
l After the transmitter location is changed, the cellular grid also moves to the new location. l After the transmitter is deactivated or deleted, the cellular grid of the transmitter disappears. Step 2 Click
again. The cellular grid in the map window disappears.
NOTE
The Hexagon Radius(m) attribute of the transmitter determines the size of the hexagon cellular grid. After the value of Hexagon Radius(m) is changed, the size of the hexagon cellular grid on the map is also changed.
----End
10.15 Importing BCP Data The U-Net allows you to import basic call process (BCP) data. By importing such data, you can obtain configuration data on the live network, such as neighbor relationships and frequencies.
Context If the project supports GSM or UMTS, you can import the BCP data of GSM or UMTS.
Procedure Step 1 Choose File > Import Excel > Configuration Package. The Import Configuration Package dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-8. NOTE
If the hybrid network is any combination of LTE-FDD, GSM, and UMTS, you also need to select the related radio access technologies (RATs).
Figure 10-8 Import Configuration Package
Step 2 In NE Version, select an NE version. Step 3 Click Select Configuration Package to select one or more BCP configuration file packages you want to import. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
583
GENEX U-Net User Guide
10 U-Net Auxiliary Functions
Step 4 Click OK. ----End
10.16 Printing Planning Results You can print the U-Net planning results to facilitate file storing and subsequent network construction.
10.16.1 Print Suggestions The appearance of a map is determined by the arrangement and properties of the objects included in the map window. On the U-Net, objects are arranged in layers. The top layers on the map can be clearly displayed and printed. The visibility of the bottom layers depends on the definition and transparency of the top layers. On the U-Net, the visible objects (such as sites, cells, prediction results, and capacity simulation results) on the Data tab page are more clearly displayed than the visible objects on the Geo tab page. You are advised to arrange layers on the Geo tab page in the following sequence from top to bottom. Thus, the vector layer can be clearly printed. l
Points (vector)
l
Highways and lines (vector)
l
Geographic data about clutter classes (transparent grid)
l
Satellite maps or geographic data about clutter heights (non-transparent) NOTE
For the methods of selecting display objects and setting the display sequence, see 10.6 Setting Layer Display Properties. For the methods of setting the color, transparency, and shading effect, see 3.3.5 Setting Display Parameters of Geographic Data.
10.16.2 Printing Maps Before printing a map, you can set the print properties such as print area and print layout based on the actual requirements. After making the settings, you can select a printer to print the map.
Context Before printing a map, you can set print properties and preview the print effect. l
You can print either an entire map or a part of a map.
l
You can use the default print layout or change it as required. Print layout involves setting the scaling, selecting the ruler, legend, and area, adding a title or mark, and setting the size, source, orientation, and margin of the paper.
Procedure Step 1 Set the print layout. 1.
Choose File > Print Setting. The Print Setting dialog box is displayed.
2.
Select the target print template in the Print Template area.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
584
GENEX U-Net User Guide
10 U-Net Auxiliary Functions
For detailed operations on print templates, see 10.16.3 Customizing a Print Template. 3.
Set print properties in the Print Setting area. For detailed description of parameters, see 10.18.6 Parameters for Setting the Print Properties.
4.
Preview the print effect in the Preview area.
Step 2 In the Print Setting dialog box, click Printer to set the printer, print area, and the number of copies to print. You can select a PDF printer to print the map as a .pdf file. Step 3 In the Print Setting dialog box, click Print or choose File > Print to print. The U-Net supports printing a map into several pages. When the size of the map exceeds the paper size, the system automatically prints it into several pages. ----End
Follow-up Procedure l
Export the print template After setting the print layout, click Export in the Print Setting dialog box to export the print properties of the selected print template as a .cfg configuration file for future use.
l
Import the print template Click Import to import the print template.
10.16.3 Customizing a Print Template The system provides three types of pre-defined print templates. If these print templates cannot meet your requirements, you can customize a print template.
Procedure Step 1 Choose File > Print Setting. The PrintSetting dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Click Add to create a print template. The system automatically creates a print template with the default setting in the Print Template area. Step 3 Modify the properties of the new print template. For details, see 10.18.6 Parameters for Setting the Print Properties. Step 4 Optional: Click Export to export the parameters of the selected template into a .cfg configuration file for future use. ----End
Follow-up Procedure l
Delete a print template. You can click Delete to delete a selected template. However, you cannot delete the last template.
l Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Import a print template. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
585
GENEX U-Net User Guide
10 U-Net Auxiliary Functions
1.
Click Import. The Open dialog box is displayed.
2.
Select the configuration file (in .cfg format) of the print template.
3.
Click Open. NOTE
If the name of the print template to be imported is the same as that of an existing template, the system displays a prompt asking you whether to overwrite the existing template.
10.17 Calibrating Propagation Models You can calibrate propagation models based on the CW data. After the calibration, the path loss matrix calculated based on the propagation model is close to the actual measurement value.
10.17.1 Importing DT Data The U-Net enables you to import DT data for calibrating propagation models.
Prerequisites l
The geographic data is imported.
l
Base stations (sites and cells) are available.
l
Currently, the U-Net supports only the DT data in .txt, .xls and .csv files exported by using the GENEX Probe.
l
For CDMA networks, the U-Net does not support the functions such as importing and filtering DT data.
l
DT data is classified into two types: Drive Test and CW Measurement.
l
This section describes how to import CW Measurement data. The method of importing Drive Test data is similar to that of importing CW Measurement data.
Context
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement. Step 3 Choose Import from the shortcut menu. Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select the file format and the file to be imported. Step 5 Click Open. The Import File dialog box is displayed. Step 6 Set import parameters. l Import Drive Test data. For parameter description, see 10.18.7 Parameters for Importing Drive Test Data. l Import CW data. For parameter description, see 10.18.8 Parameters for Importing CW Measurement Data. Step 7 Click Import to start importing DT data. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
586
GENEX U-Net User Guide
10 U-Net Auxiliary Functions
l In the process of data importing, the system displays prompts in the Event Viewer window. In this case, pay attention to the prompts. l After the data import is complete, the DT data file is displayed under the CW Measurement > Sitex_x node on the navigation tree. ----End
Follow-up Procedure l
View and edit a DT site. In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement > Sitex_x > drive test file. Choose Open Table from the shortcut menu. In the displayed table, you can view and edit DT site properties or delete a single DT site. For parameter description, see 10.18.9 Parameters for Viewing DT Point Information.
l
Delete a DT file. In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement > Sitex_x > drive test file. Choose Delete from the shortcut menu.
l
Move a DT site in the map window. You can directly select a DT site in the map window and then drag it.
l
Set the display effect of a DT site. In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement. Choose Display Setting from the shortcut menu. For parameter description, see 10.18.12 Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of DT Points.
10.17.2 Filtering DT Data After the DT data is imported, you can filter data according to the cell features so that you can filter out the DT points that are incorrect or not required. The U-Net supports filtering based on the level, the distance between the DT point and the cell, the azimuth of the sector, and the clutter class.
Prerequisites l
The geographic data is imported.
l
The DT data is imported.
l
This section describes how to filter CW Measurement data. The method of filtering Drive Test data is similar to that of filtering CW Measurement data.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement > Sitex_x > drive test file. Step 3 Choose Filter from the shortcut menu. The Filter dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set filtering conditions. NOTE
The drive test data can be filtered by Clutter only.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
587
GENEX U-Net User Guide
10 U-Net Auxiliary Functions
l Distance area, set the maximum and minimum distance between DT points and the cell. If the distance between a DT point and the cell is within the range of [maximum, minimum], the DT point is not filtered out. l Measurement area, set the maximum and minimum receive level of DT points. If the receive level of a DT point is within the range of [maximum, minimum], the DT point is not filtered out. l Azimuth area, set the azimuth of the sector. The azimuth is the angle between the DT point and the north direction of the map. You can set multiple filtering conditions related to the azimuth. In the Azimuth List list, the data within the range of [Start,End] is not filtered out. l In the Clutter area, select a clutter class. The DT points related to the selected clutter class is not filtered out. Select All: Select clutter types in batches. Select None: Clear clutter types in batches. For details about the parameters, see 10.18.11 Parameters for Filtering the DT Data. Step 5 Determine whether to select Delete Outside Points. If you select this option, the system deletes the information about the DT points that are filtered out; if you do not select this option, the system just hides the information about the DT points that are filtered out in the filtering results. Step 6 Click OK to filter the DT data. ----End
Follow-up Procedure After the filtering, you can view the filtering results. 1.
In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement > Sitex_x > drive test file.
2.
Choose Open Table from the shortcut menu.
3.
Check the filtering results.
10.17.3 Filtering DT Data in Batches This section describes how to filter drive test (DT) data in batches. You can filter DT data by cell to view the required data of cells.
Prerequisites 1.
The geographic data has been imported.
2.
The DT data has been imported.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 On the displayed Data tab page, choose Drive Test > DT data file in the navigation tree. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
588
GENEX U-Net User Guide
10 U-Net Auxiliary Functions NOTE
The U-Net can filter DT data that is exported to a file in .txt, .xls, or .csv format using the GENEX Probe.
Step 3 Right-click the selected DT file and choose Open Table from the shortcut menu. The DT data window is displayed. Step 4 You can perform the following operations as required. If...
Then...
You want to view the data of a cell
In the DT data window, right-click a cell whose data needs to be viewed and choose Filter by Selection from the shortcut menu. The data of only the selected cell is displayed in the DT data window.
You want to view the data of other cells except for the selected cell
In the DT data window, right-click the cell whose data does not need to be viewed and choose Filter Excluding Selection from the shortcut menu. The data of all cells except for the selected cell is displayed in the DT data window.
You want to view the data of one or more cells
1. Select the cells that need to be displayed from the Serving Cell drop-down list box in the DT data window. 2. Click OK. The data of the selected cells is displayed in the DT data window.
NOTE
You can right-click in the DT data window and choose Remove Filter from the shortcut menu to remove the filter effect.
----End
10.17.4 Calibrating Propagation Models Based on the CW Measurement Data Common propagation models cannot meet the requirements of actual networking scenarios that feature complicated terrain conditions. To prevent the great path loss error caused by using a common propagation model for calculation, you must adjust the coefficients of the propagation model before service planning. In this way, you can obtain a propagation model suitable for the actual network environment. Currently, the U-Net enables you to calibrate only the SPM2G, SPM900 and Volcano propagation models.
Prerequisites The CW Measurement data is imported.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
589
GENEX U-Net User Guide
10 U-Net Auxiliary Functions
Context The purpose of propagation model calibration is to optimize the coefficients of a propagation model by using the actual CW measurement data. The current U-Net supports propagation calibration based on the CW measurement data only. The common counters for analyzing the calibration results are as follows: l
Average error: Average value of the prediction error.
l
Standard deviation: Mean square of the difference between the prediction error and the average error.
l
Correlation coefficient: indicates the correlation between the actual CW measurement data and the data calculated by the propagation model.
Prediction error indicates the error between the CW measurement data and the data calculated by the propagation model. If the standard deviation and average error of the calibration result are small, it indicates that the calibrated propagation model matches the actual environment.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement. Step 3 Choose Automatically Calibrate from the shortcut menu. The Adjust Form dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Select the propagation model to be calibrated in Select Propagation Model. Step 5 Select the CW file for propagation model calibration in Select Measurement File. Step 6 Set the parameters for calibrating the propagation model in Calibrate Limitation. l Selecting (clearing)Losses Per Clutter indicates whether the impact of the clutter factor is considered. If this option is selected, the loss of each clutter class is calibrated. l Set the standard deviation in Standard Deviation. The default value is 8 dB. Usually, the value of this parameter is set to 8 dB in the case of flat areas and to 11 dB in the case of hilly areas. l Set the cell edge coverage probability in Cell Edge Coverage Probability. The default value is 75%. Step 7 Select the coefficients of the propagation model to be calibrated. You can calibrate the coefficients of the propagation model one by one until you obtain the desired propagation model. Alternatively, you can also calibrate all the coefficients at a time. Step 8 Click Calibrate to start the calibration. After the calibration, the Result window is displayed. Step 9 Query the calibration results. For detailed description of parameters, see 10.18.10 Interface Description: Calibration Results of Propagation Models. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
590
GENEX U-Net User Guide
10 U-Net Auxiliary Functions
If...
Then...
The calibrated propagation model meets your requirements
Click Commit to make the calibration results take effect.
The calibrated propagation model does not meet your requirements
Click Next to select other coefficients for calibration until you obtain the desired propagation model. The calibration operations are the same as Step 7 to Step 9.
----End
10.17.5 Checking the Parameter Settings of the Propagation Model To check whether the parameter settings of the propagation model are appropriate, use the propagation model to calculate the signal strength at each drive test point, and compare the calculation results with the actual drive test results.
Prerequisites The CW measurement or Drive Test data has been imported. NOTE
If you need to check the calibration effect of the propagation model, the following prerequisites must be met: l
The propagation model has been calibrated.
l
The calibration of the propagation model has taken effect.
Context This section uses the CW measurement data as an example.
Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement > Sitex_x > drive test file. Step 3 Choose Calculate Signal Levels from the shortcut menu. Note the messages displayed in the Event Viewer window. Step 4 After the calculation is completed, In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement > Sitex_x > drive test file. Step 5 Choose Open Table from the shortcut menu. l The table lists the actual signal strength at each drive test point, signal strength at each drive test point calculated by the calibrated propagation model, and the difference between the two values. l For details about the parameters in the table, see 10.18.9 Parameters for Viewing DT Point Information. Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
591
GENEX U-Net User Guide
10 U-Net Auxiliary Functions
Step 6 Optional: Display the drive test results in a graphic window. 1.
In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement > Sitex_x > drive test file.
2.
Choose Open the Analysis Tool from the shortcut menu. l The system displays a graphic window, which lists the drive test results. l You can select a display object from the drop-down list in the upper right corner of the graphic window, for example, the actual DT data M(dBm), calculated theoretical data P(dBm), and the difference value Error(P-M)(dB) between the two. In addition, you can view the CDF curve P-M(CDF) for the DT data and theoretical data M,P(dBm) or the difference value. l When you click a drive test point in the graphic window, the information about the drive test point is displayed in the GIS window and the table.
----End
10.18 Interface Description: U-Net Auxiliary Functions This section describes the interfaces and parameters for U-Net auxiliary functions.
10.18.1 Parameters for Exporting Maps to the Google Earth This section describes the parameters for connecting to the Google Earth or exporting .kmz files. You can refer to this section when connecting to the Google Earth or exporting .kmz files in the Earth View dialog box. Parameter
Description
Value
Sites
Indicates whether to export information about base stations to the Google Earth.
By default, this option is selected.
Export Sites
Indicates the base stations to be displayed.
The default value is Full Map.
You can select all the base stations in the entire map or the base stations in a selected polygon. You can also select only a specified base station.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Transceiver Radius
Indicates the radius of cell icons in Google Earth.
The value range is from 1 to 1,000 and the unit is meter. The default value is 50.
Polygons
Indicates whether to export polygons to the Google Earth.
By default, this option is selected.
Predictions
Indicates whether to export the prediction results to the Google Earth.
By default, this option is selected.
Transparency
Indicates the transparency of the prediction results on the Google Earth.
The default value is 75%.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
592
GENEX U-Net User Guide
10 U-Net Auxiliary Functions
Parameter
Description
Value
Simulation Users
Indicates whether to export the capacity simulation results to the Google Earth.
By default, this option is selected.
Drive Test
Indicates whether to export DT data to the Google Earth.
By default, this option is selected.
CW Measurement
Indicates whether to export CW test data to the Google Earth.
By default, this option is selected.
10.18.2 Parameters for Setting Custom Fields This section describes the parameters for setting custom fields. You can refer to this section when setting parameters for custom fields in the Field Define window.
Parameters in the Field Define Window Parameter
Description
Group
This parameter is not in use. You do not need to set it.
Legend
Indicates the name of a custom field.
Type
Indicates the data type of a custom field.
Size
If Text is selected as the data type, the Size box is available, where you can set the text length. The value range is from 1 to 300. If you select other data types, the Size box is unavailable.
Default Value
Indicates the default value of a custom field.
Choice List
Indicates other values of a custom field. l After you set Choice List, a drop-down list is provided for the field. Then, you can set the field to Default Value or values in Choice List. l When entering values in Choice List, press Enter after entering a value to enter another value. l If True/False is selected as the data type, the default values in Choice List are True and False, which cannot be modified.
10.18.3 Parameters for Searching for Base Stations This section describes the parameters for searching for base stations. You can refer to this section when searching for base stations in the Find Transceiver dialog box.
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
593
GENEX U-Net User Guide
10 U-Net Auxiliary Functions
Parameter
Description
Filter
Area
Displays the available area for the filtering.
First row of parameters
Indicates the first filtering condition. l Select a network parameter from the first dropdown list. l Select an operation relation from the second dropdown list. l Type a value in the text box. The filtering condition takes effect only after the corresponding check box is selected.
Second row of parameters
Indicates the second filtering condition. l Select an antenna- or equipment-related parameter from the first drop-down list. l Select an operation relation from the second dropdown list. l Select an antenna- or equipment-related value from the third drop-down list. The filtering condition takes effect only after the corresponding check box is selected.
Condition
Indicates the relation between the two filtering conditions. l And l Or
Result
Displays the searching result. The result is valid only after you click Find.
10.18.4 Parameters for Setting NE Display Properties This section describes the parameters for setting the display properties of base stations. You can refer to this section when setting the base station display properties in the Display Field dialog box.
Parameters in the Display Field dialog box Table 10-3 Parameters on the Label Display tab page
Issue 03 (2012-12-25)
Parameter
Description
Available Fields
Lists the parameters that can be displayed in the map window.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
594
GENEX U-Net User Guide
10 U-Net Auxiliary Functions
Parameter
Description
Selected Fields
Lists the selected parameters. The selected parameters are displayed in the map window. You can select the parameters to be displayed in the map window by using >, >>,
